Code Requirements

for Nuclear Safety Related

Concrete Structures(AC1 349-97)
and Commentary-AC1 349R-97

Reported by AC1 Committee 349

american concrete institute

P.O. BOX 9094
FARMINGTON HILLS, MICHIGAN 48333

COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute

Licensed by Information Handling Services
 = Obb2949 0538055 403

First printing, February1998

Code Requirements for Nuclear Safety-Related Concrete Structures (AC1 349-97)

and Commentary-ACI349R-97

Most AC1 Standardsandcommittee reports reports in thegeneralareas of materials and

aregatheredtogether in theannuallyrevised properties of concrete,construction practices
AC1 Manual of ConcretePractice.Theseveralandinspection,pavementsandslabs, struc-
volumesarearrangedtogrouprelated material turaldesignandanalysis,structural specifica-
together and maybe purchasedindividuallyortions,andspecialproducts and processes.
in setS.The AC1 Manual of Concrete Practice is
also
available on CD-ROM. A complete
catalog of all AC1 publications is
AC1 Committees prepare
standards and available
without
charge.

American Concrete Institute

P.O. Box 9094
Farmington Hills, MI 48333-9094

AC1 Certification
Programs
Enhancement
of
Thefinalquality of aconcretestructuredependson
qualifiedpeople to constructit. AC1 certification pro-
gramsidentifycraftsmen,technicians,andinspectors
who have demonstrated their qualifications. The follow-
ing programs are administeredby AC1 to fulfill the grow-
ing demand in the industryfor certified workers:
Concrete Flatwork Finisher
Concrete Flatwork Technician
Concrete Field TestingTechnician-Grade I
Concrete Strength Testing Technician
Concrete Laboratory TestingTechnician-Grade I
Concrete Laboratory TestingTechnician-Grade II
Concrete Construction Inspector-ln-Training
Concrete Construction Inspector
Concrete Transportation Construction
Inspector-ln- Training
Concrete Transportation Construction Inspector
This document may already contain reference to these
AC1 certification programs,whichcan be incorporated
into project specifications or quality control procedures.
If not, suggested guide specifications are available on
request from the AC1 Certification Department.
AC1 Documents
The technical committees responsible for AC1 committee
reports and standards striveto avoid ambiguities, omis-
sions, and errors in these documents. In spite of these
efforts,theusers ofAC1 documentsoccasionally find
information or requirements thatmay be subject to more
than one interpretation or may be incomplete or incor-
rect.
To assist in theeffort for accuracyandclarity,the
Technical Activities Committee solicits the help of indi-
viduals using AC1 reports and standards in identifying
and eliminating problems that maybe associated with
their use.
Users who have suggestions for the improvement of
AC1 documents are requested to contact the AC1 Engi-
neering Department in writing, with the following infor-
mation:
1. Title and number of the document containing the
problem and specific sectionin the document;
2. Concise descriptionof the problem;
3. If possible, suggested revisions for mitigating the
problem.
The Institute’s Engineering Staff will review and take
appropriateactiononallcomments and suggestions
received. Members as well as nonmembers of the Insti-
tute are encouragedto assist in enhancing the accuracy
and usefulness of AC1 documents.

COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute

Licensed by Information Handling Services
 STD.ACI 347-ENGL 1777 0662747 0538056 3 4 T

AC1 349-97

Code Requirements for Nuclear Safety Related

Concrete Structures(AC1 349-97)

Reported by AC1 Committee 349

Charles A. Zalesiak
Chairman

Hans G. Ashar GUM= A. Harstead Richard S. OIT

Ranjit Bandyopadhyay Christopher Heim Robert B.Pan
Ronald A. Cook Charles J. Hookham Julius V. Rotzt
Jack M. Daly John C. Hughes John P.Russ
Fadi M. Diya Richard E. Klingner Robert W. Talmadge
Arobindo Dutt Sandra L. Lee Chen P. Tan
Branko Galunic Timothy J. Lynch Richard E. Toland
Dwaine A. Godfrey Frederick L. Moreadith Donald T. Ward
H e m L. Graves III Dragos A. Nuta Alkrt Y.C. Wong

This standard covers the pmper design and construction of concrete strue-
lures which form part of a nuclear power plant and which have nuclear
safety relatedfuncrions. but does not cover concrete reactor
vessek and con-
crete contaiqwnt structures (asaéjüted by ACI-ASME Committee359).
The structures coveredby the code include concrete structuresimide and
outside the containment system.
This code may be referenced and applied subject
to agreement betweenthe
Owner and the Regulatory Authority.
The format of this Code is based on the “Building Code Requirementfor
ReinforredConcrete(AC1 318-89) (Revised 1992)” and incorporates
recent revisionsof that standard. exceptfor Chapter 12, which is based on
AC1 318-95.
Keywords: admixtures; aggregates; anchorage (structural); beam-column
frame; beams (supports);buildingcodes;cements;cold weathercon-
struction; columns (supports); combined stress; composite construction
(concrete and steel); composite construction (concrete to concrete); com-
pressive strength; concrete construction; concretes; concrete slabs; con-
struction joints; continuity(structural);cover;cracking(fracturing);
creepproperties;curing;deep beams; deflection;drawings(drafting):
earthquakeresistantstructures;edgebeams;embeddedserviceducts;
flexuralstrength; floors; foldedplates;footings;formwork(construc-
tion); frames; hot weather construction; inspection; joists; loads (forces);
load tests (structural); mixing; mix proportioning; modulesof elasticity;
moments;nuclearpowerplants;nuclearreactorcontainments;nuclear
reactors; nuclear reactor safety; pipe columns; pipes (tubes): placing; pre-
cast concrete; prestressed concrete; prestressing steels; quality control;
reinforced concrete; reinforcing steels; roofs; safety; serviceability; shear
strength; shearwalls; shells(structuralforms);spans;specifications;
splicing; strength; strength analysis; structural analysis; structural design;
T-beams; temperature; torsion; walls; water; welded wire fabric.

AC1 349-97 was revised by the Expedited StandardizationRocadure and became

cffective~April11.1997.
Copynght Q 1998. American ConcreteInstitute.
1 AU rights resewed including riahts of rewoduction and usc in any form or by any

I I
This standardwas submittedto letter ballotof the committeeand was means, kcluding the makingof-copies bi any photo p o c e s s , or-by eledrohc Ór
approvedinaccordancewithInstitutestandardizationprocedures. mechanical device. printed, written,or oral, or recordingfor sound oc visual reproduc-
tion or for use in any Laowledge or retrieval system or device. unless Dermission in

349-1
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
 349-2

CONTENTS
PART 1 4 E N E R A L Chapter 7-Details of Reinforcement. ...p. 349-18
7.0-Notation
Chapter l-General Requirements ......
p. 349-5 7.1-Standard hooks
1.1"scope 7.2-Minimum bend diameters
1.2-Drawings, specifications,and calculations 7.3-Bending
1.3-Inspection and record keeping 7.4-Surface conditions of reinforcement
1.4-Approval of special systems of design or construction 7.5-Placing reinforcement
1S-Quality assurance program 7.6-Spacing limits for reinforcement
7.7-Concrete protection for reinforcement
Chapter 2-Definitions ................ p. 349-6 7.8-Special reinforcing details for columns
7.9"COnne~tiOnS
PART 24TANDARDS FOR TESTS AND 7.10-Lateral reinforcement for compression members
MATERIALS 7.1 l-Lateral reinforcement for flexural members
Chapter 3"aterials. ................. p. 349-8 7.12-Minimum reinforcement
3.0-Notation
3.1-Tests of materials PART A E N E R A L REQUIREMENTS
3.2-Cements
3.3-Aggregates Chapter &-Analysis and Design:
3.kWater General Considerations.. ........... p. 349-23
3.5-Metal reinforcement 8.0-Notation
3.6Admixtures 8.1-Design methods
3.7-Storage and identificationof materials 8.2-Loading
3.8-Standards cited in this Code 8.3-Methods of analysis
8.4-Redistribution of negative moments in continuous
PART 3"CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS nonprestressed flexural members
8.5-Modulus of elasticity
Chapter 4"Durability Requirements. ., . p. 349-12 8.6-Stiffness
4.0-Notation 8.7-Span length
4.1-Water-cementitious materials ratio 8.8"columns
4.2-Freezing and thawing exposures 8.9-Arrangement of live load
4.3-Sulfate exposures 8.lO-T-beam construction
4 . A o m o s i o n protection of reinforcement 8.1 l-Joist construction
8.12-Separate floor finish
Chapter !+Concrete Quality, Mixing,
and Placing. ...................... p. 349-13
Chapter +Strength and Serviceability
5.GNotation
5 . l-General
Requirements ..................... p. 349-25
9.0-Notation
5.2-Selection of concrete proportions 9.I-General
5.3-Proportioning on the basis of field experience and/or 9.2-Required strength
trial mixtures 9.3-Design strength
5.4-Proportioning by water-cementitiousmaterials ratio 9.4-Design strength for reinforcement
5.5-Average strength reduction 9.5"control of deflections
5.6Evaluation and acceptance ofconcrete
5.7-Preparation of equipment and place of deposit
5.8-Mixing
Chapter 10-Flexure and Axial Loads ... p. 349-29
10.0-Notation
5.9-Conveying 10.1-Scope
5.1 &Depositing 10.2-Design assumptions
5.1 I-Curing
10.3"General principles and requirements
5.12-Cold weather requirements
10.4-Distance between lateral supports of
5.13-Hot weather requirements
flexural members
Chapter 6-Formwork, Embedded Pipes, 10.5-Minimum reinforcement of flexural members
and Construction Joints ............ p. 349-16 10.6-Distribution of flexural reinforcement inbeams and
6.1-Design of formwork one-way slabs
6.2-Removal of forms and shores 10.7-Deep flexural members
6.3-Conduits, pipes, and sleeves embedded in concrete 10.8-Design dimensions for compression members
6.4-Construction joints 10.9-Limits for reinforcement of compression members

COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute

Licensed by Information Handling Services
 lO.l&Slenderness effects in compression members 13.4-Slab reinforcement
10.1 1-Approximate evaluation of slenderness effects 13.5”openings in slab systems
10.12-Axially loaded members supporting slab system 13.6-Direct design method
10.13-Transmission of column loads through floor system 13.7-Quivalent frame method
10.14-Composite compression members
10.15-Bearing strength Chapter 14-Walls. .................. .p. 349-57
14.0-Notation
Chapter 1l a h e a r and Torsion ........ p. 349-34 14.1-S~0pe
11.&Notation 14.2-General
11.1-Shear strength 14.3-Minimum reinforcement
11.2-Lightweight concrete 14.4-Walls designed as compression members
11.3-Shear strength provided by concretefor 14.5-Empirical design method
nonprestressed members 14.&Nonbearing walls
1l . M h e a r strength providedby concrete for prestressed 14.7-Walls as grade beams
members
11.5-Shear strength providedby shear reinforcement Chapter 15-Footings. ............... .p. 349-58
11A-Combined shear and torsion strengthfor 15 .O-Notation
nonprestressed members with rectangular or 15.l-Scope
flanged sections 15.2-Loads and reactions
11.7-Shear-friction 15.3-Footings supporting circular or regular polygon
11.8-Special provisions fordeep flexural members shaped columnsor pedestals
11.9-Special provisions for brackets and corbels 15.4-Moment in footings
11.1 &Special provisions for walls 15.5-Shear in footings
11.11-Transfer of moments to columns 15.6-Development of reinforcement in footings
11.12-Special provisions for slabs and footings 15.7-Minimum footing depth
15.8-Transfer of force at base of column, wall, or
Chapter 12-Development and Splices reinforced pedestal
of Reinforcement.. ................. p. 349-44 15.9-Sloped or stepped footings
12.0-Notation 15.1O-Combined footings and mats
12.1-Development of reinforcement: General
12.2-Development of deformed bars and deformed wire
in tension
Chapter 1 -recast Concrete. ........ .p. 349-60
16.1-SCO&E
12.3-Development of deformed barsin compression 16.2-Design
12.4-Development of bundled bars 16.3-Precast wall panels
12.5-Development of standard hooks in tension 16.4-Details
12.LMechanical anchorage 16.5-Identification and marking
12.7-Development of welded deformed wire fabric 16.6-Transportation, storage, and erection
in tension
12.8-Development of welded plain wire fabricin tension Chapter 174omposite Concrete
12.9-Development of prestressing strand Flexural Members. ................. .p. 349-60
12.10-Development of flexural reinforcement: General 17.0-Notation
12.11-Development of positive moment reinforcement 17.1-S~0pe
12.12-Development of negative moment reinforcement 17.2-General
12.13-Development of web reinforcement 17.3-Shoring
12.14-Splices of reinforcement: General 17.4-Vertical shear strength
12.15-Splices of deformed bars and deformed wire 17.5-Horizontal shear strength
in tension 17.+Ties for horizontal shear
12.1 &Splices of deformed bars in compression
12.17-Special splice requirements for columns
12.1 &Splices of welded deformed wire fabric in tension
Chapter 18-Prestressed Concrete. ....
.p. 349-61
18.&Notation
12.19-Splices of welded plain wire fabric in tension 18.1-Scope
18.2-General
PART !+STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS 18.3-Design assumptions
18.4-Permissible stresses in concrete: Flexural members
Chapter 13-Two-way Slab Systems .... p. 349-51 18.5-Permissible stresses in prestressing tendons
13.0-Notation 18.6-Loss of prestress
13.1-Scope 18.7-Flexural strength
13.2-Definitions 18.8-Limits for reinforcementof flexural members
13.3-Design procedures 18.9-Minimum bonded reinforcement
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
 349-4

18.10-Statically indeterminate structures 21.6-Structural walls, diaphragms, andtrusses

18.1l-compression members: Combined flexure and 2 1.7-Frame members not proportioned to resist forces in-
axial loads duced by earthquake motions
18.12-Slab systems
18.13-Tendon anchorage zones
18.1U o r r o s i o n protection for unbonded prestressing APPENDICES
tendons
18.15-Post-tensioning ducts APPENDIX A-Thermal Considerations. . p. 349-75
18.1& G r o u t for bonded prestressing tendons A.1-Scope
18.17-Protection for prestressing tendons A.2-Definitions
18.18-Application and measurement of prestressing force A.3-General design requirements
18.19-Post-tensioning anchorages and couplers A . A o n c r e t e temperatures

Chapter 19-Shells.. ................ p. 349-66 APPENDIX B-Steel Embedments ......

p. 349-76
19.0-Notation B.0-Notation
19.1-Scope and definitions B.1-Scope
19.24eneral B.2-Definitions
19.3-Design strength of materials B.3-General requirements and loading combinations
19.4-Section design and reinforcement requirements B.4-Design requirements for concrete
19.5“Construction
B.5-Anchorage requirements
B.6-Design requirements for embedment steel
PART &SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS B.7-Expansion anchors
B.8-Inserts
Chapter 2 M t r e n g t h Evaluation B.9-Grouted embedments
of Existing Structures .............. p. 349-68 B.10-Fabrication and installation
20.0-Notation
20.1-Strength evaluation: General
APPENDIX C-Special Provisions for Impulsive
20.2-Analytical investigations: General
20.3-Load tests: General
and ImpactiveEffects.. .............
p. 349-83
C.0-Notation
20.4-Load tests of flexural members
c.1-scope
20.5-Members other than flexural members
C.2-Dynamic strength increase
20.6Safety
C.3-Deformation
Chapter 21“Special Provisions for C.4”Requirements to assure ductility
Seismic Design.. .................. p. 349-69 C.5-Shear strength
2 1 .&Notation C.6-Impulsive effects
21.1-Definitions C.7-Impactive effects
2 1.2-General requirements C.8-Impactive and impulsive loads
21.3-Flexural members of frames
21.4-Frame members subjected to bending and axial load APPENDIX M I Metric Equivalents
21.5-Joints of frames of U.S. Customary Units. ............ p. 349-86

About the presentation: AC1 349-97 is organized in the format of “Building Code Requirements
for Reinforced Concrete (AC1 318-89)(Revised 1992),” which is the basis for the 349 code. To
aid the reader in distinguishing between original 3 18 language and material revised or added by
Committee 349, all material not derived directly from AC1 318-89 (Revised 1992)is marked with
a sidebar to the left of the column.

COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute

Licensed by Information Handling Services
 PART 1-GENERAL
Chapter l-General Requirements
1.l"scope
This Code provides the minimum requirements for the de- shall require compliance with design drawings and specifi-
signandconstruction of nuclearsafetyrelated concrete
structures and structural elements for nuclear power generat-
ing stations. Safety related structures and structural elements for traceability.
subject to this standard are those concrete structures which
support, house, or protect nuclear safety class systems or
component partsof nuclear safetyclass systems.
Specifically excluded from this Code are those structures vice inspections, and durability and performance of struc-
covered by "Code for Concrete Reactor Vessels and Con-
tainments,"ASME Boiler
and
Pressure
VesselCode
Section III, Division 2, and pertinent General Requirements
(AC1 Standard359).
1.2"Drawings, specifications, and calculations
1.2.1 Copies of structural drawings, typical details, and
specifications for all reinforced concrete construction shall
be signed bya licensed engineer.These drawings (including
supplementary drawings to generate the as-built condition),
typical details, and specifications shall be retained by the
Owner, or his designee, asa permanent recordfor the life of
the strucke. As a minimum, these drawings, details, and
specifications together shall show:
a) Name and dateof issue of code and supplement to
which the design conforms
b) Live load and other loads used inthe design
c) Specified compressive strengthof concrete at stated
ages or stages of construction for which each part of
structure is designed
d) Specified strengthor grade of reinforcement
e) Size and location of all structural elements and
reinforcement
f) Provision for dimensionalchanges resulting from creep,
shrinkage, and temperature
g) Magnitude and locationof prestressing forces
h) Anchorage length of reinforcement and location and
length of lap splices
i) Type and location of welded splices and mechanical
connections of reinforcement.
1.2.2 Calculations pertinent to the design (including the
results of model analysis, if any) shall be retained by Own-
er or hisdesignee, as a permanent record for the life of the
structure. Accompanying these calculations shall be a
statement of the applicable design methods. When com-
puter programs are used, design assumptions and identi-
fied input and output data maybe retained in lieu of
calculations. Model analysis shall be permitted to supple-
ment calculations.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
1.3-lnspection and record keeping
13.1 The Owner is responsible for the inspectionof con-
:rete construction throughout all work stages. The Owner
:ations and keep records required for quality assurance of
:onstruction,fabrication,manufacture or installation,and
1.3.2 The Owner shall be responsible for designating the
records to bemaintainedandthedurationofretention.
Records pertinent to plant modifications or revisions, in-ser-
tures shallbe maintained for thelife of the plant. The Owner
shall be responsibleforcontinuedmaintenance of the
records. The records shallbk maintained at the power plant
site, or at other locations as determinedby the Owner. As a
minimum, thefollowing installatiodconstruction records
shall be considered for lifetime retention:
a) Check-off sheets for tendon and reinforcing
steel installation
b) Concrete cylinder testreports and charts
c) Concrete design mix reports
d) Concrete placement records
e) Material property reports on reinforcing steel
f ) Material property reports on reinforcing steel
mechanical connection material
g) Material property reports on steel embedments
in concrete
h) Material property reports on tendon and anchorage
fabrication material and corrosion inhibitors
i) Reports for periodic tendon inspection
1.4-Approval of special systems of design or
construction
Sponsors of any system of design or construction withii
the scope of this Code, the adequacy of which has been
shown by successful use or by analysis or test, but which
does not conform to or is not covered by this Code, shall
have the right to present the data on which their design is
based to the Regulatory Authority for review and approval.
The Regulatory Authority may investigate the data so sub-
mitted, andmay require tests and formulate rules governing
the design and constructionof such systems to meet the in-
tent of this Code.
1S-Quality assurance program
A quality assurance program covering nuclear safety re-
lated structures shall
be developed prior to starting any work.
The general requirements and guidelines for establishing and
executing the quality assurance program during the design
and construction phases of nuclear power generatingstations
are established by Title 10 of the Code of Federal Regula-
tions, Part 50 (lOCFRSO), Appendix B.
 ~~
STD.AC1 34S-ENGL L997
349-6 AC1 STANDARD
Chapter 2-Definitions
2.1 The following terms are defined for general use in this
Code. Specializeddefinitions appear in individual chapters.
Admixture-Material other than water, aggregate, or hy-
draulic cement, used as aningredient of concrete and add-
ed to concrete before or during its mixing to modify its
properties.
Aggregde-Granular material, such as sand, gravel,
crushed stone, and iron blast-furnace slag, used with a ce-
menting medium to form a hydraulic-cement concrete or
mortar.
Anchorage-In post-tensioning, a device used to anchor
tendon to concrete member; inpretensioning, a device used
to anchor tendon during hardening of concrete; as used in
Appendix B, a means by which force is transferred to the
concrete.
Bonded tendon-Prestressing tendon that is bonded to con-
crete either directlyor through grouting.
Cemenririous material-Materials as specified in Chapter3
that have cementing value when used in concreteor by them-
selves, suchas portland or blended hydraulic cements,or in
combination withfly ash and/or raw or calcined natural poz-
zolans.
Column-Member with a ratio of height-to-least-lateraldi-
mension of 3 or greater used primarilyto support axial com-
pressive load.
Composite concrete flexural members-Concrete flexural
members of precast and/or cast-in-place concrete elements
constructedinseparateplacementsbut so interconnected
that all elements respondto loads as a unit.
Concrete-Mixture of portland cement or any other hydrau-
lic cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, and water, with
or without admixtures.
Concrete, specified compressive strength of, (f >)"Com-
pressive strengthof concrete usedin design and evaluated in
accordancewithprovisionsofChapter 4, expressed in
pounds per square inch (psi). Whenever the quantity f is
under a radical sign, square root of numerical value only is
intended, and result has units of pounds
per square inch(psi).
Creep-Stress-induced, time-temperature dependent strain.
or curves
Curvaturefriction-Friction resulting from bends
in the specified prestressing tendon profile.
Deformedreinforcement-Deformedreinforcingbars,bar
and rod mats, deformed wire, welded smooth wire fabric, and quake (OBE) for a reactor siteis that which produces the vi-
welded deformed wire fabric conforming 3.5.3.
to
Development length-Length of embedded reinforcement
required to develop the design strength of reinforcementa at remain functional.
critical section. See 9.3.3.
Eflective depth of section (d)-Distance measured From ex-
treme compressionfiber to centroidof tension reinforcement. for a 100 year recurrence interval.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
m 0662949 0538061 707
Eflective prestress-Stress remaining in prestressing ten-
dons afterall losses have occmed excluding effects of dead
load and superimposed load.
Ernbedment-Structural componenttypically cast into a
concrete structure, that translates applied forces and mo-
ments from attached equipment and other sources into the
structure.
Embedment length-Length of embeddedreinforcement
provided beyonda critical section.
Engineer-The licensed professional engineer, employed
by the Owner-contracted design authority or other agency,
responsible for issuing design drawings, specifications, or
other documents.
Evaluation-An engineering review of an existing safety
related concrete structure with the purpose of determining
physical condition and functionality. This review may in-
clude analysis, condition surveys, maintenance,testing, and
repair.
Jacking force-In prestressed concrete, temporary force
exerted by device that introduces tension into prestressing
tendons.
Lax& dead"Dead weight supportedby a member (without
load factors).
Load, fùctored--load, multiplied by appropriate load fac-
tors,used to proportionmembers by the strengthdesign
method of this code. See 8.1 and 9.2.
had, live-Live load specified by the Engineer (without
load factors).
Load, sustained-Dead load and the portions of other nor-
mal loads in 9.1.1 which are expected to act for a sufficient
period of time to cause time-dependent effects.
Massive concrete-Mass of concrete of sufficient dimen-
sions to produce excessive temperatures due to heat of hy-
drationunlessspecialprecautions are takenregarding
concrete placement temperatures, placing rate, or heat re-
moval. Portionsof the structure to be treated as massive con-
crete shall be so identifiedonthedesigndrawings or
specifications.
Modulus of elasticity-Ratioofnormalstress to corre-
sponding strain for tensile or compressive stresses below
proportional limitof material. S e e 8.5.
Operating basis earthquake-Theoperatingbasisearth-
bratorygroundmotionforwhichthosefeatures ofthe
nuclear plant necessary for continued operation without un-
due risk to the health and safety ofthe public are designed to
Operating basis wind-Wind velocities and forces required
for the design of a structure in accordance withASCE 7-93
 Owner-The organizationresponsible for the operation,
maintenance, safety, and power generation of the nuclear
power plant.
Pedestal--Upright compression member with a ratio of un-
supported height to average least lateral dimension of less
than 3.
Pkzin concrete4oncrete that does not conform to defini-
tion of reinforced concrete.
Plain reinforcement-Reinforcement that does not conform
to definition of deformed reinforcement.
See 3.5.4.
Post-tensioning-Method of prestressing in which tendons
are tensioned after concrete has hardened.
Precast concrete-Plain or reinforced concrete element
cast
elsewhere than its final position inthe structure.
Prestressed concrete-Reinforced concrete in which inter-
nal stresses havebeen introduced to reduce potential tensile
stresses in concrete resulting from loads.
Pretensioning-Method of prestressing in which tendons
are tensioned before concreteis placed.
RegUrCrtory Author$y-The governmental agency or agen-
cies having legaljurisdiction over the design, construction,
and operationof nuclear power generatingstations to assure
public health and safety.
Reinforced concrete-Concrete containing adequate rein-
forcement, prestressed or nonprestressed, and designed on
the assumption that the two materials act togetherresisting
in
forces.
Reinforcement-Material that conforms to 3.5, excluding
prestressing tendons unless specifically included.
Safe shutdown earthquake-A safe shutdown earthquake
(SSE) for a reactor siteis that which produces the maximum
vibratory ground motionfor which those features of the nu-
clear power plant necessary to shut down the reactor and
maintain the plant ina safe shut down condition withoutun-
due risk tothe health and safety of the public
are designed to
i remainfunctional.
Shrinkage-Time-temperature-humidity dependent volume
reduction of concrete asa result of hydration, moisture mi-
gration, and drying process.
Span length-See 8.7.
Spiral reinforcement-continuously wound reinforcement
in the form ofa cylindrical helix.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
Stirrup-Reinforcementusedtoresistshearandtorsion
stresses in a structuralmember;typicallybars,wires, or
welded wire fabric (plain or deformed) bent into L, U, or
rectangular shapes and located perpendicular to or at an an-
gle to longitudinal reinforcement. (The term “stirrups” is
usually appliedto lateral reinforcement in flexural members
and the term “ties”to those in compression members,) See
also Tie.
Strength, design-Nominal strength
multiplied
by a
strength reduction factor$. See 9.3.
Strength, nominul-Strength of a member or cross section
calculated in accordance with provisions and assumptions of
the strength design methodof this code before applicationof
any strength reduction factors. See 9.3.1.
Strength, required-Strength of a member or cross section
required to resist factoredio& or related internal moments
and forces in such combinations as are stipulated in this
code. See 9.1.1.
Stress-Intensity of force per unit area.
Stress rekàx&n-A phenomenon in which loss of stress
occurs when a constant strain is maintained at a constant
temperature.
Tendon-Steelelementsuchaswire,cable,bar, rod, or
strand, or a bundle ofsuch elements, used to impart prestress
to concrete.
Tie--LOOp of reinforcing bar or wire enclosing longitudinal
reinforcement. See also Stirrup.
Transfer-Act of transferring stressin prestressing tendons
from jacks or pretensioning bed to concrete member.
Unbondedtendons-Tendons in whichtheprestressing
steel is permanently free to move relative the
to surrounding
concrete towhich they are applying their prestressing forces.
WuU-Member, usually vertical, used
to enclose or separate
spaces.
Wobblefiction-In prestressed concrete, friction caused by
unintended deviationof prestressing sheathor duct from its
specified profile.
Yield strength-Specified minimum yield strength or yield
point ofreinforcementinpoundspersquareinch.Yield
strength or yield pointis determined in tension accordingto
applicable ASTM specifications as modified by 3.5 of this
Code.
 S T D - A C 1 3Y9-ENGL L997
3448 AC1 STANDARD
PART 2-STANDARDS FOR TESTS AND MATERIALS
Chapter 3”aterials
3.0”Notation
fy = specifiedyield strength ofnonprestressed
reinforcement,psi
3.1-Tests of materials
3.1.1 The Ownershall have theright to order testing of any
materials used in concrete constructionto determine if mate-
rials are of quality specified.
3.1.2 Tests of materials and of concrete shall be made in
accordance withstandards listed in 3.8.
3.1.3 A complete record oftests of materials and of con-
crete shall be available for inspection as requiredby
Section 1.3.2.
I land
3.2.1 Cement shall conform to one of the following speci-
cement:
a) “Specification for Portland Cement” (ASTM C 150).
b) “Specification for Blended Hydraulic
Cements”
(ASTM C 5 9 3 , excluding Types S and SA which are
notintended as principal cementing constituents of
structural concrete.
3.2.2 Cement usedin the work shall correspond to that on
which selection of concrete proportions was based.See 5.2.
3.2.3 Every shipmentof cement shall be accompanied by
a certified mill test report stating the results of tests repre-
senting the cement in shipment and the ASTM specifica-
tion limits for each item ofrequired chemical, physical, and
optional characteristics. No cement shall beusedinany
structural concrete prior to receipt of 7 daymill test
strengths.
3.3”Aggregates
3.3.1 Concrete aggregates shall conformto one of the fol-
lowing specifications:
a) “Specification for Concrete Aggregates” (ASTM C 33).
b)“Specification for Aggregates for Radiation-Shielding
Concrete” (ASTM C637).
3.3.2 Aggregates failing to meet ASTM C 33 but which
have been shownby special testor actual service to produce
concrete of adequate strength anddurability may be used for
normal weight concrete where authorizedby the Engineer.
3.3.3 Nominal maximum size of coarse aggregateshall not
be larger than:
a) thenarrowestdimensionbetween sides of forms, nor
b)thedepthof slabs, nor
c) 3/4 the minimum clear spacing between individual rein-
forcing bars or wires, bundles of bars, or prestressing
tendons or ducts.
These limitations may be waivedif, in the judgment of the
Engineer, workabilityand methods of consolidationare such
that concrete can be placed without honeycombor voids.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
Obb2949 0538Ob3
58T
33.4-Testing requirements
3.3.4.1 Tests for full conformance withthe appropriate
specification, including tests for potential reactivity, shall
be performed prior to usage in construction unless such
tests are specifically exempted by the specifications as not
being applicable.
3.3.4.2 A daily inspection control program shall be
carried out during concrete production to determine and
control consistency in potentially variable characteristics
such as water content, gradation, and material finer than
No. 200 sieve.
33.43 Tests for conformancewith ASTM C 131,
ASTM C 289, and ASTM C88 shall be repeated whenever
there is reason to suspect a change in the basic geology or
mineralogy of the aggregates.
3.4-Water
3.4.1 Water used in mixing concrete shall be clean and
free frominjurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, or-
ganic materials, or other substances that may be deleterious
to concrete or reinforcement.
3.4.2 Mixing water for prestressed concrete or for con-
crete that will contain aluminum embedments, including
that portion of mixing watercontributed in the form offree
moisture on aggregates, shall notcontain deleterious
amounts of chloride ion. See 4.3.1.
3.4.3 Nonpotable water shall not be used in concrete un-
less the following are satisfied:
a) Selection of concrete proportions shall be based on con-
crete mixes using water fromthe same source.
b) Mortar test cubes made with nonpotable mixing water
shall have 7-day and 28-day strengths equal to at least
90 percent of strengths of similar specimens made with
potable water. Strength test comparisonshall be made on
mortars, identical except for the mixing water, prepared
and tested in accordance with “Method of Test for Com-
pressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using
2-inch or 5 0 ” Cube Specimens)” (ASTMC 109).
3.5-Metal reinforcement
3.5.1 Reinforcement shall be deformed reinforcement, ex-
cept that plain reinforcement maybe used for spirals or ten-
dons; and reinforcement consisting of structural steel, steel
pipe, or steel tubing shall be permitted as specified in tlus
code.
3.5.2 Reinforcement to be weldedshall be indicatedon the
drawings, and welding procedure to be used shall be speci-
fied. ASTM steel specifications, except for ASTM A706, shal
be supplementedto require a report of material properties nec-
essary to conform to welding procedures specified in “Struc-
tural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel“ (ANSI AWS D1.4)
i of the American Welding Society.
 STD.ACI 349-ENGL L997
NUCLEAR SAFETY
CODESTRUCTURES
35.3-Deformed reinforcement
3.5.3.1 Deformed reinforcing bars shall conform one to
of the following specifications:
a) “Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-SteelBars
for Concrete Reinforcement” (ASTM A 615).
b) “Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement” (ASTM A 706).
35.3.2 A minimum of one tensile test shallbe required
for each50 tons of each bar size produced from each heat of
steel.
3.5.3.3 Specified yield strength fy for deformed rein-
forcing bars shall not exceed 60,OOO psi.
35.3.4 Bar mats for concrete reinforcement shall con-
form to “Specification for Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar
Mats for Concrete Reinforcement” (ASTM A 184). Rein-
forcement used in bar mats shall conform to one of the spec-
ifications listed in 3.5.3.1.
35.3.5 Deformed wirefor concrete reinforcement shall
conform to “Specification for Deformed Steel Wire for Con-
crete Reinforcement” (ASTMA 496), except that wire shall
not be smaller than size D4.
3.5.3.6 Welded plain wire fabric for concrete reinforce-
ment shall conformto “Specification for Welded Steel Wire
Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement” (ASTMA 185). Weld-
ed intersections shall not be spaced farther apart than 12 in.
in direction of calculated stress, exceptfor wire fabric used
as stirmps in accordance with 12.13.2.
3.5.3.7 Welded deformed wire fabric for concrete re-
inforcement shall conform to “Specification for Welded
Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement”
(ASTM A 497). Welded intersections shall not be spaced
farther apart than 16 in. in direction of calculated stress,
except for wire fabric used as stirrups in accordance with
12.13.2.
35.3.8 Epoxy-coatedreinforcingbarsshallcomply
with“Specification for EpoxyCoatedReinforcingSteel
Bars” (ASTM A775). TheEngineer shall evaluate the suit-
ability of coated reinforcing steel for the expected service
environment in each application. Epoxy-coated reinforcing
steel shallalso conform to one of the specifications listed in
3.5.3.1.
35.4-Plain reinforcement
35.4.1 Plain bars for spiral reinforcement shall conform
to the specification listed in 3.5.3.l(a) including additional
requirements of 3.5.3.2
35.4.2 Smooth wire for spiral reinforcement shall con-
form to “Specification for Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for Con-
crete Reinforcement” (ASTM A 82).
35.5-Prestressing tendons
3.5.5.1 Wire, strands, andbarsfortendons in pre-
stressed concrete shall conform to one of the following
specifications:
a) Wire conforming to “Specification for Uncoated Stress-
Relieved Wire for Prestressed Concrete” (ASTM A421).
b) Low-relaxationwireconformingto“Specification for
UncoatedStress-RelievedSteelWireforPrestressed
Concrete”
including
Supplement“Low-Relaxation
Wire” (ASTM A 421).
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
0662949 0 5 3 8 0 6 4 4Lb
3499
c) Strand
conforming to “Specification for
Uncoated
Seven-Wire Stress-Relieved Strand for Prestressed Con-
crete” (ASTM A 416).
d) Barsconformingto “Specification for Uncoated High-
StrengthSteelBarforPrestressingConcrete“(ASTMA722).
35.5.2 Wire, strands, and barsnot specifically listed in
ASTM A 421, A 416, or A 722 are permitted provided they
conform to minimum requirements of these specifications
and do not have properties that make them less satisfactory
than those listed in ASTM A 421, A 416, or A 722.
35.6-Structural steel, steel pipe, or tubing
35.6.1 Structuralsteel used withreinforcingbars in
composite compression members meeting requirements of
10.14.7 or 10.14.8 shall conform to one of the following
specifications:
a) “Specification for Structural Steel” (ASTM A 36).
b) “Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural
Steel” (ASTM A 242).
c) “Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-
Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality” (ASTM A572).
d) “Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural
Steel with 50,000 psiMinimumYieldPointto 4 in.
Thick” (ASTM A 588).
3.5.6.2 Steel pipe or tubing for composite compression
members composed ofa steel encased concrete core meeting
requirements of 10.14.6 shall conform to one of the follow-
ing specifications:
a) Grade B of “SpecificationforPipe,Steel,Blackand
Hot-Dipped,Zinc-Coated, Welded
and
Seamless”
(ASTM A 53).
b) “Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Roundsand Shapes”
(ASTM A500).
c) “Specification for Hot-FormedWeldedandSeamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing” (ASTM A501).
3.6-Admixtures
3.6.1 Admixtures to be used in concrete shall be subject to
prior approvalby the Engineer.
3.6.2 An admixture shall be shown capableof maintaining
essentially the same composition and performance through-
out the workas the product used in establishing concrete pro-
portions in accordance with 5.2.
3.6.3 Calcium chloride or admixtures containing chloride
from other than impurities from admixture ingredients shall
not be used in prestressed concrete, in concrete containing
embedded aluminum, or in concrete cast against stay-in-
place galvanized metal forms. See 4.2.2 and 4.3.1.
3.6.4 Air-entraining admixtures shall conform
to “Specifica-
tion for Air-Fmtraining Admixtures
Concrete”
for
(ASTM C 260).
3.6.5 Water-reducing admixtures, retarding admixtures,
accelerating admixtures, water-reducing and retarding ad-
mixtures, and water-reducing and accelerating admixtures
shall conform to “Specification for Chemical Admixtures
for Concrete” (ASTM C 494) or “Specification for Chemi-
cal Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete”
(ASTM C 1017).
 S T D - A C 1 34S-ENGL 1997
3491O AC1 STANDARD
3.6.6 Fly ash or other pozzolans used as admixtures shall
conform to“Specification for Fly Ash and Rawor Calcined
Natural Pozzolans for Use in Portland Cement Concrete”
(ASTM C 618).
3.6.7-Testing
3.6.7.1 Tests forcompliance with the specification for
each admixture shall be required prior to initial shipment
and acceptance on site forusage in construction.
3.6.7.2 An infrared spectrum trace of the conformance
test sample ofair-entraining and water-reducing admixture
shall be furnished with the conformance test results.
3.7-Storage and identification of materials
3.7.1 Measures shall be established to provide for storage
of all materials so as to prevent damage or deterioration.
When necessary for particular products, special protective
environments such as inert gas atmosphere, specific mois-
ture content levels, and control temperatures shall be pro-
vided.
All storedmaterials shall be properly tagged or labeled to
permit identification.
3.7.2 Cementitious materials and aggregate shall be
stored in sucha manner asto prevent deterioration or intru-
sion of foreign matter.
3.7.3 Reinforcing material shall be stored in such a man-
ner as to permit inventory control and to preclude damage
or degradation of properties to less than ASTM Reinforce-
ment requirements.
Reinforcing steel, by groups of bars or shipments, shall
be identifiable by documentation, tags, or other means of
control, to a specific heat number or heat code until review
of the Material Test Report has been performed.
3.7.4 Prestressing system materials shall bestored in
such a manner as to insure traceability to the Material Test
Report during production and while in transit and storage.
3.8-Standards cited in this Code
3.8.1 Standards of the American Society for Testing and
Materials referred to in this Code arelisted below withtheir
serial designations, including year of adoption or revision,
and are declared to be part of this Code as if fully set forth
herein.
A
361
StandardSpecification
for
Structural
Steel
A36M-90
A53-90aStandardSpecificationforWeldedand
Stainless Steel Pipe
A82-90aStandardSpecificationforCold-DrawnSteelWire
for Concrete Reinforcement
A 1841 StandardSpecificationforFabricatedDeformed
A184M-90 Steel Bar Mats for Concrete
Reinforcement
A 185-90a Standard Specification for Welded Steel Wire Fabric
for Concrete Reinforcement
A2421StandardSpecificationforHigh-StrengthLow-Alloy
A242-89
Structural
Steel
A 416-90a Standard Specification for Uncoated Seven-Wire
Stress-Relieved Steel Strand for
Prestressed Concrete
A 42 1-90 Standard Specification for Uncoated Stress-Relieved
Steel W~refor Prestressed Concrete
A 496-90a Standard Specification for Deformed Steel Wire for
Concrete Reinforcement
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
0662949 05380b5 352 W
A 497-!Na Standard Specification for Welded Deformed Steel
Wire Fabricfor Concrete Reinforcement
A 500-90 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and
Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds
and Shapes
A 501-89 Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and
Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing
A 572 Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-kuloy
A572M-88 Columbium-Vanadium Steels of
Structural Quality
A 5881 Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-AUoy
A588-88 Structural Steel with50,000 psi
Minimum Xeld Point to4 in. Thick
A 615-90 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Bil-
let-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
A 7061 Standard Specificationfor Low-Alloy Steel
A706M-90 Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
A 722-90 Standard Specification for Uncoated High-Strength
Steel Barfor Prestressing Concrete
C 3 1-90 Standard Methodof Making and Curing
Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
c 33-90 Standard Specification for Concrete
Aggregates
C 39-86 Standard Method of Test for Compressive Strength
of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
C 42-87 Standard Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled
Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete
C 88-76 Standard Methodof Test for Soundnessof Aggre-
I
gates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or
Magnesium Sulfate
c 94-90 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed
Concrete
C 109-88 Standard Method of Test for Compressive Strength
of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-inch50-or
nun Cube Specimens)
C 131-81 Standard Test Method for Resistance to
I Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate
by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine
C 144-89 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry
Mortar
C 150-89 Standard Specification for Portland Cement
C 172-90 Standard Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete
C 192-90a Standard Method of Making and Curing
Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory
C 260-86 Standard Specificationfor Air-Entraining Admix-
tures for Concrete
Standard Method of Test for Potential
I c 289-81 Reactivity of Aggregates (Chemical Method)
C 494-86 Standard Specification for Chemical
Admixtures for Concrete
C 595-89 Standard Specificationfor Blended Hydraulic
Cements
I C 597-83 Standard Test Method for Pulse Velocity through
(1991) Concrete
C 618-89a Standard Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Cal-
cined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admix-
ture in Portland Cement Concrete
Standard Specification for Aggregates for
I c 637-73 Radiation-Shielding Concrete
C 685-90 Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volu-
metric Batching and Continuous Mixing
C 1017-85 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for
Use in Producing Flowing Concrete
Standard Test Method for Water Soluble
I c1218-92 Chloride inMrtar and Concrete
 3.8.2 “Structural
Welding
Code-Reinforcing
Steel”
(AWS 01.4-92) of the American Welding Society is de-
clared to be part of this Code asif fully set forth herein.
3.8.3 Requirements of the United States Nuclear Regula-
tory Commission referred to in this Code are listed below.
Where applicable, they shall be considered a part of this
Code the same as if fully setforth elsewhere herein.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
Code of Federal Regulations (Published
by Office of the Federal Register)
10 CFR 50 Domestic Licensing of Production and
Utilization Facilities, AppendixB-Quality
Assurance Requirements for Nuclear Power
Plants and Fuel Reprocessing Plants
10 CFR 100 Reactor Site Criteria, Appendix A-Seismic
and Geologic Siting Criteria
 ~

S T D m A C I 34S-ENGL L997 Ob62949 0538067 125

349-12 AC1 STANDARD

PART 3-CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

Chapter 4"Durability Requirements 4.2.2 Concrete that willbe subject to the exposures given
in Table 4.2.2shall conform to the Corresponding maximum
4.0-Notation water-cementitious materials ratiosof that table.In addition,
f : = specified compressive strength of concrete, psi concrete that willbe exposed to deicing chemicals shall con-
form to the limitations of 4.2.3.
4.1-Water-cementitious materials ratio
Table 4.2.2-Requirements for special exposure
4.1.1 The water-cementitious materials ratios specified in conditions
Tables 4.2.2 and 4.3.1 shallbe calculated usingthe weight of Maximum.
cementmeetingASTM C 150 or ASTM C 595plus the water-cementltlous
materials ratio, Minimum f i ,
weight of fly ash andother pozzolans meetingASTM C 618, by weight, normal weight
normal weight aggregate
except as noted in 5.4.2 and silica fume meeting ASTM C aggregate concrete,
Exmsure condition concrete DSi

1 I
1240, except as limited by 4.2.3.
Concrete intendedto have low
permeability
exposed
when 0.50 4000
4.24reezing and thawing exposures to water
4.2.1 Normalweightconcreteexposed to freezing and Concrete exposed to freezing
and thawingin a moist 0.45 4500
thawing or deicer chemicals shall be air entrained with air condition orto deicing
content indicatedin Table 4.2.1. Tolerance on air content as chemicals
For corrosion protectionof
delivered shall be k 1.5 percent. For specified compressive reinforcement in concrete
strengthf L greater than5000 psi, air content indicatedin Ta- exposed to chlorides from
de-icing chemicals,salt,
ble 4.2.1 may be reduced l percent. brackish water, or spray
from these sources.
Table 4.2.1-Total air content for frost-resistant
concrete 4.2.3 For concrete exposed to deicing chemicals, the max-
Air content, percent
imum weightof fly ash or other pozzolan that is included in
Nominal maximum* the calculation of water-cementitious materials ratio shall
aggregate size,in. Severeexposure I Moderateexposure not exceed the following percentages of the total weightof
portland cement plusfly ash and other pozzolans.
The combined weight of fly ash and other pozzolan,con-
formingtoASTM C 618 andsilicafumemeeting
1 I 6 I 4'12
ASTM C 1240,shallnotexceed25percent of the total
weight of cementitious materials. Thefly ash and other poz-
1'I, 5'12 4'12 zolanpresentin a Type1Por 1PMblendedcement,
2t 5 4 ASTM C 595, shall be included in the calculated percentage.
3+ 4v2 3'12
4.3Culfate exposures
* See ASTM C 33 for tolerance on oversize for various nominal maximum
size designations. 4.3.1 Concrete to be exposed to sulfate-containing solu-
These air contents applyto total mix, as for the preceding aggregate sizes. tions or soils shall conformto requirements of Table 4.3.1or
Whentesting these concretes,however,aggregatelargerthan 1V2 in. is
removed by handpickingorsievingandaircontent is determinedonthe be made with a cement that provides sulfate resistance and
minus IVz in. fraction of mix (tolerance on air contentas delivered appliesto used in a concrete mix design with maximum water-cemen-
this value.). Air contentof total mix is computed from value determined theon
minus IVz in. fraction. titious materialsratio from Table 4.3.1.

Table 4.3.1-Requirements for concrete exposed to sulfate-containing solutions

Maximum
Water soluble water-cementitious
sulfate (SO,) materials ratio, Minimum f i ,
in soil, Sulfate (SO,) by weight, normal weight
Sulfate percent by in water, normal welght aggregate concrete,
exposure weight PPm Cement type aggregate concrete* psi'
Negligible
"
0.00-0.10 0-150 - - -
II, IP(MS),IS(MS), P(MS), I(PM)(MS),
Moderatet 0.10-0.20 150-1500 0.50 4000
WM)(MS)
Severe 0.20-2.00 1500-10,000 V 4500 0.45
Very severe Over 2.00 Over 10,OOO V plus pozzolan* 0.45 4500
* A lower water-cementitious materials ratio or higher strengthbe
may of embedded items orfreez-
required for low permeability or for protection against corrosion
ing and thawing (Table4.2.2).

COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute

Licensed by Information Handling Services
 NUCLEAR SAFETY STRUCTURESCODE 34913

4.3.2 Calcium chloride as an admixture shall notbe used 5.2-Selection of concrete proportions
in concrete to be exposed to severe or very severe sulfate- 5.2.1 Proportions of materials for concrete shall
be estab-
containing solutions,as defined in Table 4.3.1. lished to provide:
a) Workability and consistency to permit concreteto be
4.4-Corrosion protection of reinforcement worked readily into forms and around reinforcement
4.4.1 For corrosion protection, maximum water soluble under conditionsof placementto be employed, without
chlorideionconcentrationsinhardenedconcreteatages segregation or excessive bleeding.
from 28 to 42 days contributed fromthe ingredients includ- b) Resistance to special exposum as requiredby Chapter 4.
ing water, aggregates, cementitious materials, and admix- c) Conformance with strength test requirementsof 5.6.
tures shall not exceed limits
the of Table 4.4.1. When testing
5.2.2 Where different materials are to be used for differ-
is performed to determine water soluble chloride ion content,ent portions of proposed work, each combination shall be
test procedures shall conform ASTMto C 12 18. evaluated.
Table 4.4.1-Maximum chloride ion contentfor 5.2.3 Concrete proportions,includingwater-cementi-
corrosion protection of reinforcement tious materials ratio, shall be established on the basis of
field experience andor trial mixtures with materials to be
Maximum water soluble
chloride ion (Cl-) employed (Section 5.3), except as permitted in 5.4 or re-
in concrete, quired by Chapter 4.
percent by weight
Type of member of cement
5.3"Proportioning on the basis of field experience
I Prestressedconcrete 0.06
andlor trial mixtures
I Reinforced concrete exposedto
chloride inservice 0.15 53.1Ctandard deviation
5.3.1.1 Where a concrete production facility has test
records, a standarddeviationshallbeestablished.Test
4.4.2 When reinforced concrete will be exposed to deicing records from which a standard deviation is calculated shall:
salts, brackish water, seawater,or spray from these sources,
a) Represent materials, quality control procedures, and
requirements of Table 4.2.2 for water-cementitious materials
conditions similar to those expected and changes in
ratio and concrete strength, and the minimum concrete cover
materials and proportions within the test records shall
requirements of 7.7 shall be satisfied. See 18.14 for unbond- not have been more restricted than thosefor proposed
ed prestressing tendons. work.
b) Represent concrete produced to meet a specified
Chapter M o n c r e t e Quality, Mixing, strength or strengthsf: within lo00 psi of that specified
and Placing for proposed work, and
c) Consist of at least 30 consecutive testsor two groups of
5.0-Notation in
consecutive tests totalingat least 30 tests as defined
f: = specified Compressive strength of concrete, psi 5.6.1.4, except as provided in 5.3.1.2.
flr = required average compressive strengthof concrete 5.3.1.2 Where a concrete production facility does not
used as the basis for selection of concrete
propor- have test records meeting requirementsof 5.3.1.1, butdoes
tions, psi have a record based on 15 to 29 consecutive tests, a stan-
I s = standarddeviationofcompressivestrength,psi dard deviation shall be established as the product ofthe cal-
culated standard deviation andmodification factor of
5.1-General Table 5.3.1.2. To be acceptable, test record shall meet re-
5.1.1 Concrete shallbe proportioned to provide an average quirements (a) and @) of 5.3.1.1, and represent onlya sin-
compressive strength as prescribed in 5.3.2 as well as satisfy gle record ofconsecutive tests that spana period of not less
the durability criteria of Chapter 4. Concrete shall be pro- than 45 calendar days.
duced to minimize frequency of strengths belowf: as pre-
Table 5.3.1.5-Modification factor for standard
scribed in 5.6.2.3. deviation when less than30 tests are available
5.1.2 Requirements forf: shall be based on tests of cylin-
Modification factorfor
ders made and tested as prescribed in 5.6.2. NO.of tests' standard deviation+
5.1.3 Unless otherwise specified, f: shall bebased on Less than 15 Use table 5.3.2.2
28-day tests.If other than 28 days, test ageforfi shall be as 15 1.16
indicated in design drawings or specifications.
20 1.O8
5.1.4 Splitting tensile strength tests shall notbe used as a
25 1 .O3
basis for field acceptanceof concrete.
30 or more 1.o0
5.1.5 Design drawings shall show specified compressive
* Interpolatefor intermediate numbersof tests.
strength of concretef; for which each part of the structure t Modifiedstandarddeviationto be used to determinerequiredaverage
is designed. strength ;f from 5.3.2.1.

COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute

Licensed by Information Handling Services
 S T D - A C 1 349-ENGL 1777
349-14 AC1 STANDARD
53.2-Required average strength
53.2.1 Required average compressivestrengthf ir used
as the basisfor selection of concrete proportions shall be the
larger of Fq. (5-1) or (5-2) using a standard deviation calcu-
lated in accordance with 5.3.1.1or 5.3.1.2.
fir = fi+ 1.34s (5-1)
or
fir = fi + 2.33s - 500
(5-2)
5.3.2.2 When a concrete production facility does not
have field strength test records for calculation of standard
deviation meetingrequirementsof 5.3.1.1 or 5.3.1.2,re-
quired average strength f I , shall be determinedfrom
Table 5.3.2.2 and documentation of average strength shall be
in accordance with requirements of 5.3.3.
Table 5.3.2.2-Required average compressive
strength when dataare not available to establish
standard deviation
Required average compressive
Specified compressive strength, strength,
f;, psi f;, PSI
Less than3000 psi f; + 1000
3000 to 5000 f; + 1200
Over 5000 f; + 1400
53.3-Documentation of average strength
Documentation that proposed concrete proportions will
produce an average compressivestrength equal to or greater
than required average compressive strength (Section 5.3.2)
shall consist of a field strength test record, several strength
test records, or trial mixtures.
53.3.1 When test records are used to demonstrate that
proposed concrete proportions will producethe required av-
erage strength f (Section 5.3.2), such records shall repre-
sent materialsand conditions similar to those expected.
Changes in materials,conditions, and proportions within the
test records shall not have been more restrictedthan those for
proposed work. For the purpose of documenting average
strength potential, test records consisting of less than 30 but
not less than 10 consecutive tests are acceptable provided
test records encompass a period of time lessnot
than 45days.
Required concreteproportions shall be permitted to be estab-
lished by interpolation between the strengths and propor-
tions of two or more test records each of which meetsother
requirements of this section.
5.3.3.2 When an acceptable record of field test results is
not available,concreteproportions may be establishedbased
on trial mixtures meetingthe following restrictions.
a) Combinationof materials shall be those for proposed
work.
b)Trialmixtureshaving proportions and consistencies
required for proposed work shall be made using at least
threedifferent water-cementitious materials ratios or
cement contents that will produce a range of strengths
encompassing the required averagestrengthfl., .
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
06627470538067 TTB
c) Trialmixtures shall be designed to produceaslump
within f 0.75 in. of maximum permitted, and for air-
entrained concrete, within f 0.5 percent of maximum
allowableair content.
d) For each water-cementitious materials ratio or cement
content, at least three test cylinders for each test age
shall be made and cured in accordance with “Method
of Making and CuringConcrete Test Specimens in the
Laboratory” (ASTM C 192). Cylinders shall be tested
at 28 days or at test age designated for determination
off ;.
e) From results of cylinder tests a curve shall be plotted
showing relationship between water-cementitious mate-
r i a l s ratio or cement content and compressivestrength at
designated test age.
f) Maximum water-cementitious materials ratio or mini-
mum cementcontent for concrete to be used in proposed
work shall be that shown by the curve to produce the
average strength required by 5.3.2, unless a lower water-
a cementitious materials ratio or higher strength is
required by Chapter 4.
5.4-Proportioning by water-cementitious
materials ratio
5.4.1 Mix proportioning by water-cementitious materials
ratio shall not be permitted withoutfield experience orlabo-
ratory trial batches in accordance with 5.3 and 5.4.
5.4.2 When the total volume of cement and fly ash (or oth-
er pozzolan) in concrete
a mix exceedsthe volume of cement
in a proportioned mix withoutthe pozzolan but having equal
strengths at the specified age, the mixes shall be considered
to have equal water-cementitious materials ratios irrespec-
tive of the proportioning of cement andfly ash.
5.5-Average strength reduction
As data becomeavailable during construction, amount by
whichvalue off mustexceed specified value off may
be reduced, provided:
a) 30 or more test results are available and average of test
results exceeds that required by 5.3.2.1, using astandard
deviation calculated in accordance with 5.3.1.1,or
b)15to 29 test results are available and average of test
results exceeds thatrequired by 5.3.2.1 using a standard
deviation calculated in accordance with 5.3.1.2, and
c) special exposure requirements of Chapter are 4 met.
5.6-Evaluation and acceptance of concrete
5.6.l-Frequency of testing
5.6.1.1 Samples for strength tests of each class of con-
crete placed each dayshall be taken notless than once aday,
nor less than once for each 150 yd3 concrete,
of nor less than
once for each5000 ft2 of surface area for slabs or walls.
5.6.1.2 On a givenproject, if total volume of concrete
is such that frequency of testing required by 5.6.1.1 would
provide less than five strength tests for a given class of
concrete, tests shall be made from at least five randomly
selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five
batches are used.
 S T D O A C I 349-ENGL L997
NUCLEAR SAFEfY STRUCTURESCODE
5.6.1.3 When total quantity ofa given classof concrete
is less than 50 yd3, strength testsmay be waived by the En-
gineer if the Engineer has been provided adequate evidence Beams of Concrete” (ASTM C 42). In such case,three cores
of satisfactory strength.
5.6.1.4 A strengthtestshall be theaverage of the
strengths of two cylinders made from the same sample of
concrete and tested at 28 days or at test age designated for
determination off:.
5.6.2-Laboratory-cured specimens
5.6.2.1 Samples for strength tests shall be taken in ac-
cordance with “Method of Sampling Freshly Mixed Con-
crete” (ASTM C 172).
5.6.2.2 Cylinders for strength tests shall be molded and
laboratory-cured in accordance with “Practice for Making
and CuringConcrete Test
Specimens in
the
Field”
(ASTM C 3 1) and tested in accordance with “Test Method
for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Speci-
mens” (ASTM C 39).
5.6.2.3 Strength level of an individual class of con-
crete shall be considered satisfactory if bothof the follow-
ing requirements are met:
a)Averageofallsets of three consecutive strength tests
equal or exceedf .
b) No individual strength test (average of two cylinders)
falls belowf: by more than 500 psi.
5.6.2.4 If either of the requirements of 5.6.2.3 are not
met, steps shall be taken to increase the average of subse-
quent strength test results. Requirements of 5.6.4shall be ob-
served if requirement of 5.6.2.3(b) is not met.
5.6.3-Field-cured specimens
5.6.3.1 The Engineer may require strength tests of cyl-
inders cured under field conditions to check the adequacy
of curing and protection of concrete in the structure. The
Engineer may use non-destructive testing to confirm the
accuracy of strength testing completed on field-cured
specimens.
5.6.3.2 Field-cured cylinders shallbe cured under field
conditions in accordance with “Practice for Making and Cur- other deleterious coatings.
ing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field”(ASTM C 3 l).
5.6.33 Field-cured test cylinders shallbe molded at the
same time and from the same samples as laboratory-cured
test cylinders.
5.6.3.4 Procedures for protecting and curing concrete
shall be improved when strength of field-cured cylinders at
test age designated for determination off: is less than 85
percentofthat of companion laboratory-cured cylinders.
The 85 percentlimitationshallnotapply if field-cured
strength exceedsf: by more than 500 psi.
5.6.4-Investigation of low-strengthtest results
5.6.4.1 If any strength test (Section 5.6.1.4) of laborato-
ry-cured cylindersfalls below specified valueoff: by more
than 500 psi (Section5.6.2.3(b)] or if tests of field-cured cyl-
inders
indicate deficiencies in protection
and
curing
(Section 5.6.3.4), steps shall be taken to assure that load-car-
rying capacity of thestructure is not jeopardized.
5.6.4.2 If the likelihoodof low-strength concreteis con-
firmed and computations indicate that load-carrying capaci- ConcreteMade by VolumetricBatchingandContinuous
ty may have been significantly reduced, tests of cores drilled
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
0662947 0538070 7LT W
349-15
From the area in question may be required in accordance with
”Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed
shall be taken for each strength test more than 500 psi below
specified valueoff:.
5.6.4.3 If concrete in the structure will be dry under
service conditions, cores shall be a u dried (temperature60
to 80 F, relative humidity less than 60 percent) for 7 days
before test and shall be tested dry. If concrete in the struc-
ture will be more thansuperficially wet under service con-
ditions, cores shall be immersed in water forat least 40 hr
and be tested wet.
5.6.4.4 Concrete in an area represented by core tests
shall be considered structurally adequate if the average of
three coresis equal to at least85 percent off: and if no sin-
gle core is less than 75 percent off:. Additional testing of
cores extracted from locations represented by erratic core
strength results shall be permitted within limits established
by the Engineer.
5.6.4.5 If the criteria of 5.6.4.4 are met, and if structural
adequacy remains in doubt, the Engineer may order load
tests as outlined in Chapter 20to further assess adequacyor
may take other appropriate action.
5.7-Preparation of equipment and place
of deposit
5.7.1 Preparation before concrete placement shall include
the following:
Allequipmentformixingandtransportingconcrete
shall be clean.
All debris and ice shall be removed from spaces to be
occupied by concrete.
Forms shall be properly coated.
Masonry filler units that will be in contact with concrete
shall be well drenched.
Reinforcementshall be thoroughlycleanedoficeor
Water shall be removed from place of deposit before
concrete is placed unlessa tremie isto be used or it shall
be displaced by methods that shall exclude incorpora-
tion of additional water in the concrete during place-
ment and consolidation.
Laitance and other unsound material shall be removed
beforeadditionalconcrete is placedagainsthardened
concrete. The method for cleaning joints shall be stated
in the specification.
5.8-Mixing
5.8.1 All concrete shall be mixed until there is a uniform
distribution of materials and shall be discharged completely
before mixeris recharged.
5.8.2 Ready-mixed concrete shallbe mixed and delivered
in accordancewithrequirements of “Specificationfor
Ready-Mixed Concrete” (ASTMC 94) or “Specification for
Mixing” (ASTMC 685).
 STD.ACI 349-ENGL 1997
34916 AC1 STANDARD
5.8.3 Job-mixed concrete shall be mixed in accordance
with the following:
Mixing shall be done in a batch mixer of type approved
by the Engineer.
Mixer shall be rotated at a speed recommended by the
manufacturer.
Mixing shall be continued for at least IV2 min after dl
materials are in thedrum, unless a shorter timeis shown to
be satisfactory by the mixing uniformity testsof “Specifi-
cation for Ready-Mixed Concrete” (ASTM C94).
Materials handling, batching, and mixing shall conform
to applicable provisions of “Specification for Ready-
Mixed Concrete” (ASTM C94).
A detailed record shall be kept to identify:
(1) number of batches produced;
(2) proportions of materials used;
(3) approximate location of final deposit in structure;
(4) time and date of mixing andplacing.
5.9-Conveying
5.9.1 Concrete shall be conveyed from mixerto place of
final deposit by methods thatwill prevent separation or loss
of materials.
5.9.2 Conveying equipmentshall be capable of providing
a supply ofconcrete at site of placement withoutseparation
of ingredients and without interruptions sufficient to permit
loss of plasticity betweensuccessive increments.
5.9.3 Aluminum pipe shall not be used to convey concrete.
5.10-Depositing
5.10.1 Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practical
in its final position to avoidsegregation due to rehandling or
flowing.
5.10.2 Concreting shall be carried on at such a rate that
concrete is at all times plastic and flows readily into spaces
between reinforcement.
5.10.3 Concrete that has achieved initial set or has been
contaminated by foreign materials shall not be deposited in
the structure.
5.10.4 Retempered concrete shall not be used.
5.10.5 After concreting is started, it shall be carried on as
a continuousoperation until placing of a panel or section, as
defined by its boundaries or predetermined joints, is com-
pleted except as permitted or prohibited by 6.4.
5.10.6 Top surfaces of vertically formed lifts shall be gen-
erally level.
5.10.7 When constructionjoints are required, joints shall
be made in accordance with6.4.
5.10.8 All concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by
suitable means during placement and shall be thoroughly
worked around reinforcement and embedded fixtures and
into comersof forms.
5.10.9 Where conditions make consolidation difficult, or
where reinforcement is congested, batches may be repropor-
tioned to exclude the larger of the coarse aggregate gradations.
Where the coarse aggregate is furnished in only one gradation,prevent leakageof mortar.
batches of mortar containing approximately the same propor-
tions of cement, sand, and water may be used. Such substitu- maintain position and
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
Ob62949 0538071 b5b
tions shall be limited to only those made in limited areas of
specific difficulty and subjectto the approval of the Engineer
as to location, mix proportioning,or alteration of this mix.
5.1 l-Curing
5.11.1 Concrete (other than high-early-strength) shall be
maintained above 50 F and in a moistcondition for at least
the first 7 days after placement, except when cured in accor-
dance with 5.1 1.3.
5.11.2 High-early-strength concrete shall be maintained
above 50 F and in a moist condition for at least the frst 3
days, except when cured in accordance with1.3. 5.1
5.11.3-Accelerated curing
5.113.1 Curing by highpressure steam, steam at atmo-
spheric pressure, heat and moisture, or other accepted pro-
cesses, shall be permitted to accelerate strength gain and
reduce time ofcuring.
5.113.2 Accelerated curing shall provide a compressive
strength of the concrete at the load stage considered at least
equal to required design strength at that load stage.
5.1133 Curing processshall be such as to produce con-
crete with adurability at least equivalent to the curing meth-
odof5.1l.l or5.11.2.
5.11.4 Wherea liquid membrane curing compound is
used, particular attention shall be given to its compatibility
with anyprotective coatings that are to be applied following
curing efforts.
5.115 The method of curing shall be stated in the con-
struction specifications.
5.12-Cold weather requirements
5.12.1 Adequate equipment shall be provided for heating
concrete materials and protecting concrete duringfreezing or
near-freezingweather.
5.12.2 Concrete materials and all reinforcement, forms,
fillers and ground with which concrete is to come incontact
shall be free from frost.
5.12.3 Frozen materials or materials containing ice shall
not be used.
5.13-Hot weather requirements
5.13.1 During hot weather, proper attention shall be given
to ingredients, production methods, handling, placing, pro-
tection, and curing to prevent excessive concrete tempera-
tures or waterevaporationthatcouldimpair required
strength or serviceability of the member or structure.
5.13.2 The method of controlling concrete temperatures
shall be specified in the construction specification.
Chapter &Formwork, Embedded Pipes,
and Construction Joints
6.1-Design of formwork
6.1.1 Forms shall result in a final structure that conforms
to shapes, lines, and dimensions ofthe members as required
by the design drawings andspecifications.
6.1.2 Forms shall be substantial and sufficiently tight to
6.1.3 Forms shall be properly braced or tied together to
shape.
 CODE
STRUCTURES
SAFETY
NUCLEAR
6.1.4 Forms and their supports shallbe designed so as not
to damage previously placed structure.
6.1.5 Design of formwork shall include consideration of
the following factors:
a) Rate and method of placing concrete.
b)Constructionloads,includingvertical,horizontal,and
impact loads.
c) Specialformrequirementsforconstruction of shells,
folded plates, domes, architectural concrete, or similar
types of elements.
6.1.6 Forms for prestressed concrete members shall be de-
signed and constructed topermit movement of the member
without damage during application of prestressing force.
6.1.7 When using steel liners as formwork, special atten-
tion shallbe given:
6.1.7.1 To liner supports to provide the required toler-
ances for penetrations.
6.1.7.2 To the depth of placement in order to limit the
deformation of the liner.
6.1.8 Where coating systemsare to be applied tothe con-
crete, formwork shall be compatible with the coating system.
6.2-Removal of forms and shores
6.2.1 No construction loads shall be supported on, nor any of the construction.
shoring removed from, any part of the structure under con-
struction except when that portion of the structure in combi-
nationwithremainingformingandshoringsystem has
sufficient strength to support safely its weightandloads
placed thereon.
6.2.1.1 Sufficientstrengthshall be demonstrated by
structural analysis considering proposed loads, strength of
formingandshoringsystem,andconcretestrength data.
Concrete strengthdata may be based on testsof field-cured
cylinders or, when approved bythe Engineer, on other pro-
cedures to evaluate concrete strength. Structural analysis and
concrete strength test data shall be furnished to the Engineer
when so required.
6.2.2 NO construction loads exceeding the combination of
superimposed dead load plus specified live load be shall
sup-
ported on any unshored portion of the structure under con-
struction,unlessanalysis indicates adequatestrength to
support suchadditional loads.
6.2.3 Forms shall be removed in such manner as not to im- above atmospheric pressureshall be 50 percent in excess of
pair safety and serviceability of the structure. All concreteto
be exposed by form removal shall have sufficient strength
not to be damaged thereby.
6.2.4 Formsupportsforprestressedconcretemembers
shall not be removed until sufficient prestressing has been
applied to enable prestressed members to carry their dead
load and anticipated constructionloads.
6.25 Where coating systems are to be applied to the con-
crete only those hardeners, additives, and form release agents
which are compatible with the coatifig system shall be used.
6.3-Conduits, pipes, and sleeves embeddedin
concrete
63.1 Conduits,pipes,andsleeves of anymaterial not
harmful to concrete and within limitations of 6.3 shall be
permitted to be embedded in concrete with approval of the
STD=ACI349-ENGL
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute 1997
Licensed by Information Handling Services
349-17
Engineer, provided theyare not considered to replace struc-
turally the displacedconcrete except as definedin 6.3.6.
63.2 Aluminum conduits, pipes, and sleeves shall not be
embedded in structural concrete unless effectively coatedor
covered to prevent aluminum-concrete reaction or electro-
lytic action between aluminum and steel.
6 3 3 Conduits, pipes, and sleeves passing through a slab,
wall, or beam shall not impair significantly the strength of
the construction.
6.3.4 Conduits, pipes and sleeves with their fittings, em-
bedded within a column shall not displace more than4 per-
cent ofthe area ofcrosssection on whichstrength is
calculated or which is required for fire protection.
6 3 5 Except when design (or shop) drawings for conduits
and pipes are approved by the Engineer, conduits and pipes
embedded within a slab, wall, or beam (other than those
merely passing through) shall satisfy the following:
63 .5.1 They shall not be larger in outside dimension
than 1/3 the overall thickness of slab, wall, or beam in which
they are embedded
6.3.5.2 They shall not be spaced closer than 3 diameters
on center
63.5.3 They shall not impair significantly the strength
63.6 Conduits, pipes, and sleeves shall be permitted to be
considered as replacing structurally in compression the dis-
placed concrete provided:
6.3.6.1 They are not exposed to rusting or other dete-
rioration.
63.6.2 They are of uncoated or galvanized ironor steel
not thiiner than standardSchedule 40 steel pipe.
63.6.3 They have a nominal inside diameter not over
2 in. and are spaced not less than3 diameters on centers.
63.7 Pipes and fittings shall be designedto resist effects
of the material, pressure, temperatureto which they will be
subjected.
63.8 All piping and fittings except as provided in 6.3.8.1
shall be tested asa unit for leaks before concrete placement.
Pressure tests shall be in accordance withthe applicable p i p
ing code or standard. Where pressure testing requirements
are not specified in a code or standard, pressure testing shall
meet the following requirements: (1) The testing pressure
pressure to which piping and fittings may be subjected, but
minimumtestingpressureshallnot be lessthan150psi
above atmospheric pressure. (2) The test pressure shall be
held for4 hours with no drop in pressure allowed, except that
whch may be caused by a drop in air temperature.
6.3.8.1 Drain pipes and other piping designedfor pres-
sures of not more than1 psi above atmospheric pressure need
not be tested as requiredin 6.3.8.
6.3.8.2 Pipes carrying liquid, gas, or vapor thatis explo-
sive or injurious to health shall again be tested as specified
in 6.3.8 after the concrete has reached its required 28-day
strength.
63.9 No liquid, gas, or vapor, except water not exceeding
90F nor 50 psi pressure, shall be placed in the pipes until the
concretehas attained a compressive strength of at leastloo0 psi.
Ob62949 0538072 592
 = 0bb2949
~

S T D - A C 1 349-ENGL 2997 0538073 429

349-18 AC1 STANDARD

6.3.10 In solidslabs the piping, unless it is for radiant heat-
ing or snow melting,shall be placed betweentop and bottom
reinforcement.
63.11 Concretecover for pipes, conduits, and fittings
shall not beless than l1I2in. for concrete exposed to earth or
weather, nor 3/4 in. for concrete not exposedto weather or in
contact with ground.
63.12 Reinforcement with an area not less than 0.002
times the area of concrete section shall be provided normal
to piping.
63.13 Piping and fittings shall be assembled accordingto
the construction specifications. Screw connections shall be
prohibited.
6.3.14 Piping and conduit shall be so fabricated and in-
stalled that cutting, bending, or displacement of reinforce-
ment from its specified location, beyond the limitations of
7.5.2.3, will notbe required.
6.3.15 All piping containing liquid, gas, or vapor pressure
in excess of 200 psi above atmospheric pressure or tempera-
ture in excessof 150 F shall be sleeved, insulated, or other-
wiseseparatedfrom the concrete and/orcooled to limit
concrete stressesto allowable designvalues and to limit con-
crete temperatures to the following:
I f, = stress inreinforcing steel, psi
For normal operation or any other long-term period, the
temperaturesshallnotexceed150 F, except for local
areas which are allowed to have increased temperatures
not to exceed 200F.
For accident or any other short-term period, the temper-
atures shall not exceed 350 F for the interior surface.
However, local areas are allowed to reach 650 F from
fluid jets in the event of a pipe
failure.
Higher temperatures than given in Items (a) and (b) may
be allowed in the concrete if tests are provided to evalu-
ate the reduction in strength and this reduction applied
is
to thedesignallowables.Evidenceshall also be pro-
vided which verifies that the increased temperatures do
not cause deterioration of the concrete either with or
without load.
6.4-Construction joints
6.4.1 Surface of concrete construction joints shall be
cleaned andlaitance removed.
6.4.2 Immediately before new concrete is placed, all con-
structionjoints shall be wetted andstanding water removed.
6.4.3 Construction joints shall be so made and located as
6.4.6 Beams, girders, haunches, drop panels, and capitals
shall be placed monolithicallyas part of aslab system, unless
otherwise shown in design drawings or specifications.
Chapter 7-Details of Reinforcement
7.0-Notation
A = effective tensile area ofconcretesurrounding the
reinforcing bars and havingthe same centroid as
that reinforcement, divided bythe number ofbars,
sq in. Whenthe reinforcement consists of several
bar sizes, the number ofbars shall be computed as
the total steel area divided bythe area of the largest
bar used
A, nrin= minimum reinforcementfor massive concrete ele-
ments (See 7.12.2)
d = distance from extreme compression fiber to cen-
troid of tensionreinforcement,in.
db = nominal diameter of bar, wire, or prestressing
strand, in.
f; = specified tensile strength of concrete, psi.
fy = specifiedyield strength ofnonprestressedrein-
forcement,psi
/d = development length, in. (See Chapter12)
7.1-Standard hooks
The term “standardhook” as used in this code shall mean
one of the following:
7.1.1 180-deg bendplus 4db extension, but not less than
2 If2 in. at freeend of bar.
7.1.2 90-deg bendplus 12db extensionat free end of bar.
7.1.3 For stirrup and tie hooks*
a) No. 5 bar and smaller, 90-deg bend plus 6 4 extension at
free end of bar,or
b) No. 6,7, and 8 bar, 90-deg bend plus 1 2 4 extension at
free end of bar, or
c) No. 8 bar and smaller, 135-deg bend plus 6 d b extension
at free end of bar.
7.2-Minimum bend diameters
7.2.1 Diameter of bend measuredon the inside of the bar,
other than for stinups and ties in sizes No. 3 through No. 5,
shall not be less than the values in Table 7.2.

==pi=
not to impair the strength of the structure. All construction Table 7.2-Minimum diameters of bend
joints shall be indicated on the design drawings or shall be
Bar size diameter
Minimum
approved by theEngineer. Provision shall be made for trans-
fer of shear and other forces through constructionjoints. See No. 3 through No. 8
1 1.7.9. No. 9, No. 10, and No. 11
6.4.4 Construction joints in floors excluding slabs on
No. 14 and No. 18 1Odb
grade shall be located within the middle third of spans of
slabs, beams, or girders. Joints in girders shall be located a
minimum distance of two times the width of intersecting 7.2.2 Inside diameter of bends for stirrups and ties shall
beams. not beless than 4db for No: 5 bar andsmaller. For bars larg-
6.4.5 Beams, girders, or slabs supported by columns or
walls shall notbe cast or erected until concrete in the vertical * For closed ties and continuously wound ties defined as hoops inChapter 21,
a 135-deg bend plus an extension of at least 6 d b hut not less than 75 mm. (See
support members is no longer plastic. definition of “hoop” in 21.1)

COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute

Licensed by Information Handling Services
 CODE
STRUCTURES
SAFETY
NUCLEAR
er than No. 5, diameter of bend shall be in accordance with
Table 7.2.
7.2.3 Inside diameter of bends in weldedwire fabric
(smooth or deformed) for stirrups and ties shall not be less
than 4db for deformed wire larger than D6 and 2db for all
other wires. Bends with inside diameter lessofthan 8db shall
not be less than4db from nearest welded intersection.
7.3-Bending
73.1 Reinforcement shall be bent cold, unless otherwise
permitted by the Engineer.
7.3.2 Reinforcement partially embeddedin concrete shall
as shown on the design drawingsor
not be field bent, except
permitted by the Engineer.
7.4-Surface conditions of reinforcement
7.4.1 At time concreteis placed, metal reinforcement shall
be free from mud, oil, or other nonmetallic coatings that de-
crease bond. Epoxy coatings of bars, in accordance with
standards in this code, are permitted if the coating is quali- Section 3.3.2.
fied for service conditions (i.e., temperature and radiation),
as well as fabrication conditions(i.e., damaged epoxy coat-
ings shall be repaired).
7.4.2 Metal reinforcement, except prestressing tendons,
with rust, millscale, or a combination of both shall be con-
sidered satisfactory, provided the minimum dimensions (in-
cluding heightof deformations) and weightof a hand-wire-
brushed test specimen are not less than applicable ASTM
specification requirements.
7.4.3 Prestressing tendons shall be clean and free of
oil, dirt, scale, pitting, and excessive rust. A light oxide
is permissible.
7.5-Placing reinforcement
75.1 Reinforcement, prestressing tendons, and ducts shall
be accurately placed and adequately supported before con-
crete is placed, and shall be secured against displacement
7.5.2.
within tolerances permitted in
7.5.2 Unless otherwise specified by the Engineer, rein-
forcement, prestressing tendons, and prestressing ducts shall
be placed within the following tolerances:
7.5.2.1 Tolerance for depth d , and minimum concrete
cover in flexural members, walls and compression members points withat least Mdb stagger.
shall be as follows:
Tolerance on
minimum
Tolerance on d concrete m e r
d 5 8 in. ìV8in. -3/8 in.
d I 2 4 in. * in. -Il2 in.
d > 24 in. I * I in. I -'I2 in.
Except that tolerancefor the clear distance to formed sof-
fits shall be minus in. and tolerance for cover shall notex-
ceed minus 1/3 the minimum concrete cover required in the
design drawingsor in the specifications.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information SHandling 349-ENGL
T D - A C 1Services L997
349-19
75.2.2 Tolerance for longitudinal location of bends and
ends of reinforcement shallbe k 2 in. except at discontinuous
ends of members where tolerance shall be f in.
7 5 3 Welded wire fabric (with wire size not greaterthan W5
or D5) used in slabs not exceeding10ft in span may be curved
from a point near the top of slab over the
supportto a point near
the bottom of slab midspan,
at provided such reinforcementis
either continuous over, or securely anchored at, support.
75.4 Welding of crossing bars shall not be permitted for
assembly of reinforcement unless authorized by the Engineer.
75.5 Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interfer-
ence with other reinforcing steel, conduits, or embedded
items subject to the approval of the Engineer. If bars are
moved morethan one bar diameter,or enough to exceed the
above tolerances, the resulting arrangement of bars shall be
subject to approval by the Engineer.
7.6-Spacing limits for reinforcernent
7.6.1 The minimumclear spacing between parallel bars in
a layer shallnot be lessthan db nor 1 in. See also
7.6.2 Where parallel reinforcement is placed in two or
more layers, bars in the upper layers shall be placed directly
above bars in the bottom layer with clear distance between
layers not less than 1 in.
7.6.3 In spirally reinforced or tied reinforced compression
members, clear distance between longitudinal bars shall not
be less than 1.5db nor 11/*in. See also 3.3.2.
7.6.4 Clear distance limitation between bars shall apply
also to theclear distance betweena contact lap splice and ad-
jacent splices or bars.
7.6.5 In walls and slabs otherthan concrete joist construc-
tion, primary flexural reinforcement shall notbe spaced far-
ther apart than threetimes the wall or slab thickness, nor18 in.
7.6.6-Bundled bars
7.6.6.1 Groups of parallel reinforcing bars bundled in
contact to act as a unit shall be limited to four in any one
bundle.
7.6.6.2 Bundled bars shall be enclosed within stirrups
or ties.
7.6.6.3 Bars larger than No. 11 shall not be bundledin
beams.
7.6.6.4 Individual bars within a bundle terminated with-
in the span of flexural members shall terminate at different
7.6.6.5 Where spacing limitations and minimum con-
crete cover are based on bar diameterdb, a unit of bundled
bars shall be treated as a single bar of a diameter derived
from the equivalent totalana.
7.6.7-Prestressing tendons and ducts
7.6.7.1 Clear distance between pretensioning tendons at
each end ofa member shall not be less than 4 4 for wire, nor
3 4 for strands. See also 3.3.2. Closer vertical spacing and
bundling of strands may be permitted in the middle portion
of a span.
7.6.7.2 Post-tensioning ductsmay be bundled if shown
that concrete can be satisfactorily placed and if provision is
made to prevent the tendons, when tensioned, from breaking
through the duct.
0662949 0538074 365
 34420
7.7-Concrete protection for reinforcement
7.7.1-Cast-in-place concrete (nonprestressed)
The following minimum concrete covershall be provid-
ed for reinforcement:
Minimum cover, in.
a) Concretecast against and
permanently exposed toearth ...............................
b) Concrete exposedto earth or weather:
No. 6 through No. 18 bar......................................
No. 5 bar, W31 or D31 wire, and
smaller .................................................................
c) Concrete not exposedto weather or
in contact with ground:
Slabs, walls, joists:
No. 14 andNo. 18 bars .........................................
No. 11 bar andsmaller..........................................
Beams, columns:
Primary reinforcement,ties, stirrups, spirals...........1112
Shells, folded plate members:
3
No. 6 bar and larger..............................................
, No. 5 bar, W3 1 or D31wire,and smaller.............. 12
7.7.2-Precastconcrete(manufacturedunderplant
control conditions)
The following minimumconcrete cover shall be provided
for reinforcement:
Minimum cover, in.
a) Concrete exposedto earth or weather:
Wall panels:
NO. 14 andNO. 18 bars .........................................
No. 11 bar and smaller..........................................
Other members:
No. 14 and No. 18 bars ......................................... 2
No. 6 through No. 11 bars..................................... l1I2
No. 5 bar, W3 1 or D3 1 wire, andsmaller.............1'14
b) Concrete not exposedto weather or
in contact with ground:
Slabs, walls, joists:
No. 14 andNo. 18 bars .........................................
No. 11 bar and smaller..........................................
Beams, columns:
.............................................
Primary reinforcement
but not less than 5 / 8
and need not exceed1'I2
Ties, stirrups, spirals................................................ 3/8
Shells, folded plate members:
No. 6 bar and larger .............................................. 5B'
No. 5 bar, W3 1 or D3 1 wire, andsmaller............. 3I8
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
AC1 STANDARD
7.7.3-Prestressed concrete
7.73.1 The following minimumconcrete cover shall be
provided for prestressed and nonprestressed reinforcement,
ducts, and end fittings, except as provided in 7.7.3.2 and
7.7.3.3:
Minimm cover, in.
a) Concrete cast against and
3 permanently exposedto earth. .............................. 3
b) Concrete exposedto earth or weather:
2 Wall panels,slabs,joists .......................................... 1
Other members........................................................ 1112
192
c) Concrete not exposedto weather or
in contact with ground
Slabs, walls, joists ..................................................... 314
Beams, columns:
1Il2 Primary reinforcement............................................. 1
3/4 Ties, stirrups, spirals................................................ 1
Shells, folded plate members:
No. 5 bar, W3 1or D31 wire, and smaller.............318
Other reinforcement .............................................
but not less than 3/4
14
1 7.7.3.2 For prestressed concrete members exposed to
earth, weather, or conosive environments, andin which per-
missible tensile stress of 18.4.2(b) is exceeded, minimum
cover shall be increased 50 percent.
7.7.33 For prestressedconcrete members manufactured
under plant control conditions, minimum concrete cover for
nonprestressedreinforcement shall be as required in
Section 7.7.2.
7.7.4-Bundled bars
For bundled bars, minimumconcrete cover shall be equal
to the equivalent diameter of the bundle, but need not be
1'12 greater than 2 in.; except for concrete cast against and per-
3
14 manently exposed toearth, minimum cover shall be3 in.
7.7.Eorrosive environments
In corrosive environments or other severe exposure con-
ditions, amount of concrete protection shall be suitably in-
creased, anddensenessandnonporosityof protecting
concrete shall be considered, or other protection shall be
provided.
7.7.6-Future extensions
Exposed reinforcement, inserts, and plates intended for
bonding with futureextensions shall be protected from cor-
rosion.
1
5
'8 7.8-Special reinforcement details for columns
7.8.1-0ffset bars
Offset bent longitudinal bars shall conformto the following:
7.8.1.1 Slope of inclined portion of an offset bar with
axis of column shall not exceed in1 6.
7.8.1.2 Portions of bar above and below an offset shall
be parallel to axis of column.
7.8.1.3 Horizontal support at offset bends shall be pro-
vided by lateral ties, spirals, or parts of the floor construc-
tion. Horizontal support providedshall be designed to resist
1'I2 times the horizontal component of the computed force in
 ~
S T D = A C I 349-ENGL L997 m 0662949 O538076 L38
SAFETY NUCLEAR STRUCTURES CODE
the inclined portionof an offset bar. Lateral ties or spirals, if
used, shall be placed not more 6than in. from pointsof bend.
7.8.1.4 Offset bars shall be bent before placement in the
forms. see 7.3.
7.8.1.5 Where a column face is offset 3 in. or greater,
longitudinal bars shall not be offset bent. Separate dowels,
lap spliced with the longitudinal bars adjacent to the offset
column faces, shallbe provided. Lap splices shall conform to
12.17.
7.8.2-Steel cores
Load transfer in structural steel cores of composite com-
pression members shallbe provided by the following:
7.8.2.1 Ends of structural steel cores shall beaccurate-
ly finished to bear at end bearing splices, with positive pro-
vision for alignment ofone core above the other in
concentric contact.
7.8.2.2 At end bearing splices, bearing shall be consid-
ered effective to transfer not more than 50 percent of the total
compressive stress in the steel core.
7.8.23 Transfer ofstress between column base and foot-
ing shallbe designed in accordance with 15.8.
7.8.2.4 Base of structural steel section shallbe designed
to transfer the total load from the entire composite member
to the footing; or, the base may be designed to transfer the
load from the steel core only, provided ample concrete sec-
tion is available for transferof the portion of the total load
carried by the reinforced concrete section to the footingby
compression inthe concrete andby reinforcement.
7.9-Connections
7.9.1 At connections of principal framing elements (such
as beams and columns), enclosureshall beprovided for
splices of continuing reinforcement and for end anchorage
of
reinforcement terminating in such connections.
7.9.2 Enclosure at connections may consist of external
concrete or internal closed ties, spirals,or stirrups.
7.1 &Lateral reinforcement for compression
members
7.10.1 Lateral reinforcement for compression members
shall conform to the provisions of 7.10.4 and 7.10.5 and,
where shear or torsion reinforcement is required, shall also
conform to provisionsof Chapter 11.
7.10.2 Lateral reinforcement requirements for composite
compression members shall conformto 10.14. Lateral rein-
forcement requirements for prestressing tendons shall con-
form to 18.1 1.
7.10.3 Lateral reinforcement requirements of 7.10, 10.14,
and 18.11 may be waived where tests and structural analysis
show adequate strength and feasibility of construction.
7.10.4-Spirals
Spiral reinforcement for compression members shall con-
form to 10.9.3 and tothe following:
7.10.4.1 Spirals shall consist of evenly spaced continu-
ous baror wire of such size and so assembled to permithan-
dling
andplacing
without
distortion
from
designed
dimensions.
7.10.4.2 For cast-in-place construction, size of spirals
shall
not be less than 3/8 in. diameter.tions
in
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
W
349-21
7.10.4.3 Clear spacing between spirals shall not exceed
3 in., nor be less than 1 in. See also 3.3.2.
7.10.4.4 Anchorage of spiral reinforcement shallbe pro-
vided by l 'I2extra turns of spiral bar or wire at each end of
a spiral unit.
7.10.45 Splicesinspiralreinforcementshall be lap
splices of 48 db but not less than12 in., or welded.
7.10.4.6 Spirals shall extend from top of footing or slab
in any story to level of lowest horizontal reinforcement in
members supported above.
7.10.4.7 Where beams or brackets do not frame into all
sides of a column, ties shall extend above termination of spi-
ral to bottomof slab or drop panel.
7.10.4.8 In columns with capitals, spirals shall extend to
a level at which the diameteror width of capital is two times
that of the column.
7.10.4.9 Spirals shall be held firmly in place and true
to line.
7.10.4.10 For spiral bar or wire smaller than '/* in. diam-
eter, a minimum of two spacers shall be used for spiralsless
than 20 in. in diameter, three spacers for spirals20 M 30 in.
in diameter, andfour spacers for spirals greater than 30in.in
diameter.
7.10.4.11 For spiral bar or wire 5/8 in. diameteror larger,
a minimum ofthree spacers shall be used for spirals 24 in. or
less in diameter, and four spacers for spirals greater than
24 in. in diameter.
7.10.5-Ties
Tie reinforcement for compression members shall con-
form to the following:
7.105.1 All nonprestressed bars shall be enclosed by
No. 3 in size for longitudinal barsNo. 10
lateral ties, at least
or smaller, and at least No. 4 in size for No. 11, No. 14,
No. 18, and bundled longitudinal bars. Deformed wire or
welded wire fabric of equivalent area may be used.
7.10.5.2 Vertical spacingof ties shall not exceed16 lon-
gitudinal bar diameters,48 tie bar or wire diameters,or least
dimension of the compression member.
7.10.53 Ties shall be arranged such that every comer
and alternate longitudinal bar shall have lateral support pro-
vided by the comer of a tie with an included angle of not
more than 135 deg and no bar shall be farther6 than in. clear
on each side along tie thefrom sucha laterally supported bar.
Where longitudinal bars are located around the perimeter of
a circle, a complete circular tie may be used.
7.10.5.4 Ties shall be located vertically not more than
one-half a tie spacing above the top of footing or slab in any
story, and shall be spaced as provided herein to not more
than one-halfa tie spacing belowthe lowest horizontal rein-
forcement in slab or drop panel above.
7.10.5.5 Where beamsor brackets frame into all vertical
faces of a column andif at least three quarters of each face is
covered by the framing member, ties may be terminated not
more than 3 in. below lowest reinforcement in shallowest of
such beamsor brackets.
7.11-Lateral reinforcement for flexural members
7.11.1 Compression reinforcement in beams shall be en-
closed by ties o; stinups satisfying the size and spacing
limita-
7.10.5 or by weldedwire
fabric of equivalent
area.
 Such tiesor stirrups shall be provided throughout thedistance
where compression reinforcement is required.
7.11.2 Lateral reinforcement for flexural framing mem-
bers subject tostress reversals or to torsion at supports shall
consist of closed ties, closed stirrups, or spirals extending
around the flexural reinforcement.
7.113 Closed ties or stirrups may be formed in one piece
by overlapping standard stirrup or tie end hooks around a
longitudinal bar, or formed in one or two pieces lap spliced
with a Class B splice (lap of 1.3 4)).or anchored in accor-
dance with 12.13.
7.12"Minimum reinforcement
7.12.1 All exposed concrete surfaces shall be reinforced
with reinforcement placed intwo approximately perpendic-
ular directions.For the purposeof the requirementsof 7.12,
concrete surfaces shall be considered to be exposed if they
are not castagainst existing concrete or against rock. The re- structures.
inforcement shall bedeveloped for its specifiedyield
strengthinconformancewith Chapter 12. The minimum
,
area of suchreinforcement shall beinaccordancewith
7.12.2,7.12.3 or 7.12.4. This requirement may be met in to-
tal or in part by reinforcement otherwise required to resist
design loads. Reinforcement shall be spaced not farther apart third greater than that required by analysis. All other exposed
than l8 in.For concretesections less than 48 in. thick such re- to meet the minimum requirements of 7.12.1, 7.12.2
7.12.2
1 inforcement shall provideat least a ratio of area of reinforce-
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
ment to gross concrete area of 0.0012 in each direction at
each face.
7.123 For concrete sections havinga thickness of 48 in.
an area A ,' in each
or more, such reinforcement shall provide
direction at eachface given by
A s min '' A but need not exceed A h 0 0
=-
fs
The minimum reinforcement size shall be No. 6 bars. In
lieu of computation, f, may be taken as 60 percent of the
specified yield strengthf,.
7.12.4 For concrete sections having a thickness of 72 in.
or more, no minimum reinforcement is required for members
constructed by the principles andpractice recommended by
AC1 Committee207 for nomeinforcedmassive concrete
7.125 On a tension face of a structural slab, wall,or shell,
where a calculated reinforcement requirement exists, the ra-
tio of reinforcement area provided at the tension faceto gross
concrete area shall not be less than 0.0018 unless the area of
reinforcement provided at the tension face is at least one-
faces of the structural slab, wall,or shell shall be reinforced
and
7.12.3.
 ~~ ~~ ~ ~ ~~ ~

STD.ACI 349-ENGL 1’7’77 Ob62949 0538078 T O O

SAFETY NUCLEAR STRUCTURES CODE 349-23

PART 4-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Chapter+AnalysisandDesign: beamsandone-wayslabs(slabsreinforced to resistflexural

General
Considerations stresses
only
in one direction),
provided:
a) There are two or more spans,
8.O-Notation b) Spans are approximately equal, with the larger of two
A, = area of nonprestressed tension reinforcement,sq in. adjacent spans not- greater than the shorter
by more than
A : = area of compression reinforcement,sq in. 26 percent,
b = width of compression face of member, in. c ) Loads are uniformly distributed,
d = distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid d) Unit live load does not exceed 3 times unit dead load,
of tension reinforcement, in. and
E, = modulus of elasticity of concrete, psi. e) Members are prismatic,
See 8.5.1
E, = modulus of elasticityof reinforcement, psi.
See 8.5.2 and 8.5.3 Positive moment
fl. = specified compressive strengthof concrete, psi End spans
f y = specified yield strength of nonprestressed end unrestrained ........
Discontinuous wu/,2111
reinforcement, psi
Discontinuous end integral
h = clear spanfor positive momentor shear and average with
sup
port ................................... ~,/,~114
of adjacent clear spansfor negative moment
nominal shear strength provided by concrete spans .......................................
Interior ~,/,~/16
factored load per unit length of beam or per unit area Negative moment at exterior face
of slab of first interior support
unit weight of concrete,lb per CU ft Two
spans ............................................ w,/,2/9
factor defined in10.2.7.3
Morethan two spans............................ W&/ 10
ratio of nonprestressed tension reinforcement
Negative moment at otherfaces of
A,lbd interior supports....................................... w,/,2/ll
ratio of nonprestressed compression reinforcement Negative moment at faceof all
A l l bd supports for:
reinforcement ratio producing balanced strain Slabs with spans not exceeding10 ft;
conditions. See 10.3.2 and Beams where ratioof sum of
strength reduction factor.See 9.3 column stiffnessesto beam stiffness
exceedseieht ~at_ _each
~ ___
end of the SDan... w , / , 2 / 12
8.1-Design methods Negative moment at interior faceof exte-
In design of reinforced concrete structures, members shall rior support for members built integrally
with supports
be proportioned for adequate strength in accordance with
provisions of this code, using load factors and strength re- Wheresupport is aspandrelbeam ........ w,h2/24
duction factors$ specified in Chapter9.
Where support is a column................... ~,,/,~116
Shear in end members at faceof first
8.2-Loading support .........................................
interior 1.15wu/,2/2
Design provisionsof this Codeare based on the assump-
tion that structures shall be designed to resist all applicable Shearatface of allothersupports ............. W, 4212
loads. The loads shall be in accordance with the generalre-
quirements of 9.1.
8.4-Redistribution of negative momentsin
8.3”Methods of analysis continuous nonprestressed flexural members
83.1 All members of frames or continuous construction 8.4.1 Except where approximate values for moments are
shall be designed for the maximum effects of factored loads. used, it is permitted to increase or decrease negative mo-
The maximum effects of factored loads shall be determined ments calculatedby elastic theoryat supports of continuous
by the theory of elastic analysis, except as permitted by 8.3, flexural members for any assumed loading arrangementby
8.4, and Appendices A, B, and C. Simplifying assumptions not more than*
of 8.6 through 8.9 may be used.
8.3.2 Except for prestressed concrete, approximate meth-
ods of frame analysis are permitted for buildings of usual 20 1” ( ”,P’) percent
types of construction, spans, and story heights.
8.3.3 In lieu of frame analysis,the following approximate
* For criteriaon moment redistributionfor prestressed concrete members,
moments and shears are permitted for designof continuous see 18.10.4.

COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute

Licensed by Information Handling Services

~~ ~ ~-
S T D - A C 1 349-ENGL L997
349-24 AC1 STANDARD
8.4.2 The modified negative moments shall be used for
calculating moments at sections within the spans.
8.4.3 Redistribution of negative moments shall be made
only when thesection, at which momentis reduced, is so de-
signed that p or p - p’ is not greater than 0.50 pb, where
8.5-Modulus of elasticity
8.5.1 Modulus of elasticity E, for concrete may be taken
as wc 1*5 3 3 f l (in psi) for values of W , not exceeding 155
lb per CU ft. For normal weightconcrete, E, may be taken as
57,mE.
8.5.2 Modulus of elasticity E, for non-prestressed rein-
forcement maybe taken as 29,000,000 psi.
8.53 Modulus of elasticity E, for prestressing tendons
shall be determined bytests or supplied by the manufacturer.
8.6-Stiff ness
8.6.1 Use of any set of reasonable assumptions is permit- exceed 1/4 the span length the of beam, and theeffectiveover-
ted for computing the relative flexural and torsional stiff-
nesses ofcolumns, walls, floors, androofsystems.The
assumptions adoptedshall be consistent throughout analysis.
8.6.2 Effect of haunchesshall be considered both in deter-
mining moments and in design of members.
8.7-Span length
8.7.1 Span length of members not built integrally with
supports shall be considered the clear span plus depth of
member but need not exceed the distance between centers of
supports.
8.7.2 In analysis of frames or continuous construction for have a flange thickness not less than 1/2the width of web
determinationof moments, spanlength shall be taken as the
distance center-to-centerof supports.
8.7.3 For beams built integrally with supports, design on
the basis of moments at faces of support is permitted.
8.7.4 Solid or ribbed slabs built integrally with supports, tion) is parallel to the beam, reinforcement perpendicularto
with clear spans not more than10 ft, are permitted to be an-
alyzed as continuous slabs on knife edge supports with spans
equal to the clear spans of the slab and width of beams oth-
erwise neglected.
8.8-Columns
8.8.1 Columns shall be designed to resist the axial forces T-beams, only the effective overhanging slab width needbe
from factored loads on all floors or roof and the maximum
moment from factored loads on a single adjacent span of
the floor or roof under consideration. Loading condition
giving the maximum ratio of moment to axial load shall
also be considered.
8.8.2 In frames or continuous construction, consideration
shall be given tothe effect of unbalanced flooror roof loads
on both exterior and interior columns and of eccentric load-
ing dueto other causes.
8.8.3 In computing gravity load moments in columns,it is
permitted to assume as fixed far ends of columns built inte-
grally with thestructure.
8.8.4 Resistanceto moments at any floor or roof level shall
be provided by distributing the moment between columns
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
= 0662949
0538079 947
immediately above and belowthe given floor in proportion
to the relative column stiffnesses and conditions of restraint.
8.9-Arrangement of live load
8.9.1 It is permissible to assume that:
a) The live load is applied only to the floor or roof under
consideration, and
b) The far ends of columns built integrally with the struc-
ture are considered to befixed.
8.9.2 Arrangement of live load may be limited to combi-
nations of:
i) Factored dead load on all spans with full factored live
n
load ontwo adjacent spans, and
b) Factored dead load on all spans with full factored live
load onalternate spans.
8.1 &T-beam construction
8.10.1 In T-beam construction, the flange and web shall
be built integrally or otherwise effectively bonded together.
8.10.2 Width of slab effective as a T-beamflange shall not
hanging flange width on side eachof the web shall not exceed:
a) 8 times the slab thickness, nor
b) the clear distance to the nextweb.
8.103 For beams with a slab on one side only, the effec-
tive overhanging flange width shall not exceed:
a) 1/12 the span length of the beam,
b) 6 times the slab thickness, nor
c) the clear distance to the next web.
8.10.4 Isolated beams, in which the T-shape is used to
providea flange for additional compression area, shall
and an effective flange width not more than 4 times the
width of web.
8.10.5 Where primaryflexural reinforcement in a slab that
is Considered as a T-beam flange (excludingjoist construc-
the beam shall be provided in the top of the slab in accor-
dance with the following:
8.105.1 Transverse reinforcement shall be designedto
carry the factored load on the overhanging slab width as-
sumed to act as a cantilever. For isolated beams, the full
width of overhanging flange shall be considered. For other
considered.
8.10.5.2 Transverse reinforcement shall not be spaced
farther apart than 5 times the slab thickness, nor 18 in.
8.11 4 o i s t construction
8.11.1 Joist construction consists of a monolithic combi-
nation of regularly spaced ribs and a top slab arranged to
span in one direction or two orthogonaldirections.
8.11.2 Ribs shall not be less than 4 in. in width; and shall
have a depthof not more than3 ‘/2 times the minimum width
of rib.
8.113 Clear spacing betweenribs shall not exceed30 in.
8.11.4 Joist construction not meeting the limitations of
8.1 1.1 through 8.1 1.3 shall be designed as slabs and beams.
 NUCLEAR SAFETY STRUCTURESCODE
8.11.5 Removable forms shallbe used and slab thickness
shall not be less than the clear distance between ribs, nor
less than 2 in.
8.11.6 Reinforcement normalto the ribs shallbe provided
in the slab as required for flexure, considering load concen-
trations, if any, but not lessthan required by 7.12.
8.11.7 Where conduits or pipes as permitted by
Section 6.3 are embedded within the slab, slab thickness
shall be at least1 in. greater thanthe total overall depthof the
conduits or pipes at any point. Conduits or pipes shall not im-
pair significantlythe strength of the construction.
8.11.8 For joist construction, contribution of concrete to
shear strength V, is permitted to be 10 percent more than
that specified in Chapter 11. It is permitted to increase
shear strength using shear reinforcement or by widening
the ends of ribs.
8.12-Separate floor finish
8.12.1 A floor finish shall not be included as part of a
structuralmemberunlessplacedmonolithicallywiththe
floor slab or designed in accordance with requirements of
Chapter 17.
8.12.2 It is permitted to consider all concrete floor finishes
as part of required coveror total thickness for nonstructural
considerations.
Chapter H t r e n g t h and Serviceability
Requirements
9.O-Notation
A, = gross area of section, sq in.
I A, = area of nonprestressed tension reinforcement, sq in.
A i = area of compression reinforcement, sq in.
cf = distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid
of compression reinforcement, in.
d, = distance from extreme tension fiber to centroid of
tension reinforcement, in.
I D = dead loads, or related internal moments and forces,
including piping and equipment dead
E, = modulus of elasticity of concrete, psi.
loads
See 8.5.1
E , = load effectsof operating basis earthquake (OBE), or
related internal moments and forces, including
OBE-induced piping and equipment reactions
E,, = load effects of safe shutdown earthquake (SSE), or
related internal moments and forces, including
SSE-induced piping and equipment reactions
f L = specified compressive strength of concrete, psi
E=square rootof specified compressive strength
of concrete, psi
f,. = modulus of rupture of concrete, psi
fy = specifiedyieldstrengthofnonprestressed
reinforcement, psi
F = loads due to weight and pressures of fluids with
well-defined densities and controllable maximum
heights, or related internal moments and forces
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
349-25
h = overallthicknessofmember, in.
H = loads due to weight and pressure of soil, water
in soil, or other materials,or related intemal
moments and forces
Zcr = moment of inertia of cracked section transformed
to concrete
Z, = effective moment of inertia for computation
of deflection
Z, = moment of inertia of gross concrete section about
centroidal axis, neglecting reinforcement
t = span length of beam or one-way slab, as defined
in 8.7; clear projectionof cantilever, in.
l/n = length of clear span in long direction of two-way
construction, measured face-to-face of supports
in slabs without beams and face-to-faceof beams
or other supports in other cases
L = live loads, or related internal moments and forces
M, = maximum moment in member at stage deflection
is computed
Mcr = cracking moment.See 9.5.2.3
P, = differential pressure load, or related internal
moments and forces, generated by a postulated
pipe break
Pb = nominal axial load strength at balancedstrain
conditions. See 10.3.2
P, = nominal axial load strength at given eccentricity
Pu = factored axial loadat given eccentricity 5 $P,
Ra = piping and equipment reactions,or related internal
moments and forces, under thermal conditions gen-
erated by a postulated pipe break and including R,.
R, = piping and equipment reactions,or related internal
moments and forces, which occur under normal
operating and shutdown conditions, excluding dead
load and earthquake reactions
Ta = internal moments and forces caused by temperature
distributions within the concrete structure occumng
as a result of accident conditions generated by a
postulated pipe break and including T,
T, = internal moments and forces caused by temperature
distributions within the concrete structure occurring
as a result of normal operatingor shutdown
conditions
U = required strength to resist factored loads or related
internal moments and forces
W , = unit weight of concrete, lb per CU ft
W = operating basis wind load (OBW),or related internal
moments and forces
W, = loads generated by the design basis tomado (DBT),
or related internal momentsand forces. These
include loads due to tomado wind pressure, tomado
created differential pressures, and tomado generated
missiles
3 = jet impingement load, or related internal moments
and forces, on thestructure generated by a
postulated pipe break
Y,,, = missile impact load,or related internal moments and
forces, on the structure generated by a postulated
pipe break, such as pipe whip

I
Y, = loads, or related internal moments and forces, on the
structure generated by the reaction of the broken
pipe during apostulated break
y, = distance from centroidal axis of gross section,
neglecting reinforcement,to extreme fiber in tension
a = ratio of flexural stiffness of beam section to flexural
stiffness of a width ofslab bounded laterally by
center line of adjacent panel (if any) on each side
of beam. See Chapter 13
cr, = average value ofa for all beams on edgesof a panel
ß = ratio of clear spans in long to short direction of
two-way slabs
R, = ratio of length of continuous edgesto total perimeter
of a slab panel
y = ratio of the bending moments of factored loads
to unfactored loads
+ = strengthreductionfactor. See 9.3
h = multiplier for additional long-time deflection as
defined in 9.5.2.5
l, = time-dependent factor for sustained load.
See 9.5.2.5
p' = reinforcement ratio for nonprestressed compression
reinforcement, A L / bd
9.1-General
9.1.1 Structures and structural members shall be designed
to have designstrengths at all sections at least equal to the re-
quired strengths calculated for the factored loads and forces
in such combinations as stipulated for the following loads
combined in accordance with the provisions specified in 9.2.
9.1.1.1-Normal loads
Those loads whichare encountered during normal plant
operation and shutdownincluding D , L,F, H, T,, and R,.
9.1.1.ZSevere environmental loads
Those loads that couldinfrequently be encountered dur-
ing the plant life includingE, and W.
9.1.1.3-Extreme environmental loads
Those loads which are credible but are highly improba-
ble including E,, and W,.
9.1.1.4-Abnormal loads
Those loads generated by apostulated high-energy pipe
break accident including P,, T,, R,, Yr, and Y,,,.
9.1.2 Members also shall meet all other requirements of
this Code to ensure adequate performance at normal load
levels.
9.1.3 In the design for normal loads, consideration shall
be given to the forces due to such effects as prestressing,
crane loads, vibration, impact, shrinkage, creep, unequal set-
tlement of supports, construction, and testing.
9.1.4 In the determination of earthquake loads, consid-
eration shall be givento the dynamic response characteris-
tics of the concrete structure and its foundationand
surrounding soil.
9.1.5 The determination of impulsive and impactive loads,
such as the loads associated with missile impact, whipping
pipes, jet impingement, and compartment pressurization, shall
be consistent withthe provisions of Appendix C.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
9.2-Required strength
9.2.1 The required strength U shall be at least equal to the
greatest of the following:
1. U = 1.4D+ 1.4F+ 1.7L+ 1.7H+ 1.7R0
2. U = 1.40 + 1.4F + 1.7L + 1.7H + 1.7E0 + 1.7R0
3. U = 1.40 + 1.4F + 1.7L + 1.7H + 1.7W + 1.7R0
4. U=D+F+L+H+To+R,+Ess
5. U = D + F + L + H + T , + R , + W ,
6. U = D + F + L + H + T a + R a + 1 . 2 5 P ,
7. U = D + F + L + H + T a + R a + 1 . 1 5 P a
+ l.O(Y,+ yi + Y,) + 1.15E0
8. U=D+F+L+H+T,+R,+l.OP,
+ 1.O(Y, + yi + Y,) + 1.OEss
9. U = 1.05D + 1.05F + 1.3L + 1.3H + 1.05T0 + 1.3R0
10. U = 1.05D + 1.05F + 1.3L + 1.3H + 1.3E0 + 1.05T0 +
1.3R0
11. U = 1.05D+ 1.05F+ 1.3L+ 1.3H+ 1.3W+ 1.05T0+1.3R0
9.2.2 Where the structural effects of differential settle-
ment, creep, or shrinkage may be significant, they shall be
includedwith the deadload D in LoadCombinations 4
through 1 1. Estimation of these effects shall be based on a re-
alistic assessment of sucheffects occurring in service.
9.2.3 For the Load Combinationsin 9.2.1, where any load
reduces the effects of other loads, the corresponding coeffi-
cient for that load shall be taken as 0.9 if it can be demon-
strated that the
load is always present or occurs
simultaneously with the other loads. Otherwise, the coeffi-
cient for that load shall be takenas zero.
9.2.4 Where applicable, impact effects of moving loads
shall be included withthe live load L.
9.2.5 In Load Combinations6,7, and 8, the maximum val-
ues of P,, Ta, R,, Yi. Y,, and Y,,,, including an appropriate
dynamicload factor, shall beused unless an appropriate
time-history analysis is performed to justify otherwise.
9.2.6 Load combinations5,7, and 8 shall be satisfied first
without the tomado missile load in 5 , and withoutY,, y i , and
Y,,, in 7 and 8. When considering these concentrated loads,
local sections strengths and stresses may be exceeded pro-
vided there will be noloss of intended function of anysafety
related systems. For additional requirements related to im-
pulsive and impactiveeffects, refer to Appendix C.
9.2.7 If resistance to other extreme environmental loads
such as extreme floods is specified for the plant, then an ad-
ditional load combination shall be included with the addi-
tional extreme environmental load substituted for W,in Load
Combination 5 of 9.2.1.
9.3-Design strength
9.3.1 Design strength provided by a member, its connec-
tions to other members, and its cross sections, in terms of
flexure, axial load, shear, and torsion, shall be taken as the
nominal strength calculated in accordance with requirements
 NUCLEAR SAFETY STRUCTURESCODE 349-27

and assumptions of this Code, multiplied by a strength re- When deflection limits more stringent than those speci-
duction factor $. fied in Table 9 3 a ) are required to insure the proper fûnc-
93.2 Strength reductionfactor I$ shall be as follows: ’ tioningof certain nonstructuralsystems,theminimum
thicknesses specified in Tables 9 3 b ) and 9.5(c) shall not ap-
93.2.1 Flexure, withoutaxial load .......................... 0.90
93.2.2 Axial load, and axial load with flexure. (For ax- ~ ply and the members shall be sized such that the calculated
ial load with flexure, both axial load and moment nominal deflections are within the required limits.
strength shallbe multiplied by appropriate single value of$) Table 9.5(b)”inimum thickness of beams or one-
a) Axial tension, and axial tension with flexure........... 0.90 way construction unless deflections are computed
b) Axial compression, and axial compression with flexure:
Members with spiral reinforcement conforming
Member
supported
1
Simply
continuous
continuous
I
Oneend Both ends
Cantilever
1 1
to 10.9.3.................................................................. 0.75 Solid one-way
construction /I1 2 /I1 5 fi19 /I5
Other reinforced members ........................................ 0.70
Beams or ribbed
Except that for low values of axial load,Q may be increased one-way slabs /I1 o /I1 3 /I1 6 /I4
in accordance with the following: The values given shall be used directly for nonprestressed reinforced
concrete members made with normalweight concrete(W = 145 pcf)
For membersin whichfy does not exceed@,O00 psi, with
symmetric reinforcement, and with -
(h d‘-d,)/h not less than
and Grade 80 reinforcement.
For nonprestressedreinforcemqt having yield strengthsless than 6 0 , O O O
psi, the v a l u e s in thistable shall be multipliedby (0.4 + f, ,/lOO,OOo).
0.70, $ may be increased linearly to 0.90 as $ P,,decreases
The thickness of any one-way construction shallnot be less than 6 in.
from O. lof: A, to zero.
For other reinforced members,$ may be increased linearly
to 0.90 as Q P,,decreases from O. lof: A, or $Pa,whichever
is smaller, to zero. Table Od(c)”inimum thickness of two-way
93.23 Shear and torsion......................................... 0.85 construction unless deflections are computed
93.2.4 Bearing on concrete
0.70
I
18.13) ( S e e also ...........................................
93-25 Flexure in plain concrete ............................. 0.65
I Minimum thickness,h
Ratio of clear span in

9 3 3 Development lengths specified in Chapter12 do not

require a $-factor.

9.4-Design strength for reinforcement 0 /J1 9

ßs= /J21
Designs shall not be based on a yield strength of rein- a,S 1.0 .
forcement4 in excess of60,000 psi, except for prestressing Ps= 1 /J22 /J25
tendons. The values given in this table shall be used directíy for nonprestressed
reinforced concrete members made with normal weight concrete.
(W = 145 p d ) and Grade 60 reinforcement. For nonprestressed
9.5-Control of deflections reinforcement having yieldstrengths less than 6 0 , O O O psi. the values
be multiplied by (800 + 0.005fy)/l100.
n this table shall
95.1-General For other valuesof a,, ß ,, and p, the minimumlh~dvressmay be linearly
9.5.1.1-Deflection limits interpolated.
The thidtness of any two-way construction shall not be less than 6 in.
Reinforced concrete members subject to flexure shall be
designed to have adequate stiffness to limit deflections or
any deformations which may adversely affect the strength 9.5.1.2-hading conditions
and serviceabilityof structural and nonstructural elements. When deflectioncomputationsareperformed,these
One-way construction, two-way construction, and computations shall be based on the loading condition critical
shored composite construction shall satisfy the minimum for flexure.
thicknessrequirements specified in this chapter. Pre- 9.5.1.SFactored load computations
stressed concrete and unshored composite construction The deflectionlimits specified inthis chapter are for un-
shall satisfy the deflection limits indicated in Table 9.5(a). factored loads. Deflections may be computed by factored
Lesser thicknesses may be used if it isdetermined by com- load analysis and divided by a factor y to obtain the deflec-
putation that the resulting deflections will not adversely af- tions corresponding to unfactored loads. Unless otherwise
fect strength and serviceability. determined by computation, the factor y shall be as follows:
Table 9.5(a)--Maximum deflections for unfactored a) For load combinations 1 through 3, y = 1.5
loads b) For load combinations4 through 8, y = 1.O
Loading
equation
number c) For combinations
load 9 through 11, y = 1.2.
(Section 9.2.1) Slabs”
9.5.1.4-Deflections to be considered
Eq. U ) , (2),and (3) /I320
When minimum thickness requirements are satisfied, a
Eq. (4) and (5) /I250 /I200 deflection
equal
the
to
limits
given in Table 9 3 a ) may
be
*two-way
Forconstruction
/shall be replaced by consideredfor
the
designnonstructural
of elements.

COPYRIGHT American Concrete

S T D -Institute
A C 1 349-ENGL
Licensed by Information Handling Services
L997 m 0bb29V9 0538082 431
 ~ ~-
S T D - A C 1 349-ENGL 1997
34928 AC1 STANDARD
When calculations are performed, the sum of the long-
time deflection due to all appropriate sustained loads, and
the immediate elastic deflection due toall appropriate non-
sustained loads shall be considered. Due consideration
shall be givento the effective moment of inertia at each of
these stages.
The long-time deflection shall be determined in accor-
dance with 9.5.2.3,9.5.3.5,or 9.5.4.2, but maybe reduced to
the amount of long-time deflection that occurs after the at-
tachment of the nonstructural elements or the leveling of
equipment. This amount of long-time deflection shall be de-
termined on the basis of accepted engineering data relating
to the time deflection characteristics of members similar to
those being considered.
95.2-One-way construction (nonprestressed)
95.2.1 Minimum thickness stipulated in Table 9 3 b )
shall apply for one-way construction unless computation of
deflection indicates a lesser thickness may be used without
adverse effects.
95.2.2 Where deflections are to be computed, deflec-
tions that occur immediately onapplication of load shall be
computed by usual methods or formulas for elastic deflec-
tions, considering effects of cracking and reinforcement on
member stiffness.
9.5.23 Unless stiffness values are obtained by a more
comprehensive analysis, immediate deflection shall be com-
puted with the modulus ofelasticity E, for concrete as spec-
ified in 8.5.1 and with the effective moment of inertia as
follows, but notgreater than Zr
I, = (27Ig+-($,'II..
[l (9-7)
where
M,, = f-
r',
Y,
and
(9-9)
When the values of M , are obtained from factored load
analysis. these values shall be dividedby the factor y as spec-
ified in 9.5.1.3
Where the computation of deflection isbetobased onle,the
Zg may be used, if the
deflection calculated by an analysis using
deflection thus calculated is increased by a factorZgof/le.
9.5.2.4 For continuous members, effective moment of
inertia may be takenas the average of values obtained from
Q. (9-7) for the critical positive and negative momentsec-
tions. For prismatic members, effective moment of inertia
may be taken as the value obtained from Eq. (9-7) at mid-
span for simple and continuous spans, and at support for
cantilevers.
I 9.5.2.5 Unless values are obtained by a more compre-
hensive analysis, additional long-term deflection resulting
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
Obb2949 0538083 378
from creep and shrinkageflexural
of members shall be deter-
mined by multiplying the immediate deflection caused by
the sustained load considered, by the factor
(9-10)
where p ' shall be the value at midspan for simple and contin-
uous spans and at support for cantilevers.It is permitted to as-
sume the time-dependent factor 6 for sustained loads equal to
5 years or more................................................ 2.0
12 months........................................................ 1.4
6 months.......................................................... 1.2
3 months .......................................................... 1.O
95.2.6 Deflection computed in accordance with 9.5.2.2
hrough 9.5.2.5 shall not exceed limits stipulated in the de-
;ign specification.
9.5.3-Two-way construction (nonprestressed)
9.5.3.1 For two-way construction, the minimum thick-
less stipulated in Table 9.5(c) shall apply unlessthe compu-
ation of deflection indicates that lesser thickness may be
sed without adverse effects.
95.3.2 For slabs without beams, but with drop panels
zxtending in eachdirection from center line of support a dis-
m c e not less than 1/6the span length in that direction mea-
sured center-to-center of supports, and a projection below
the slab at least the slab thickness beyond the drop, thick-
ness required by Table 9.5(c) may be reduced by10 percent.
9.5.33 At discontinuous edges, an edge beam shall be
provided with a stiffness ratio 01 not less than 0.80; or the
minimum thickness required by Table9 3 c ) or 9.5.3.2, shall
be increased by at least 10percent in the panel with adiscon-
tinuous edge.
95.3.4-Computation of immediate deflection
Where deflections are to be computed, those whichoc-
cur immediately on application of load shall be computed by
the usual methods or formulas for elastic deflections and as
specified in this chapter. These computationsshall also take
into account the size and shape of the panel, the conditions
of the support, and the nature of restraints at the panel edges.
For such computations,the modulus of elasticity, E,, of the
concrete shall be as specified in 8.5.1. The effective moment
of inertia shall satisfy the provisionsof Section 9.5.2.3; other
values maybe used if theyresult in predictions of deflection
in reasonable agreement with theresults of comprehensive
tests.
9.5.3.5-Computation of long-time deflections
Unless values are obtained by a more comprehensive
analysis or test, the additional long-time deflection for nor-
mal weight two-way construction shall be computed in ac-
cordance with 9.5.2.3.
95.3.6Allowable deflection
The deflection computed in accordance with 9.5.3.4 and
9.5.3.5 shall not exceed the limits stipulated in the design
specification.
9.5.APrestressed concrete construction
9.5.4.1 For flexural membersdesignedinaccordance
with provisions of Chapter18, immediate camber and deflec-
 tion shall be computed by usual methodsor formulas for elas-
tic deflections, and the momenti nofd a of the gross concrete
section may be used for uncracked sections. When members
are cracked, a bilinear moment-curvature methd shall be
used. I, as provided in Eq. (9-7) maybe used for this purpose.
95.4.2 Additional long-time camber and deflection of
prestressed concrete members shallbe computed takinginto
account stresses and strain in concrete and steel under sus-
tained load and including effects of creep and shrinkage of
concrete and relaxationof steel.
95.4.3 Deflection computed in accordance with 9.5.4.1
and 9.5.4.2shall not exceedlimits stipulated in Table 9.5(a).
9.5.5-Composite construction
95.5.1"Shored construction
If compositeflexuralmembers are supportedduring
construction so that, after removal of temporary supports,
dead load is resistedby the full composite section, itis per-
mitted to consider the composite member equivalent to a
monolithically cast member for computation of deflection.
Fornonprestressedmembersconsideredequivalentto
monolithically cast member, the values given
Table 9.5(b), or Table 9.5(c) as appropriate, shall apply. If
deflection is computed, account should be taken of curva-
tures resulting from differential shrinkage ofprecastand
cast-in-place components, and of axial creep effects in a pre-
stressed concrete member.
9.552-Unshored construction
If thethickness of a nonprestressedprecastflexural
member meets the requirements of Table 9 3 b ) or
Table 9.5(c),as appropriate, deflection need not be comput-
ed. If the thickness of a nonprestressed composite member
meets the requirements of Table 9 3 b ) or Table 9.5(c), as ap-
propriate, deflection occurring after the member becomes
composite need not be computed, but the long-time deflec-
tion of the precastmember shouldbe investigated for magni-
tude and duration ofload prior to beginning of effective
composite action.
95.53 Deflection computed in accordance with 9.5.5.1
and 9.5.5.2 shall not exceedlimits stipulated in Table 9.5(a).
9.5.6-Walls
Walls subjected to transverse loads shall also satisfy the
requirements as specified in this chapter for nonprestressed
one-way or nonprestressed two-way, prestressed construc-
tion, or composite construction, as appropriate.
Chapter 10-Flexure and Axial Loads
1O.O-Notation
a = depth of equivalent rectangular stress block as
defined in 10.2.7
A = effective tension area of concrete surrounding the
flexural tension reinforcement and having the same
centroid as that reinforcement, divided by the num-
ber of bars or wires, sq in. When the flexural rein-
forcement consistsof different bar or wire sizesthe
number of barsor wires shall be computed as the
total area of reinforcement divided by the area of the
largest baror wire used
A, = area of core of spirally reinforced compression mem-
ber measured to outside diameterof spiral, sq in.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
Ag = gross area of section, sq in.
A, = area of nonprestressed tension reinforcement, sq in.
Ask = area of skin reinforcement per unit height in one side
face, in2& See 10.6.7.
A , = total area of longitudinal reinforcement,
(bars or steel shapes),sq in.
A, = area of structural steel shape, pipe., or tubing
in a composite section, sq in,
A l = loaded area
A2 = the area of the lower baseof the largest frustumof
a pyramid, cone,or t a p e d wedge contained wholly
within thesupport and havingfor its upper base the
loaded area, and havingside slopes of 1 vertical to2
horizontal
b = width of compression face ofmember,in.
c = distance from extreme Compression fiber to neutral
axis, in.
C,,, = a factor relating actual moment diagramto an
a equivalent uniform moment diagram
in d = distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid
of tension reinforcement, in.
d, = thickness of concrete cover measured from extreme
tension fiberto center of bar or wire located closest
thereto, in.
E, = modulus of elasticity of concrete, psi. See 8.5.1
E, = modulus of elasticity of reinforcement, psi.
See 8.5.2 or 8.5.3
EI = flexural stiffness of compressionmember.
See Eq. (10-10) and Eq.(10-11)
f: = specified compressive strength of concmte, psi
f, = calculated stress in reinforcement at sustained
loads, ksi
f'. = specified yield strength of nonprestressed
reinforcement, psi
b = overallthickness ofmember,in.
Ig = moment of inertia of gross concrete section about
centroidal axis, neglecting reinforcement
I,, = moment of inertia of reinforcement about centroidal
axis of member cross section
Z, = moment of inertia of structural steel shape, pipe, or
tubing about centroidalaxis of composite member
cross section
Æ = effective length factor for compression members
pC = height of column, center-to-center of floors or roof
4 = unsupportedlengthofcompressionmember
Mc = factored moment to be usedfor design of
compression member
M , = factored moment at section
M, = value of smaller factored end moment on a compres-
sion member due to the loads that result in no appre-
ciable side-sway, calculated by conventionalelastic
frame analysis, positiveif member is bent insingle
curvature, negativeif bent in double curvature.
Mu = value of larger factored end momenton compres-
sion members due to loads which result no in appre-
ciable side-sway, calculated by conventionalelastic
frame analysis
 ~ ~
S T D m A C I 3V9-ENGL 1997
AC1 STANDARD
valueof larger factored endmomentoncompression
memberdue to loadswhich result in appreciable
side-sway, calculated byconventional elastic
frame analysis.
nominal axial load strength at balanced strain
conditions.
10.3.2
See
critical load. See Eq. (10- 9)
nominal axial load strength at given eccentricity
nominal axial load strength at zero eccentricity
factored axial load at given eccentricity I Q P,
radius of gyration of cross section ofacompressionfollowing:
member
quantity limiting distribution of flexural
reinforcement.
10.6
See
bounded
edges
by
factor defined in 10.2.7
ratio of maximum factored axial dead load to maxi-
mumtotalfactored axial load, where the load is due
to gravity effects only in the calculation of P, in
Eq. (10-7), or ratio of the maximum factored
sustained lateral load to the maximum total
factored lateral load
in that story in the
calculation of P, in Q. (10-8).
momentmagnification factor for framesbraced
againstside-sway to reflect effects ofmember
curvature between ends of compression members
momentmagnification factor for framesnotbraced
againstside-sway to reflect lateral drift resulting
from lateral gravity
and loads
ratio of
nonprestressed tension reinforcement basedon
= A,/bd
Pb = reinforcement ratio producing balanced strain
conditions. See 10.3.2
ps = ratio of volume of spiral reinforcement to total
volume of core (out-to-out of spirals) of a spirally
reinforced compression member
4 = strengthreductionfactor. See 9.3
10.1 -Scope
Provisions of Chapter 10 shall apply for design of mem-
bers subject to flexure or axial loads or to combined flexure
and axial loads.
10.2-Design assumptions
10.2.1 Strength design of members for flexure and axial
loads shall be based on assumptions given in 10.2.2 through
10.2.7, and on satisfaction of applicable conditions of equi-
librium and compatibility ofstrains.
10.2.2 Strain in reinforcement and concrete shall be as-
sumed directly proportional to the distance from theneutral
axis, except for deep flexural members with overall depth
to clear span ratios greater than */s for continuous spans
and 4 / ~for simple spans, a nonlinear distribution of strain
shall be considered. See 10.7.
10.2.3 Maximum usable strain at extreme concrete com-
pression fiber shall be assumed equal to 0.003.
10.2.4 Stress in reinforcementbelow specified yield
strength fy for grade of reinforcement usedshall be taken as
E, times steel strain. For strains greater thanthat correspond-
ing tofy, stress in reinforcement shall be considered inde-
pendent of strain andequal to fy.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
~~ ~ ~~
W 0 b b 2 9 4 9 0538085 140
10.25 Tensile strength of concrete shall be neglected in
axial and flexural calculationsof reinforced concrete, except
when meeting requirements of 18.4.
10.2.6 Relationship between concrete compressive stress
distribution and concrete strain may be assumed to be rect-
angular, trapezoidal, parabolic, or any other shape that re-
sults in prediction of strength in substantial agreement with
results ofcomprehensivetests.
10.2.7 Requirementsof10.2.6 are satisfied by an equiva-
lent rectangular concrete stress distribution definedby the
10.2.7.1 Concrete stress of 0.85f; shall be assumed
uniformly distributed over an equivalent compression zone
of the cross sectionaand straight line lo-
cated parallel to the neutral axis at a distance a = Blc from
the fiber of maximum compressive strain.
10.2.7.2 Distance c from fiber ofmaximum strain to the
neutral axis shall be measured in a direction perpendicular to
that
axis.
10.2.73 Factor B1 shall be taken as 0.85 for concrete
strengths f: up to and including 4OOO psi. For strengths
above 4OOO psi, R1 shall be reduced continuously at a rate of
0.05 for each loo0 psi of strength in excessof4000psi,but
fil shall notbetaken less than0.65.
10.3-General principlesandrequirements
10.3.1 Designof crosssectionsubjecttoflexure or axial
combined
loads
toor flexure and
axial
loads
shall be
stress and strain compatibility using assump-
tions in 10.2.
10.3.2 Balanced strain conditions exist at a cross section
when tension reinforcement reaches the strain corresponding
to its specified yield strengthf, just asconcrete in compres-
sion reaches its assumed ultimate strain of 0.003.
10.3.3 For flexural members, and for members subject to
combined flexure and compressive axial load when the de-
sign axial loadstrength $P, is less than the smaller of
O. lof: A, or $ Pb, the ratio of reinforcement p provided
shall not exceed 0.75 ofthe ratio Pb that would produce bal-
anced strain conditions for the section under flexure without
axial load. For members with compression reinforcement,
the portion of Pb equalized by compression reinforcement
need not be reduced by the 0.75 factor.
10.3.4 Compression reinforcement in conjunction with ad-
ditional tension reinforcement may be used to increase the
strength of flexural members.
10.3.5 Design axial load strength $P, of compression
members shall not be takengreater than the following:
10.3 5. 1 For nonprestressed members with spiral rein-
forcement conformingto 7.10.4 or composite members con-
forming to 10.14:
10.35.2 For nonprestressed members with tie reinforce-
ment conformingto 7.10.5:
 103.53 Forprestressedmembers,designaxialload
strength $ P, shall not be taken greater than 0.85 (for mem-
bers with spiral reinforcement) or 0.80 (for members with tie internal moment arm. In lieu of such computations,f,may be
reinforcement) of the design axial load strengthat zero ec-
centricity @ P,.
103.6 Members subjectto compressive axial load shall be Combination 9,9.2.1, withthe load factors takenas unity.
designed for the maximum moment that can accompany the
axial load. The factored axial load P,,at given eccentricity subject
shall not exceed that given in10.3.5. The maximum factored tight. For such
moment M,,shall be magnified for slenderness effects in ac-
10.10.
cordance
with
10.4-Distance between lateral supports of
flexural members
10.4*1 Of lateral for a beam not ex- fective flange width ex&
ceed 50 timesthe least width b ofcompressionflange or
face.
10.4.2 Effects of lateral eccentricityof load shallbe taken
into account in determining spacing of lateral supports.
10.5-Minimum reinforcement of flexural members
105.1 At any section of a flexural member, exceptas pro-
vided in 10.5.2 and 10.5.3, where positive reinforcement is
required by analysis, the ratio p provided shall not be less
than that given by
Y'
In T-beams and joists where the webis in tension,the ratio
p shall be computed for this purpose using width of web.
105.2 Alternatively, areaof reinforcement provided at ev-
ery section, positive or negative, shall be at least one-third
greater than that required by analysis.
10.5.3 For structural slabsof uniform thickness, minimum account nonlinear distribution ofstrain and lateral buckling.
area and maximum spacing of reinforcement in the direction (Seealso 12.10.6)
of the span shallbe as required for minimum reinforcement
according to 7.12.
10.6-Distribution of flexural reinforcementin
beams and one-way slabs
10.6.1 Thissectionprescribesrules for distributionof
flexural reinforcementto control flexural crackingin beams
andinone-wayslabs(slabsreinforcedtoresistflexural
stresses in onlyone direction).
10.6.2 Distribution of flexural reinforcement in two-way
slabs shall be as required by 13.4.
10.6.3 Flexural tension reinforcement shallbe well distrib-
uted within maximum flexural tension zones of a member
cross section as required by 10.6.4.
10.6.4 When design yieldstrength4 for tension reinforce-
ment exceeds 40,000 psi, cross sections of maximum posi-
tive and negative moment shallbe so proportioned that the
quantity z given by
2 = fs3$3
does not exceed 175 kips per in. for interior exposure and
I 145 kips per stress in re-
in. for exterior exposure. Calculated
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
inforcement at sustained loadsf, (kips /in?)shall be comput-
ed as the moment dividedby the product of steel area and the
taken as 40percent of thespecifîed yield smngthfJ. The sus-
tained loads shall include those loads identified in Load
10.6.5 Provisions of 10.6.4 are not suficient for structures
to very aggressive exposureor designed to be water-
structures, special investigations and precau-
tions are required.
10.6.6 Where flanges of T-beam ten- construction
in are
sion, part of the flexural tension reinforcement shall be dis-
tributed over an effective flange width as defined in 8.10,or
a width equal to the span, whicheveris smaller. If the ef-
IIlo the span, mme longitudinal
reinforcement shall be provided in the outer of the
flange.
10.6.7 If the depthof a web exceeds3 ft, longitudinal skin
reinforcement shall be uniformly distributed along both side
faces of the member for a distance d/2 nearest the flexural
tension reinforcement. The area of skin reinforcement Ask
per foot of heighton each side face shall be 2 0.012 (d - 30).
The maximum spacing of the skin reinforcement shall not
exceed the lesser of d 6 and 12 in. Such reinforcementmay
be included in strength computations if a strain compatibility
analysis is made to determine stresses in the individual bars
or wires. The total area of longitudinal skin reinforcement in
both facesneed not exceed one-half of the required flexural
tensile reinforcement.
10.7-Deep flexural members
10.7.1 Flexural members with overall depth to clear span
ratios greater than 't5 for continuous spans,or 4t5for simple
spans shall be designed as deep flexural members taking into
10.7.2 Shear strength of deep flexural members shall be in
I accordance with 11.8.
10.73 Minimum flexural tension reinforcement shall con-
form to 10.5.
10.7.4 Minimum horizontal and vertical reinforcement in
the side faces of deep flexural members shallbe the greater
of the requirements of 11.8.8, 11.8.9 and 11.8.10 or 14.3.2
and 14.3.3.
10.8-Design dimensions for compression
members
10.8.1-1'solated compression member with multiple
spirals
Outer limits of the effective
cross section of a compression
member with twoor more interlocking spirals shall be taken
at a distance outside the extreme limits of thespirals'equalto
the minimum concretecover required by 7.7.
10.8.2-Compression member built monolithidly
with wall
Outer limits of the effective cross section of a spirally re-
inforced or tied reinforced compression member built mono-
lithically with a concrete wall or pier shall be taken not
greater than 1'/2 in. outside the spiralor tiereinforcement.

~~~
S T D - A C 1 349-ENGL L997
34942 AC1 STANDARD
10.83-Equivalent circular compression member
In lieu of using full gross area for design, a compression
member with asquare, octagonal, or other shaped cross sec-
tion may be considered as a circular section with a diameter
equal to the least lateral dimension ofthe actual shape. Gross
area considered, required percentage of reinforcement, and
design strength shall be based onthat circular section.
10.8.4-Limits of section
For a compression member with larger
a cross section than
required by considerations of loading, a reduced effective
area Ag not less than one-half the total area may be used to
determine minimum reinforcement and design strength.
10.9-Limits for reinforcement of compression
members
10.9.1 Area of longitudinalreinforcement for noncompos-
ite compression members shall not be less than0.01nor
more than0.08 times gross area Ag of section.
10.9.2 Minimum number oflongitudinal bars in compres-
sion members shall be 4 for bars within rectangular or circu-
lar ties, 3 for bars within triangular ties, and 6 for bars
enclosed by spirals conforming to 10.9.3.
10.9.3 Ratio of spiral reinforcement ps shall not be less
than the value given by
(10-5)
wheref,, is the specified yield strength of spiral reinforce-
ment but not more than60,OOO psi.
10.1O-Slenderness effects in compression
members
10.10.1 Design of compression membersshall be based on
forces and moments determined fromanalysis of the struc-
ture. Such analysis shall take into account influence of axial
loads and variable moment of inertia on member stiffness
and fixed-end moments, effect of deflections on moments
and forces, and theeffects of duration of loads.
10.10.2 Inlieuof the procedure prescribed in10.10.1,
slenderness effects in compression members may be evalu-
ated in accordance withthe approximate procedurepresent-
edin 10.11.
10.10.3 The detailed requirements of 10.1 1 need not be ap-
pliedif slenderness effects in compressionmembers are
evaluated in accordance with 10.10.1.
10.11-Approximate evaluation of slenderness
effects
10.11.1-Unsupported length of compression members
10.11.1.1 Unsupported length 4 of acompression mem-
ber shall be taken as the clear distance between floor slabs,
beams, or other members capable of providing lateral sup-
port for that compression member.
10.11.1.2 Wherecolumn capitals or haunches are
present, unsupported length shall be measured to the lower
extremity of capital or haunch in the plane considered.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
~~
m 0662949 0538087 T L 3 m
10.11.2-Effective length of compression members
10.11.2.1 Forcompressionmembersbraced against
side-sway, effective length factor & shall be taken as 1.O, un-
less analysis shows that a lower valueis justified.
10.11.2.2 For compression members not braced against
side-sway,effective length factor & shall be determined with
due consideration of effects of cracking and reinforcement
on relative stiffness, and shall be greater than 1.O.
10.11.SRadius of gyration
Radius of gyration r may be taken equalto 0.30 timesthe
overall dimension in the direction stability is being consid-
ered for rectangular compression members, and 0.25 times
the diameter for circular compression members. For other
shapes, r may be computedfor the gross concrete section.
10.11.4-Consideration of slenderness effects
10.11.4.1 For compression members not braced against
side-sway, effects of slenderness may be neglected when
&/,/ris less than 34 - 12 Mu I Ma.
10.11.4.2 For compression members not braced against
side-sway, effects of slenderness may be neglected when
&/U / r is less than 22.
10.11.4.3 For all compressionmemberswith k/,/ r
greater than 100, an analysis as defined in 10.10.1 shall be
made.
10.11.S”oment magnification
10.11.5.1 Compression members shall be designed us-
ing the factored axial load P,,from a conventional frame
analysis and a magnifiedfactored moment M, defined by
Mc = 8bM2b + ‘ s M h (10-6)
where
6, = -2 1.0 (10-7)
1”
1
6, = 2 1.0 (10-8)
CPU
1”
and
( 10-9)
W,, and W,are the summations for all columns in a sto-
ry. For frames not bracedagainst side-sway, both 8, and ss
shall be computed.For frames braced against side-sway, 8,
shall be taken as 1.0. In calculation of P,, k shall be com-
putedaccording to 10.11.2.1 for 6, andaccording to
10.11.2.2 for 8.,
 S T D - A C 1 349-ENGL 1997
NUCLEAR SAFEPl STRUCTURES CODE
10.11.5.2 In lieu of a more accurate calculation, EI in
Eq. (10-9) may be takeneither as
(10-10)
or conservatively
EcI,/2.5
EI = (10-11)
1+Pd
10.11.5.3 In Eq. (10-7), for membersbraced against
side-sway and withouttransverse loads between supportsC,
may be takenas
C, = 0.6 + 0.4-M l b (10-12)
but not less than 0.4.
For all other cases, C,,,shall be taken as 1.0.
10.115.4If computations showthat there is no moment
at both endsof a braced compression memberor that com-
puted endeccentricities are less than (0.6 + 0.03h) in., M u
in Eq. (10-6) shall be based on a minimum eccentricity of
(0.6 + 0.03 h) in. about each principal axis separately. Ratio
M u I M u in Eq. (10-12) shall be determined by either the
following:
a) When computedend eccentricities are less than
(0.6 + 0.03 h) in., computed end moments may be used
to evaluate Mu I Ma in W.(10-12).
b) If computationsshowthat there is essentially no
moment at bothends of acompressionmember, the
ratio Mu I M s shall be taken equalto one.
10.115.5 If computations show thatthere is no moment
at both ends of a compression member not braced against side-
sway, or thatcomputedendeccentricities are less than
(0.6+ 0.03h) in., M a in Eq. (10-6) shall be based on amini-
mum eccentricity of (0.6 + 0.03 h) in. about each principal
axis separately.
10.11.6-Moment magnification for flexural members
In frames not bracedagainst side-sway, flexural members
shall be designed for the total magnified end moments the
compression membersat the joint.
10.11.7-Moment magnifier 6 for biaxial bending
For compression members subject to bending about both
principal axes, moment about each axis shall be magnified
by 6, computed from corresponding conditions of restraint
about thataxis.
10.12-Axiallyloadedmemberssupporting slab
system
Axially loaded members supporting a slab system includ-
ed
within the scope of 13.1 shall be designed as provided
Chapter 10 and in accordance with the additional require-
ments of Chapter 13.
10.13-Transmission of column loads through
floor system
Whenthe specified compressive strength of concreteain
column isgreater than 1.4 times that specified for a floorsys-
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
W 0662947 0538088 95T
349-33
tem, transmission of load through the floor system shall be
provided by one of the following.
10.13.1 Concrete ofstrength specifiedfor the column shall
be placed inthe floor at the column location.Top surface of
the column concrete shall extend 2 fi into the slab from face
of column. Column concrete shall be well integrated with
floor concrete and shall be placed in accordance with 6.4.5
and 6.4.6.
10.13.2 Strength of a column through floora system shall
be based on the lower valueof concrete strengthwith vertical
dowels andspirals as required.
10.133 For columns laterally supported on four sides by
beams of approximately equal depth or by slabs, strength of
the column maybe based onan assumed concrete strength in
the column joint equal to 75 percent of column concrete
strength plus 35 percent of floor concrete strength.
10.1M o m p o s i t e compression members
10.14.1 Composite compression members shall include all
such membersreinforced longitudinallywith structural steel
shapes, pipe, or tubing with or without longitudinal bars.
10.14.2 Strength of a composite member shall be comput-
ed for the same limiting conditionsapplicableto ordinary re-
inforced concrete members.
10.14.3 Any axial load strength assigned to concrete of a
of composite member shall be transferred to the concrete by
members or brackets in direct bearing on the composite
member concrete.
10.14.4 All axial load strength not assigned to concrete of
a composite member shall be developed by direct connection
to the structural steel shape, pipe, or tube.
10.14.5 For evaluationof slendernesseffects, radius of gy-
ration of a composite section shall not be greater than the
value givenby
(10-13)
In lieu of a more accurate calculation, E l in Eq. (10-9)
may be takeneither as Eq. (10-11) or
of
(10-14)
10.14.6-Structural steel encased concrete core
10.14.6.1 For a composite member with concrete core
encased by structural steel, thickness of the steel encasement
shallnotbe less than
in b B s for each face of width b
nor
for circular sectionsdiameter
of h
 10.14.6.2 Longitudinal bars located within the encased
concrete core may be consideredin computing A, and I,.
10.1474piral reinforcement arwnd structuralsteelcore
A composite member with spirally reinforced concrete
around a structural steel core shall conform tothe following.
10.14.7.1 Specified compressive strength of concrete
f L shall not be less than 2500 psi.
10.14.7.2 Design yield strength of structural steel core
shall be the specified minimum yield strength for grade of
structural steel used but notto exceed 50,000 psi.
10.14.7.3 Spiral reinforcement shall conform to 10.9.3.
10.14.7.4 Longitudinal bars located within the spiral
shall not be less than 0.01 nor more than0.08 times net area
of concrete section.
10.14.7.5 Longitudinal bars located within the spiral
may be considered in computingA, and It.
10.14.PTie reinforcement around structuralsteel core
A composite member with laterally tied concrete around a
structural steel core shall conform to the following.
10.14.8.1 Specified compressive strength of concrete
f: shall not be less than 2500 psi.
10.14.8.2 Design yield strength of structural steel core
shall be the specified minimum yield strength for grade of
structural steel used but notto exceed 50,000 psi.
10.14.8.3 Lateral ties shall extend completely around
the structural steel core.
10.14.8.4 Lateral ties shall have a diameter not less
than times the greatest side dimension of composite
member, exceptthat ties shall not be smaller thanNo. 3 and
are not required to be larger than No. 5. Welded wire fabric
of equivalent area is permitted.
10.14.8.5 Vertical spacing oflateral ties shall not exceed
16 longitudinal bar diameters, 48 tie bar diameters, or
times the least side dimension of the composite member.
10.14.8.6 Longitudinal bars located within the ties shall
not be less than 0.01 nor more than 0.08 times net area of
concrete section.
10.14.8.7 A longitudinal bar shall be located at every
comer of a rectangularcross section, with other longitudinal
bars spaced notfarther apart thanI/, the least side dimension
of the composite member.
10.14.8.8 Longitudinal bars located within the ties may
be considered in computing A, for strength but not in com-
puting I, for evaluation of slendernesseffects.
10.1%Bearing strength
10.15.1 Design bearing strength on concrete shall not ex-
ceed I$ (0.85 f LAl), except when the supporting surface is
wideronall sides than the loaded area, designbearing
strength on the loaded area may be multiplied by ,/mi,
but not more than 2.
10.15.2 10.15 does not apply
to post-tensioning anchorages.
Chapter Il-Shear and Torsion
11.O-Notation
a = shear span, distance between concentrated load and
face of support
A , = area of concrete section resisting shear transfer, sq in.
A! = area of reinforcement in bracket or corbel resisting
-
factored moment, [V, a + Nu,(h 41, sq. in.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
A, = gross area of section, sq in.
Ah = area of shear reinforcement parallel to flexural
tension reinforcement, sq in.
A/ = total area of longitudinal reinforcement to resist
torsion, sq in.
A, = area of reinforcement in bracket or corbel resisting
tensile force Nuclsq. in.
Aps = area of prestressed reinforcementin tension zone,sq in.
A, = area of nonprestressed tension reinforcement, sq in.
A, = area of one leg of a closed stirrup resisting torsion
within adistance s, sq in.
A, = area of shear reinforcement within adistance s, or
area of shear reinforcement perpendicularto flexural
tension reinforcementwithii a distance s for deep
flexural members,sq in.
Ad = area of shear-frictionreinforcement, sq in.
Avh = area of shear reinforcement parallelto flexural
tension reinforcement within distance
a , in.
s ~ sq
b = width of compression face ofmember,in.
bl = width of the critical section defined in 11.12.6.1
measured inthe direction ofthe span for which
moments are determined, in.
bz = width of the critical section defined in 11.12.6.1
measured inthe direction perpendicularto bl, in.
bo = perimeter of critical section for slabs and footings, in.
b, = width of that part of cross section containing the
closed stirrups resisting torsion
b, = web width, or diameter of circular section, in.
bI1 = total length of thatportion of perimeterbo for which
Velis computed
= total length of thatportion of perimeterbo for which
VCzis computed
cl = size of rectangular or equivalentrectangularcolumn,
capital, or bracket measured in the direction of the
span for which moments are being determined,in.
e2 = size of rectangular or equivalentrectangularcolumn,
capital, or bracket measured transverse to the
direction of the span for which momentsare
being determined, in.
C, = factor relating shear and torsional stress properties
- "
- _ b,d
CXaY
d = distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid
of longitudinal tension reinforcement,but need not
be less than 0.80h for prestressed members, in.
(For circular sections, d need not beless than the
distance from extreme compression fiber to
centroid of tension reinforcement in opposite
half of member.)
fL = specified compressivestrength of concrete, psi
E = square root of specified compressivestrength of
concrete, psi
fd = stress due to unfactored dead load, at extreme fiber
of section wheretensile stress is caused by
externally applied loads, psi
fml = concrete membrane stress acting along length 6; ,
to be taken as positive for compression and negative
for tension, psi
 S T D - A C 1 349-ENGL L997
NUCLEAR SAFETY
CODESTRUCTURES
fm2 = concrete membrane stress acting along length bf2,
to be takenas positive for compression and negative
for tension, psi
fp, = compressive stress in concrete (after allowance for
all prestress losses) at centroid of cross section
resisting externally applied loads or at junction of
web
and flange when the centroid lies within the
flange,psi. (In acompositemember.& is resultant
compressive stress at centroid ofcomposite section,
or at junction of webandflangewhenthe centroid
lies within the flange,duetobothprestressand
moments resisted by precast memberacting alone)
fpe = compressive stress in concrete due to effective pre-
stress forces only (after allowance for all prestress
losses) at extreme fiber ofsection where tensile
stress is caused by externallyapplied loads, psi
fpu = specified tensile strength of prestressing tendons, psi
fy = specifiedyieldstrengthofnonprestressed
reinforcement,psi
Ir = overall thickness ofmember,in.
h, = total depth of shearhead cross section, in.
h, = total height of wall from base to top, in.
I = moment of inertia of section resisting externally
applied factored loads
/n = clear span measured face-to-face of supports
4 = length of shearhead arm from centroid of
concentrated load or reaction, in.
/W = horizontal length ofwall, in.
MCr= moment causing flexural crackingat section due to
externally applied loads. See 11.4.2.1
M , = modified moment
M-= maximum factored moment at section due to
externally applied loads
Mp = required plastic moment strength of shearhead
cross section
Mu = factored moment at section
MV = moment resistance contributed by shearhead
reinforcement
Nu = factored axial load normal to cross section occurring
simultaneously withV,,; to be taken as positive for
compression, negativefor tension, and to include
effects of tension due to creep and shrinkage
Nu,= factored tensile force applied at top of bracket or
corbel acting simultaneously withV,, to be taken
as positive for tension
s = spacing of shear or torsionreinforcementin
direction parallel to longitudinalreinforcement, in.
s1 = spacing of vertical reinforcement in wall, in.
s2 = spacing of shear or torsion reinforcement in
direction perpendicular to longitudinal
reinforcement or spacing of horizontal
reinforcement in wall, in.
T, = nominal torsional moment strength provided
by concrete
T,, = nominal torsional moment strength
T, = nominal torsional moment strength provided
by torsion reinforcement. See 1 1.6.9.1
Tu = factored torsional moment at section
V, = nominal shear strength provided by concrete
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
0 b b 2 9 4 9 0538090 508
349-35
Vel = punching shear strength provided by aconcrete
plane oflength b II
V,2 = punching shear strength provided by aconcrete
plane oflength b I2
V , = nominal shear strength providedby concrete when
diagonal cracking results fromcombined shear and
moment
V, = nominal shear strengthprovidedby concrete when
diagonalcrackingresultsfromexcessiveprincipal
tensile stress in web
V, = shear force at sectiondue to unfactoreddeadload
Vi = factored shear force at section duetoexternally
applied loads occurring simultaneouslywith M-
V, = nominal shear strength
Vp = vertical component of effective prestress force
at section
V, = nominal shear strength provided by shear
reinforcement
V, = factored shear force at section
Y, = nominal shear stress, psi. See 11.12.6.2
x = shorter overall dimension of rectangular part of
cross section
x1 = shorter center-to-center dimension of closed
rectangular stirrup
y = longer overall dimension of rectangular part of
cross section
y1 = longer center-tecenter dimension of closed
rectangular stirrup
y, = distance from centroidal axis of gross section,
neglecting reinforcement, to extreme fiber in tension
&y= torsional section properties.See 11.6.1.1 and 11.6.1.2
a = angle between inclined stirrups and longitudinal axis
of member
a , = angle between shear-friction reinforcement and
shear plane
a, = constant used to compute V, in slabs
a, = coefficient as a function ofyl /XI.See 11.6.9.1
a,, = ratio of stiffness of shearhead arm to surrounding
composite slab section. See 11.12.4.5
I B, = ratio of long side to short side of loaded rectangular area
fip = constant used to compute V, in prestressed slabs
I = numberof identical arms ofshearhead
p = coefficientof friction. See 11.7.4.3
= fraction of unbalanced moment transferred by
flexure at slab-column connections. See 13.3.3.2.
’yv = fraction of unbalanced moment transferred by
eccentricity of shear at slab-column connections.
See 11.12.6.1.
= 1-yf
p = ratioofnonprestressedtensionreinforcement
= A,/bd
p Il = reinforcement ratio in direction “1” based on section
thickness h. See 11.12.2.3.
p I2 = reinforcement ratio in direction “2” based on section
thickness h. See 11.12.2.3
Ph = ratio of horizontal shear reinforcement area to gross
concrete area of vertical section
P,, = ratio of vertical shear reinforcement area to gross
concrete area of horizontal section
pw = A , / b w d
$ = strengthreductionfactor.See 9.3.
 11.l-Shear strength 11.3.1.1 For memberssubject to shear and flexure only,
11.1.1 Design of cross sections subject to shear shall be
based on
V, = 2 E b W d (11-3)

v, $V" (11-1)
11.3.12 For memberssubject to axial compression,
where V , is factored shear force at section considered andV ,
is nominal shear strength computed by

v, = v, + v, (11-2)
Quantity Nu I Ag shall be expressed in psi.
where V , is nominal shear strength provided by concrete in 11.3.13 Members subject to axial tension, shear rein-
accordancewith11.3 or 11.4,and V, is nominal shear forcement shall be designedto cany total shear.
strength provided byshear reinforcement in accordance with 113.1.4 At sections where factored torsional moment
1 S.6.
1 Tuexceeds $ (0.5 JfT;e>,
11.1.1.1 In determining shear strength V,, effect of any
openings in membersshall be considered.
11.1.1.2 In determiningshear strength V,, whenever ap-
plicable, effects of axial tension due to creep and shrinkage
in restrained members shall be consideredand effects of in-
clined flexural compression in variable-depth members may
be included.
11.3.2 Shear strength V , may be computed the by more de-
11.1.2 The values of used in this chapter shall not ex-
tailed calculation of l l .3.2. l through 11.3.2.3.
ceed 100 psi exceptas allowed in 1 1.1.2.1.
11.1.2.1 Values of x greater than 100 psi shall be
permitted in computing V,, Vci. and V,, for reinforced or
11.3.2.1 For memberssubject to shear and flexure only,

prestressed concrete beams and concrete joist construction

havingminimumwebreinforcement equal to f: 15000 v, = ( 1 . 9 n + 2 5 0 0 ~ ~ )bwd (11-6)
M u
times, but not more thanthree times the amounts requiredby
11.5.5.3, 11.5.5.4,or 11.5.5.5.
11.1.3 Maximum factored shear force V , at supports may but notgreater than 3 . 5 E b w d .Quantity V,d /M, shall not
be computed in accordance with 11.1.3.1 or 1 1.1.3.2 when be taken greater than 1.0 in computing V, by Eq. (1 1-6),
both of the following conditions are satisfied: where M, is factored moment occurring simultaneously with
V, at section considered.
a) support reaction, in direction ofappliedshear, intro-
11.3.2.2 For members subject to axial compression,
duces compression into the end regions ofmember,
IZq. (1 1-6) may be used to compute V , with M, substituted
and
for M, and V,dIM, not then limited to 1.0, where
b) noconcentratedloadoccursbetween face ofsupport
and location of critical section definedin11.1.3.1 or
11.1.3.2. (4h - d)
M,,, = M u - N u - (11-7)
11.1.3.1 For nonprestressed members, sections located 8
less than a distance d from face of support may be designed
for the same shear V, as that computed at a distance d . However, V, shall not be taken greater than
11.1.3.2 For prestressed members, sections located less
than a distance h12 from face of support may be designed for
the same shear V, as that computed at a distance hl2. V, = 3 . 5 K b w d 1 + - (11-8)
A/ 52Ag
11.1.4 For deep flexural members, brackets and corbels,
walls, and slabs and footings, the special provisions of 11.8
through 1 1.12 shallapply. Quantity NuI Ag shall be expressed in psi. WhenM,,, as
computed by Eq. (1 1-7) is negative, V, shall be computed by
11.2-Lightweight concrete Eq. (1 1-8).
Rules for lightweight aggregate concrete are not provided 11.3.2.3 For members subject to axial tension,
herein.

11.%Shear strength provided by concrete for v, (

= 2 1+-5:Ag)EbWd (11-9)
nonprestressed members
11.3.1 Shear strength V, shall be computed by provisions
of 1 1.3.1.1through 1 1.3.1.4,unless a more detailed calcula- where Nu is negative for tension. Quantity NulAg shall be
tion is made in accordance with 11.3.2. expressed inpsi.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
 S T D - A C 1 3YS-ENGL L797
NUCLEAR SAFETY STRUCTURES CODE
11.-hear strength providedby concrete for
prestressed members
11.4.1 For members witheffective prestress force not less
than 40 percent of thetensile strength of flexural reinforce
ment, unless a more detailed calculation is made in accor-
dance with 1 1.4.2,
(11-10)
but V , need not be taken less than 2 E b , d nor shall V,
be taken greater than 5 E b , d nor the value given in
11.4.3. or 11.4.4. The quantity V,d / M,,shall not be taken
greater than 1.0, where M,,is factored moment occurring
simultaneously with V,, at section considered. When ap-
plying Eq. (1 1-10). d in the term V,,d /M,, shall bethe dis-
tance from extremecompression fiber to centroid of
prestressed reinforcement.
11.4.2 Shear strength V, may be computedin accordance
with 1 1.4.2.1and 11.4.2.2, where V , shall be the lesser of VCi
or V,,.
11.4.2.1 Shear strength VCjshall be computed by
',Mc,
Vci = 0 . 6 E b w d + V +- (11-11)
Mmnx
but V,i need not be taken less than 1.7 J7;; b, d, where
(11-12)
and values of M,, and Vi shall be computed from the
load combination causing maximum moment to occur at
the section.
11.4.2.2 Shear strength V,, shall be computed by
Alternatively, V,, may be computed as the shear force
corresponding to dead load plus live load that results in a
principal tensile stress of 4 f l at the centroihl axis of
member, or at intersection of flange and web whencentroi-
dal axis is in the flange. In composite members, principal
tensile stress shall be computed using the cross section that
resists live load.
11.4.23 In Eq. (11-11) and (11-13), d shall be the dis-
tance from extreme compression fiber to centroid of pre-
stressed reinforcement or 0.8h, whichever is greater.
11.4.3 In a pretensioned memberin which the section at
a distance h/2 from face of support is closer to end of
member than the transfer length of the prestressing ten-
dons, the reduced prestress shall be considered when com-
puting V,,,,. This value of V,, shall also be taken as the
, maximum limit for Eq. (11-10). The prestress force shall
be assumed to vary linearly from zero at end of tendon to
a maximum at a distance from end of tendon equal to the
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
Ob62747 0538072 380
349437
transfer length, assumed to be 50 diameters forstrand and
100 diameters for singlewire.
11.4.4 In a pretensioned member where bonding of some
tendons does not extend to the end of the member, a re-
duced prestress shall be considered when computing V, in
accordance with 11.4.1 or 1 1.4.2. The value of V,, calcu-
lated using the reduced prestress shall also be taken as the
maximum limit for E q . (1 1-10). The prestress force due to
tendons for which bonding does not extend to the end of the
member shall be assumed to vary linearly from zero at the
point at which bonding commencesto a maximumat a dis-
tance from this point equal to the transfer length, assumed
to be 50 diameters for strand and 100 diameters for single
wire.
11. H h e a r strength providedby shear
reinforcement
115.1-Types of shear reinforcement
11.5.1.1 Shear reinforcement mayconsist of:
a) Stirrups perpendicular to axis of member
b) Welded wire fabric with wires located perpendicularto
axis of member.
115.1.2 For nonprestressed members, shear reinforce-
ment may alsoconsist of:
a) Stirrups making an angle of 45 deg or more with longi-
tudinal tension reinforcement.
b) Longitudinal reinforcement with bent portion making an
angle of 30 deg or more with the longitudinal tension
reinforcement
c) Combinationsof stirrups andbent longitudinal rein-
forcement.
d) Spirals.
11.5.2 Design yield strength of shear reinforcement shall
not exceed 60O , OO psi.
11.5.3 Stirrups and other bars or wires used as shear re-
inforcement shall extend to a distance d from extreme
compression fiber and shall be anchored at both ends ac-
cording to 12.13 to develop the design yield strength of re-
inforcement.
11.5.4"Spacing limits For shear reinforcement
115.4.1 Spacing of shear reinforcement placed perpen-
dicular to axis of member shall not exceed d/2 in nonpre-
stressedmembersand (3/4)hinprestressedmembers,nor
24 in.
11.5.4.2 Inclined stirrups andbent longitudinal rein-
forcement shall be so spaced that every 45 deg line,extend-
ing toward the reaction from mid-depth of member d/2 to
longitudinal tension reinforcement, shall be crossed by at
least one line of shearreinforcement.
115.43 When V, exceeds 4 E b , d , maximum spac-
ings given in 11.5.4.1 and 11.5.4.2 shall be reduced by one-
half.
11.5.5-Minimum shear reinforcement
11.5.5.1 A minimum area of shear reinforcement shall
be provided in all reinforced concrete flexural members (pre-
stressed and nonprestressed) where factored shear force V,,
 exceeds one-half the shear strength provided by concrete
Q V,, except:
a) Slabs and footings
b) Concrete joist construction defined by 8.11
c) Beams withtotal depth not greater than 10 in., 21/2times
thickness of flange, or one-half the width of web, which-
ever is greater.
11.55.2 Minimum shear reinforcement requirements of
11.5.5.1 may be waived if shown bytest that required nomi-
nal flexural and shear strengths can be developed when shear
reinforcement is omitted. Such tests shall simulate effects of
differential settlement, creep, shrinkage, andtemperature
change, based onrealistic
a assessment of such effects occur-
ring in service.
11.5.53 Where shear reinforcement is requiredby
11.5.5.1 or by analysis, and wherefactored torsional moment
T,,does not exceed$ ( 0 . 5 E E x 2 y ) , minimum area of shear
reinforcement for prestressed (except as provided in
11.5.5.4) andnonprestressedmembers shall be computed by
(11-14)
J Y
where b , and s are in inches.
11.5.5.4 For prestressed members with an effective pre-
stress force not less than 40 percent of the tensile strength of
flexural reinforcement, the area of shear reinforcement shall
not be less than thesmallerrl, from E q . (1 1-14) and(1 1-15).
(11-15)
11.5.5.5 Where factored torsional moment T, exceeds
9 ( 0 . 5 z E x 2 y ) ,and where web reinforcement is required
by 11.5.5.1 or by analysis, minimum area ofclosed stirrups
shall be computed by
50 b,s
(Av+2A,) = 7 (1 1-16)
JY
11.5.6-Design of shear reinforcement
11.5.6.1 Where factored shear force V,, exceeds shear
strength $ V,, shear reinforcement shall be provided to satis-
fy Eq. (1 1-1) and (1 1-2), where shear strength V, shall be
computed in accordance with 11.5.6.2 through 11.5.6.8.
11.5.6.2 When shear reinforcementperpendicular to
axis of member isused,
d
v, = -
A v fy
S
(11-17)
where A , is the area of shear reinforcement within a dis-
tance S .
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
11.5.63 When inclined stirrups are used as shear rein-
forcement,
A, f y (sina + cosa)d
v, =
S
(11-18)
11.5.6.4 When shear reinforcement consists of a single
bar or a single group of parallel bars, all bent up atthe same
distance from the support,
V , = A,f, sina (1 1-19)
but not greater than 3 E b , d .
11.5.65 When shear reinforcement consists of a series
of parallel bent-up bars or grcups of parallel bent-up bars at
different distances from the support, shear strength V, shall
be computed byEq. (1 1- 18).
11.5.6.6 Only the center three-fourths of the inclined
portion of any longitudinal bent bar shall be considered ef-
fective for shear reinforcement.
11.5.6.7 Where more than one type ofshear reinforce-
ment is used to reinforce the same portion of a member,
shear strength V, shall be computed as the sum of the V, val-
ues computedfor the various types.
11.5.6.8 Shear strength V, shall not be taken greater than
8JZbwd.
11.6-Combined shear and torsion strength for
nonprestressed members with rectangular or
flanged sections
11.6.1 Torsion effects shall be included with shear and
flexure where factoredtorsional moment T,, exceeds
Q(0.5EEx2y). Otherwise, torsion effects maybe ne-
glected.
11.6.1.1 For members with rectangular or flanged sec-
tions, the sum Ex3 shall be takenfor the component rectan-
gles of the section, but the overhanging flange width usedin
design shall not exceed 3 times theflange thickness.
11.6.1.2 A rectangular box section may be taken as a
solid section provided wallthickness h is at least x/4. A box
section with wall thickness less than x/4, but greater than
x/10, shall be taken as a solid section except that Cx'y shall
be multiplied by 4hlx. When h is less than x/10, the stiffness
of the wall shall be considered. Fillets shall be provided at in-
terior corners of all boxsections.
11.6.2 If the factored torsional moment T,,in a member is
required to maintain equilibrium, the member shall be de-
signed to carry that torsional moment in accordance with
11.6.4 through 11.6.9.
11.6.3 In a statically indeterminate structure where reduc-
tion oftorsional moment in a member can occur due to redis-
tribution of internal forces, maximum factored torsional
moment T,, may be reducedto $ ( 4 R Z x 5 1 3 ) .
11.6.3.1 In sucha case the correspondingly adjusted
moments and shears in adjoining members shall be used in
design.
11.6.3.2 In lieu of more exact analysis, torsional loading
from a slab shall be taken as uniformly distributed along the
member.
 S T D - A C 1 349-ENGL L997
NUCLEAR SAFETY
CODESTRUCTURES
11.6.4 Sections located less than a distance d from face of
support may be designed forthe same torsional moment T,,
as that computed at a distanced. If a concentratedtorque oc-
curs within this distance the critical section for design shall
be at the face of the support.
11.6.5-Torsional moment strength
Design of cross sections subject to torsion shall be based
on
where T,, is factored torsional momentat section considered
and T, is nominal torsional momentstrength computed by
T , = T, + T, (11-21)
where T, is nominaltorsional moment strength provided by
concrete in accordance with 1 1.6.6, and T, is nominal tor-
sional moment strength provided by torsion reinforcement in
accordance with 11.6.9.
11.6.6-Tdonal moment strength provided by concrete
11.6.6.1 Torsional moment strength T, shall be comput-
ed by
0.8 4 E C X 2 Y
T, = (1 1-22)
11.6.6.2 For members subject to significant axial ten-
sion, torsion reinforcement shallbe designed to carry the to-
tal torsional moment, unless a more detailed calculation is
made in which T, given by 3.(1 1-22) and V, given by
Eq. (11-5) shall be multiplied by(1 +Nu/ 500Ag),where Nu
is negative for tension.
11.6.7-Torsion reinforcement requirements
11.6.7.1 Torsion reinforcement, where required, shall
be provided in addition to reinforcement required to resist
shear, flexure, and axial forces.
11.6.7.2 Reinforcementrequired for torsion shall be
combined with that required for other forces, provided the
area furnished is the sum ofindividually required areas and
the most restrictive requirements for spacing and placement
are met.
11.6.73 Torsion reinforcement shall consist of closed
stirrups, closed ties, or spirals, combined with longitudinal
bars.
11.6.7.4 Design yield strength oftorsion reinforcement
shall not exceed 60,000 psi.
11.6.7.5 Stirrups and other bars and wires used as tor-
sion reinforcement shall extend to a distance d from extreme
compression fiber and shall be anchored accordingto 12.13
to develop the design yieldstrength of reinforcement.
11.6.7.6 Torsion reinforcementshall be providedat least
a distance (6,+ d) beyond the point theoretically required.
11.6.8-Spacing limits for torsion reinforcement
11.6.8.1 Spacing of closed stirrups shall not exceed the
smaller of (x1 +YI) / 4,or 12 in.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
0662949 0538094 L53
349-39
11.6.8.2 Spacingoflongitudinalbars,not less than
No. 3, distributedaround the perimeter of the closed stirrups,
shall not exceed 12 in. Atleast one longitudinal bar shall be
placed in each corner ofthe closed stirrups.
11.6.9-Design of torsion reinforcement
11.6.9.1 Where factored torsional moment T,,exceeds
torsional moment strength Q T,,torsion reinforcementshall
be provided to satisfy Eq. (1 1-20) and (1 1-21), where tor-
sional moment strength T, shall be computed by
(11-23)
where A, is the area of one leg of a closed stirrup resisting
torsion within adistances, and a,= [0.66 + 0.33 (y1/x1)] but
not morethan 1.50. Longitudinal bars distributed around the
perimeter of the closed stirrupsd, shall be providedin accor-
dance with 11.6.9.3.
11.6.9.2 A minimum area of closed stirrups shall be pro-
vided in accordance with11.5.5.5.
11.6.9.3 Required area of longitudinal bars A,
distributed around the perimeter of the closed stirrups A,
shall be computed by
(11-24)
or by
r I \
whichever is greater. Value of A, computed by Eq. (1 1-25)
need not exceed that obtained by substituting
506,s
c for 2A,
JY
11.6.9.4 Torsional moment strength T, shall not exceed
4T,.
11.7-Shear-friction
11.7.1 Provisions of 1 1.7are to be applied whereit is ap-
propriate to consider shear transfer across a given plane,
such as: an existing or potential crack, an interface between
dissimilar materials, or an interface between two concretes
cast at different times.
11.7.2 Design of cross sections subject to shear transfer as
described in 1 1.7.1 shall be based onEq. (1 1-I), where V , is
calculated in accordance withprovisions of 11.7.3 or 11.7.4.
11.7.3 A crack shall be assumed to occur along the shear
plane considered. The required area of shear-friction rein-
forcement A,f across the shear plane shall be designed using
either 11.7.4 or any other shear transfer design methods that
result in prediction of strength in substantial agreement with
results of comprehensivetests.
 11.73.1 Provisions of 11.7.5 through 11.7.10 shall ap-
ply for all calculations of shear transfer strength.
11.7.Ahear-friction design method
11.7.4.1 When shear-friction reinforcement is perpen-
V,, shall be computed by
dicular to shear plane, shear strength
V,, = Avf . f y ~
where p is coefficient of friction
in accordance with11.7.4.3.
11.7.4.2 When shear-friction reinforcement is inclined
to shear plane, such that the shearforce produces tension in
shear-friction reinforcement, shear strengthV,,shall be. com-
puted by
V , = Avf fy(psinaf + COSO^^)
the opposite face so that compressionstruts can develop be-
tween the loads andthe supports. Seealso 12.10.6.
11.8.2 The design of simply supported deep flexural mem-
bers for shear shallbe based on Eq. (1 1-1) and (11-2), where
the shear strength V, shall be in accordance with 11.8.6 or
11.8.7 and the shear strengthV, shall be in accordance with
11.8.8.
(1 1-26)
11.83 The design of continuous deep flexural members
for shear shall be based on 11.1 through 11.5 with 11.8.5
substituted for 11.1.3, or on methods satisfying equilibrium
and strength requirements. In either case the design shall also
satisfy 11.8.4, 11.8.9, and 11.8.10.
11.8.4 Shear strength V,,for deep flexural members shall
not be taken greater than8 E b , d when /n/d is less than 2.
When k / d is between 2 and 5 ,
(1 1-27)

where 9 is the angle between shear-friction reinforcement ;(

V,,= 3 10 + :)Jf;'b,d (1 1-28)
and shear plane.
11.7.43 Coefficient of friction p in Eq. (1 1-26) andEq.
(1 1-27)Shall be 11.85 Critical section for shear measured from face of
support shall be taken at a distance 0.15 /n for uniformly
loaded beams and OS& for beams with concentratedloads,
Concrete
placed
monolithically .............. 1.4 but not greater thand.
Concreteplacedagainsthardenedcon- 11.8.6 Unless a more detailed calculation
is made in accor-
crete with surface intentionally roughened dance with 11.8.7,
as specified in 11.7.9 .............................. 1.o

Concrete placed against hardened con- V, = 2 E b , d (1 1-29)

roughened ............
crete not intentionally 0.6
Concrete anchored to as-rolled structural 11.8.7 Shear strength V, may be computed by
steel by headed studs or by reinforcing
bars (see 11.7.10).................................... 0.7

11.7.5 Shear strength V,, shall not be taken greater than

0.2f:A, nor 800A, in pounds, whereA, is area of concrete
section resisting shear transfer. except that the term
11.7.6 Design yield strength of shear-friction reinforce-
ment shall not exceed6 0 , O O O psi.
11.7.7 Net tension across shear plane shall be resisted by
additional reinforcement. Permanent net compression across
shear planemay be takenas additive to the force in the shear-
friction reinforcementA,,,f,,, when calculating requiredA , , , shall not exceed 2.5, and V, shall not be taken greater than
11.7.8 Shear-friction reinforcement shall be appropriately 6 E b,d. M, is factored momentoccumng simultaneously
placed along the shear plane and shall be anchored to devel- with V,, at the critical section defined in 11.8.5.
op the specified yield strength on bothsides by embedment, 11.8.8 Wherefactoredshear force V , exceedsshear
hooks, or welding to special devices. strength Q V, shear reinforcement shallbe provided to satis-
11.7.9 For the purpose of 11.7, when concrete is placed fy Q. (11-1) and (1 1-2), where shear strength V, shall be
against previously hardened concrete, the interface for shear computed by
transfer shall be clean and free of laitance. If p is assumed
equal to 1.O, interface shall be roughened to a full amplitude
of approximately in.
11.7.10 When shear is transferred between as-rolled steel
and concrete using headed studs or welded reinforcing bars,
steel shallbe clean and freeof paint.

11.&Special provisions for deep flexural where A,, is area of shear reinforcement perpendicular to
members flexural tension reinforcement withina distances, andAvhis
11.8.1 The provisionsof 1 1.8 shall apply to members with area of shear reinforcement parallel to flexural reinforce-
Lid less than 5 that are loaded on one face and supported on ment withina distance s2.

COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute

Licensed by Information Handling Services

S T D m A C I 34S-ENGL L997
NUCLEAR SAFETY STRUCTURES CODE
11.8.9 Area of shear reinforcement A , shall not be less
than 0.0015b, s, and s shall not exceedd/5, nor 18 in.
11.8.10 The area of horizontal shear reinforcementA,h
shall not be less than 0.0025 b, s2, and s2 shall not exceed
d13, nor 18 in.
11.8.11 Shear reinforcement required at the critical sec-
tion defined in11.8.5 shall be used throughoutthe span.
11 .-pedal provisions for brackets and corbels
11.9.1 Provisions of 11.9 shall applyto brackets and cor-
bels witha shear span-to-depth ratio d d not greater thanuni-
ty, and subject to a horizontal tensile force N , not larger
than V,. Distance d shall be measured at face of support.
11.9.2 Depth at outside edge of bearing area shall not be
less than 0.5d.
11.9.3 Section at face of support shallbe designed to resist
simultaneously a shear V,, a moment [V,,a + NUE(h - d)],
and a horizontal tensileforce Nu,.
11.9.3.1 In all design calculations in accordance with
11.9. strength reduction factorQ shall be taken equalto 0.85.
11.9.3.2 Design of shear-friction reinforcement A , , to
resist shearV, shall be in accordance with11.7.
11.9.3.2.1 Shear strengthV, shall not be taken great-
er than 0.2f;b, d nor 800 b, d in pounds.
11.9.3.3 Reinforcement Ar toresistmoment [V@ +
-
N,,(h d)] shall be computed in accordance with 10.2 and
10.3.
11.9.3.4 Reinforcement A, to resist tensile force Nu,
shall be determined from Nu, 5 $An fy. Tensile force Nu,
shall not be taken lessthan 0.2 V,, unless special provisions
are made to avoid tensile forces. Tensileforce Nu, shall be
regarded as a live load even when tension results from creep,
shrinkage, or temperature change.
11.9.35 Area of primary tension reinforcement A,, shall
be made equal tothe greater of (Af+A,) or (2A,f/3 +An).
11.9.4 Closed stirrups or ties parallel to A,, with a total
areaAh not less than 0.4(A,-An), shall be uniformly distrib-
uted within two-thirdsof the effective depth adjacent to A,.
11.9.5 Ratio p =A, lbd shall notbe less than0.04 (fi /fy).
11.9.6 At front face of bracket or corbel, primary tension
reinforcement A, shall be anchored by one of the following:
a) by a structural weld to a transverse bar of at least equal
size;weldto be designedtodevelopspecifiedyield
strengthf, of A, bars;
b) by bending primary tension bars A, back to form a hori-
zontal loop, or
c) by some other means of positive anchorage.
11.9.7 Bearing area of load on bracket or corbel shall not
project beyond straight portion of primary tension bars A,,
nor project beyond interiorface of transverse anchor bar (if
one is provided).
11.l&Special provisions for walls
11.10.1 Design forshear forces perpendicularto face of
wall shall be in accordance with provisions for slabs in
11.12. Design for horizontal shear forces in plane of wall
shall be in accordance with 11.10.2 through 11.10.8.
11.10.2 Design of horizontal section for shear in plane of
wall shall be based on Eq. (11-1) and (1 1-2), where shear
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
~
Obb2949 053809b T26
349-41
strength V, shall be in accordance with 11.10.5 or 11.10.6
and shear strengthV, shall bein accordance with 11.10.9.
11.103 Shear strength V,, at any horizontal section for
shear in planeofwall shall not be taken greater than
lOnhd.
11.10.4 For design for horizontal shear forces in planeof
wall, d shall be taken equal to 0.84. A larger value of d,
equal to the distance from extreme compressionfiber to cen-
ter of force of all reinforcement in tension, may be used
when determined bya strain compatibility analysis.
11.105 Unless a more detailed calculationis made in ac-
cordance with 11.10.6, shear strength V, shall not be taken
greater than2 E h d for walls subject to N,,in compression,
or V, shall not be taken greater than the value given in
11.3.2.3 for walls subjectto N,,in tension.
11.10.6 Shear strength V, may be computed by
Eq. (1 1-32) and (1 1-33), where V, shall be the lesser of
Eq. (1 1-32) or (1 1-33). *
V , = 3 . 3 n h d + NUd
- (1 1-32)
4tw
or
1.25 f i +0 . 2 3
hd (11-33)
"_
Mu /W
v u 2 )]
where Nu is negativefor tension. When(M,, f V, - /W I 2) is
negative, Eq. (1 1-33) shall not apply.
11.10.7 Sections located closer to wall base than a dis-
tance / ,/ 2 or one-half the wall height, whichever is less,
may be designed for the same V, as that computedat a dis-
tance /W / 2 or one-half the height.
11.10.8 When factored shear forceV, is less than Q VJ2,
reinforcement shall be provided in accordance with 11.10.9
or in accordance with Chapter14. WhenV , exceeds Q VJ2,
wall reinforcement for resisting shear shall be provided in
accordance with11.10.9.
11.10.9-Design of shear reinforcement forwalls
11.10.9.1 Where factored shear forceV,, exceeds shear
strength Q V,, horizontal shear reinforcement shall be pro-
vided to satisfyEq. (1 l - l ) and (1l -2), where shear strength
V, shall be computed by
(1 1-34)
where A , is area of horizontal shear reinforcement withina
distance s2 and distanced is in accordance with11.10.4. Ver-
tical shear reinforcement shall be provided in accordance
with 11.10.9.4.
11.10.9.2 Ratio ph of horizontal shear reinforcement
area to gross concrete area of vertical section shall be less
not
than 0.0025.
 11.10.9.3 Spacing ofhorizontal shear reinforcement s2 11.12.2.1 Fornonprestressed slabs andfootings, V,
shall not exceed 6 /5,3h, nor 18 in. shall be the smallest of:
11.10.9.4 Ratio pn of vertical shear reinforcementarea
to gross concrete area of horizontal section shall not be less (11-36)
than

where ßc is the ratio of longside toshort side of the column,

( J
P, = 0.0025 + 0.5 2.5 - - (ph - 0.0025) (1 1-35) concentrated loador reaction area

(1 1-37)
nor 0.0025, but need not be greater than the required hori-
zontal shear reinforcement.
11.10.95 Spacing of vertical shear reinforcement s1 where a,is 40 for interior columns, 30 for edge columns,20
shall not exceed /W /3,3h, nor 18 in. for comer columns, and

11.1 1 -Transferof moments to columns

11.11.1When gravity load, wind, earthquake,or other lat-
eral forces cause transfer of momentat connections offram- 11.12.2.2 At columns of two-wayprestressed slabs and
ing elements to columns, the shear resulting from moment footings that meet the requirements of 18.9.3
transfer shall be considered inthe design oflateral reinforce-
ment in the columns.
11.11.2 Except for connections notpart of a primaryseis-
mic load-resisting systemthat are restrained on four sides by
beams or slabs of approximately equal depth, connections where ßP is the smaller of 3.5 or (gd/bo + 1 3 , g is 40 for
shall have lateral reinforcement not less than that required by interior columns, 30 for edge columns, and20 for comer col-
Eq. (1 1-14) withinthe column for a depth notless than that umns, bo is perimeter of critical section defined in 11.12.1.2,
of the deepest connection of framing elements to the col- fpc is the average value offpc for the two directions, andVp
umns. S e e also 7.9. is the vertical component of all effective prestress forces
crossing the critical section. V, may be computedby
Eq. (1 1-39) if the following are satisfied; otherwise,
11.12-Special provisions for slabs and footings 11.12.2.1 shall apply:
11.12.1 The shear strength of slabs and footings in the vi-
cinity of columns, concentrated loads or reactions is gov- a) no portion of the column cross section shall be closer to
erned by the moresevere of two conditions: a discontinuous edge than 4 times the slab thickness,
and
11.12.1.1 Beam action where eachcritical section to be
investigated extends in a plane across the entire width. For b) f: in Eq. (1 1-39) shall not be taken greater than
beam action the slab or footing shall be designed in accor- 5000 psi, and
dance with 11.1 through 11.5. c) fpe in eachdirection shall not be less than 125psi, nor be
taken greater than 500 psi.
11.12.1.2 Two-way action where each of the critical
sections to be investigated shall be located so that its pe- 11.12.2.3 For slabs or footings in which the shear force
rimeter bo is a minimum but need not approach closer than V, occurs with membranestressesfml orf',Z,
d/2 to
a) edges or comers of columns,concentratedloads, or
reaction areas, or
where Vcl and Vc2 are computedinaccordancewith
b) changes in slab thickness such as edges of capitals or
11.12.2.3.1 and 11.12.2.3.2.
drop panels. 11.12.2.3.1 For fml tensile and
not
exceeding
For two-way action the slab or footing shall be designed in 0.9 P; f y
accordance with 11.12.2 through 1 1.12.6.
11.12.1.3 For square or rectangular columns, concen-
trated loads, or reaction areas, the critical sections may have
four straight sides.
except the factor (2 + 443,) shall not be taken greater than 4.
11.12.2 The design of slab
a or footing for two-way action Forfml tensile and exceeding 0.9 prlfY
is based on Eq. (1 1- 1) and (1 1-2). V , shall be computed in
accordance with 11.12.2.1, 11.12.2.2, or 11.12.3.1. V, shall
becomputedinaccordancewith 11.12.3. For slabs with V,, = 0 . 5 R b ; h (1 1-39~)
shearheads, V,, shall be in accordance with 11.12.4. When
moment is transferred between aslab and a column, 1 1.12.6 Forfml compressive and not less than 125 psi, Vel shall be
shall apply. taken as V, computed in accordance with 11.12.2.2 except
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
 that inEq. (1 1-39)fmland b'l shall be used in place of fpc
and bo, respectively. For fmlcompressive and less than
125 psi, Vel shall be taken as V, computed in accordance
with 11.12.2.1 except that b'l shall be used in place of bw
11.12.23.2 For fmf tensileandnotexceeding
0.9 P; f y
V,, = (2 + 4 / ß , ) E b ; h(1 + 0.25fm,/p; f,) (ll-39d)
except thefactor (2 + 443,) shall notbe taken greater than4.
Forfm2 tensile and exceeding0.9 p'zfy
V,, = O . 5 E b ; h (1 1-39e)
For fm2 compressive and not less than 125 psi, Vc2 shall be
taken as V, computed in accordance with 11.12.2.2 except
that inEq.(1 1-39)fm2 andbi shall be used in place fpc
of and
bo. respectively. Forfm2 compressive and less than 125 psi,
Vc2 shall be takenas V, computed in accordancewith
11.12.2.1 exceptb i shall be used in place ofbe
11.12.2.3.3 When V,, does not exceed$Vc and fml is
G,
a tensile stress that exceeds0.6 p i then p; provided shall
not be less than
P; = fml/(0.9f,) + Vu/(0.85f,b; h) (ll-39fj
In addition, p shall be increased if required for any in-plane
shear force that exists, computed in accordance with 11.10.
11.12.2.3.4 When V, does not exceed$V, and fm2 is
a tensile stress that exceeds0.6 p i 4, then p i provided shall
not be less than
P; = fm2/(0.9f,) + V,/(O.SSf,b; h) (ll-39g)
In addition, p i shall be increased if required for anyin-plane
shear force that exists, computed in accordance with 11.10.
11.12.3 Shear reinforcement consisting of bars or wires
is permitted in slabs and footings in accordance with the
following:
11.123.1 V, shall be computed by Eq. (1 1-2), whereV,
shall not be taken greater than 2 R b o d , and the required
area of shear reinforcementA , and V, shall be calculatedin
accordance with 11.5 and anchored in accordance with 12.13.
11.123.2 V, shall notbe taken greater than6 R b o d .
11.12.4 Shear reinforcement consistingof steel I- or chan-
nel-shaped sections (shearheads) is permitted in slabs. The
provisions of 11.12.4.1 through 11.12.4.9 shall apply where
shear due to gravity load is transferred at interior column
supports.Wheremoment is transferred to columns,
11.12.6.3 shall apply.
11.12.4.1 Each shearhead shall consist of steel shapes
fabricated by welding witha full penetration weldinto iden-
tical arms at right angles. Shearheadarms shall not be inter-
rupted within the column section.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
11.12.43 A shearhead shall notbe deeper than70 times
the web thicknessof the steel shape.
11.12.43 The ends of each shearhead arm may be cutat
angles not lessthan 30 deg with the horizontal, provided the
plastic moment strengthof the remaining tapered sectionis
adequate to resist the shear force attributed toar m of the
that
shearhead.
11.12.4.4 All compression flangesof steel shapes shall
be located within0.3d of compression surface of slab.
11.12.4.5 The ratio or, between the stiffness of each
shearhead arm and that of the surrounding composite cracked
slab sectionof width (c2+ d) shall notbe less thanO.15.
11.12.4.6 The plastic moment strengthMp required for
each arm of the shearhead shallbe computed by
(1 1-40)
where $ is the strength reduction factor for flexure, q is the
number ofarms,and /y is the minimum length of each shear-
head arm required to comply with requirements of 11.12.4.7
and 11.12.4.8.
11.12.4.7 The critical slab section
for shear shall be per-
pendicular to the plane ofthe slab and shallcross each shear-
head arm at three-quarters the distance[/, - (c1 / 2)J from the
column face to the end ofthe shearhead arm.The critical sec-
tion shall be located so that its perimeterbo is a minimum,
butneednot be closer thantheperimeterdefmed in
11.12.1.2(a).
11.12.4.8 V, shall not be taken greaterthan 4 E b o d ,
on the critical section defined in 11.12.4.7. When shearhead
reinforcement is provided, V, shall notbe taken greaterthan
7 E b & on the critical section definedin 11.12.1.2(a).
11.12.4.9 A shearhead may be assumed to contribute a
moment resistance M, to each slab column strip computed
by
(1 1-41)
+
where is the strength reduction factor for flexure,q is the
number of arms, and 4 is the length of each shearheadarm
actually provided. However, M, shall not be taken larger
than the smaller of:
a) 30 percent of the total factoredmoment required for
each slab column strip,
b) the change in column strip moment over the length c
c) the value of 'Wp computed by Eq. (11-40)
11.12.4.10 When unbalanced moments are considered,
the shearhead must have adequate anchorage to transit'M to
column.
11.12S-Openings in slabs
When openings in slabs are located at a distance less than
10 times the slab thickness from
a concentrated loador reac-
tion area, or when openings in flat slabs are located within
column strips as defmed in Chapter 13, the critical slab sec-
 tions for shear defined in 11.12.1.2 and 11.12.4.7 shall be which crosses the potential plane of splitting
modified as follows: through the reinforcement being developed, in.2
11.12.5.1 For slabs without shearheads, that part of the A, = area of shear reinforcement within a distance s, in?
perimeter of the critical section that is enclosed by straight A, = area of an individual wire to be developed
lines projecting from the centroid of the column, concentrat- or spliced, in?
ed load, or reaction area and tangentto the boundaries ofthe b, = web width, or diameter of circular section, in.
openings shall be considered ineffective. c = spacing or coverdimension, in. See 12.2.4
11.12.5.2 For slabs with shearheads,the ineffectivepor- d = distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid
tion of the perimeter shall be one-half of that defined in of tension reinforcement, in.
11.12.5.1. db = nominal diameter of bar, wire, or prestressing
11.12.6-Tder of moment in slab-columnconnections strand, in.
11.12.6.1 When gravity load, wind, earthquake,or other f,' = specified compressive strength of concrete, psi
lateral forces cause transfer of unbalanced moment M, be-
tween a slab and a column, a fraction yf M, of the unbal- E=square root of specified compressive strength
anced moment shall be transferred by flexure in accordance of concrete, psi
with 13.3.3.This remainder ofthe unbalanced moment given fps = stress in prestressed reinforcement at nominal
by yv M, shall be consideredto be transferredby eccentricity strength, ksi
of shear about the centroid of the critical section defined in f,, = effective stress in prestressed reinforcement (after
11.12.1.2 where allowance for all prestress losses), ksi
fy = specifiedyield strength of nonprestressed
1 reinforcement,psi
y, = 1 - (11-42)
1+( 2 / 3 ) m 2 fyl = specified yield strength of transverse
reinforcement, psi
11.12.6.2 The shear stress resulting from momenttrans- h = overall thickness of member, in.
fer by eccentricity of shear shall be assumed to varylinearly Kt, = transverse reinforcement index
about the centroid of the critical sections definedin
1 1.12.1.2. The maximum shear stress due to the factored -
" Atrfyr
150Dsn
(constant 1500 carries the unit l b h ? )
shear force and moment shall not exceed0 v,: I/, = additional embedment length at support or at
For members without shear reinforcement
point of inflection, in.
.$ = development length, in.
= Idb x applicable modification factors
/db = basic development length, in.
where V , is as defined in 11.12.2.1 or 11.12.2.2. G, = development length of standard hook in tension,
For members with shear reinforcement other than shear- measured fromcritical section to outside end of
heads: hook (straight embedment length between critical
section and start of hook [point of tangency]plus
radius of bend and one bardiameter), in.
= Ihb x applicable modification factors
where V , and V, are defined in 11.12.3. If shear reinforce- 4b = basic development length of standard hook
ment is provided, the designshall take into account the vari- in tension, in.
ation of shear stress around the column. Mn = nominal moment strength at section, in.-lb
11.12.6.3 When shear reinforcement consisting of steel = As& (d - d 2 )
I- or channel-shaped sections (shearheads) is provided, the II = number of bars or wires being spliced or developed
sum of the shear stresses due to vertical load acting on the along the plane of splitting
critical section defined by 1 1.12.4.7 and
the shear stresses re- s = maximumspacingof transverse reinforcement
sultingfrommoment transferred by eccentricity of shear within 6 center-to-center,in.
about thecentroid of thecritical section defined in 1 1.12.1.2 s, = spacing of wire to be developed or spliced, in.
shall not exceed 4 4 E . V,, = factored shear force at section
a = reinforcement location factor. See 12.2.4.
Chapter 12-Development and Splices ß = coating factor. See 12.2.4.
of Reinforcement ßh = ratio of area of reinforcement cut off to total area
-
12.0 Notation of tension reinforcementat section
a = depth ofequivalent rectangular stress block as y = reinforcement size factor. See 12.2.4.
defined in 10.2.7.1
Ab = area of an individual bar, in.2
A , = area of nonprestressed tension reinforcement,in.'
12.1 -
Development of reinforcement: General
12.1.1 Calculated tension or compression in reinforcement
A,, = total cross-sectional area of all transverse at each section of structural concrete members shall be de-
reinforcement which is within the spacings and veloped on each side of that section by embedment length,
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
 ~~ ~

S T D * A C I 3Lt7-ENGL 1 7 7 7 0662749 0538100 287

STRUCTURES
SAFETY NUCLEAR CODE 349-45

hook or mechanical device,or a combinationthereof. Hooks However, the product of aß need not be taken greater
shall not be used to develop bars in compression. than 1.7.
12.1.2 The values of used in this chapter shall not ex- y = reinforcement size factor
ceed 100psi.
No. 6 and smaller bars and deformed wires..............0.8
12.2- Development of deformed bars and No. 7 and larger bars ................................................. 1.O
deformed wirein tension
12.2.1 Development length 4 , in terms of diameter db for c = spacing or coverdimension,in.
deformed bars and deformed wirein tension shall be deter-
Use the smaller of either the distance from the center of the
mined from either 12.2.2 or 12.2.3, but /d shall not be less
bar or wire to the nearest concretesurface or one-half the cen-
than 12 in.
ter-to-center spacing ofthe bars or wires being developed.
12.2.2 For deformed bars or deformed wire, (/a /db shall be
as follows: Kt, = transverse reinforcementindex
-
"
At, f yt
JO. 6 and smaller 1500sn
ws and deformed No. 7 and larger
wires bars where
Clear spacingof bars A, = total cross-sectional area of all transverse reinforce-
being developedor ment which is within the spacing s and whichcross-
spliced not less than
db clear cover not less es the potentialplane of splitting through the
than db and stirrups or reinforcement being developed, in.2
ties throughout/,not
less than the code fYt = specifiedyield strength of transverse reinforce-
minimum "=Y
'd aß ment, psi
db 2
5n
Of s = maximumspacing
of transverse reinforcement
Clear spacingof bars within& center-to-center,in.
being developed or
spliced notless than n numberof bars or wiresbeingdevelopedalong the
=
2db and clear cover plane ofsplitting
not less than db
It shall be permitted to use Kt, = O as a design simplifica-
tion even iftransverse reinforcement is present.
Other cases 12.2.5- Excess reinforcement
Reduction in development length shallbe permitted where
reinforcement in a flexural member is in excess of that re-
12.2.3 For deformed bars or deformed wire, 4 Idb quired by analysis except where anchorage or development
shall be: for4 is specifically requiredor the reinforcement is designed
under provisions of 21.2.1.4 .........(A, required)/(A, provided)
(12-1) 12.3-Development of deformed bars in
compression
12.3.1 Development length4, in inches, for deformed bars
in compression shallbe computed as the product of the basic
in which the term (c + Ktr)/db shall not be taken greater development length4 6 of 12.3.2 and applicable modification
than 2.5. factors of 12.3.3, but pd shall be not less than 8 in.
12.2.4 The factors for use in the expressions for devel- 12.3.2 "Basic development length
opment of deformed bars and deformed wires in tensionin pdbshall be ................................................... o.02dbfy/E
Chapter 12are as follows:
but notless than .............................................. 0.0003d6fyt
a = reinforcement location factor
123.3 Basic developmentlength /db shall be permitted to
Horizontal reinforcement so placed that be multiplied by applicable factors for:
more than 12in. of fresh concrete is cast 12.3.3.1-Excess reinforcement
in the member belowthe development
Reinforcement in excess of that required by analysis........
length or splice .......................................................... 1.3
................................................... (A, required)/(A, provided)
Other reinforcement.................................................. 1.0 -
12.3.3.2 Spirals and ties
ß = coating factor Reinforcement enclosed within spiral reinforcement not
less than V 4 in. diameter and not more than 4 in. pitch or with-
Epoxy-coated bars or wires with coverless
in No. 4 ties in conformance with 7.10.5 and spaced at not
than 3 4 , or clear spacingless than 6db.................... 1.5
more than4 in. on center ................................................ 0.75
All other epoxy-coated bars or wires ........................ 1.2
Uncoated reinforcement............................................ 1.O f The constant carriesthe unit of in?/lb

COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute

Licensed by Information Handling Services
 ~~ ~ ~- .~

S T D m A C I 349-ENGL 1997 0662749 0538101 113

349-46 AC1 STANDARD

12.4-Development of bundled bars velopment length4 , from 12.2.2 or 12.2.3 timesa wire fabric
12.4.1 Development length of individual bars within a factor from12.7.2 or 12.7.3.It shall bepermitted to reduce the
bundle, in tensionor compression, shall be thatfor the indi- development length in accordance with 12.2.5 when applica-
vidual bar, increased 20 percent for three-bar bundle, 33 and ble, but /d shall not be less than8 in. except in computation of
percent for four-bar bundle. lap splices by 12.18. When using the wire fabric factor fiom
12.4.2 For determining the appropriate factors in 12.2, a 12.7.2, it shall be permittedto use an epoxy-coating factor of P
unit of bundled bars shallbe treated as a single bar of a di- 1.0 for epoxy-coated welded wire fabric in 12.2.2 and 12.2.3.
ameter derived from the equivalent total area. 12.7.2 For welded deformed wirefabric with at least one
cross wire within the development length and not less than
12.5-Development of standard hooks in tension 2 in. from the point of the critical section, the wire
fabric fac-
12.5.1 Development length h,, in inches, for deformed tor shall be the greater of:
bars in tension terminatingin a standard hook (see 7.1) shall
be computed as the product of the basic developmentlength
t&f 12.5.2 and the applicable modification factor or factors
of 12.5.3, but/dn shall not beless than 8db nor less than6 in.
12.5.2-Basic development length or
tMfor a hooked barwith& equal to @,O00 psi shallbe ...
......................................................................... 12006b/. *
12.53 Basic development length h b shall be multiplied by
applicable factoror factors for:
-
12.53.1 Bar yield strength but need notbe taken greater than1.
Bars with4 other than60,OOO psi ...................... fy ~6o,O00 12.73 For welded deformed wire fabric with no cross
12.5.3.2-Concrete cover wires within the development length or with a single cross
For No. 11 bar and smaller, side cover (normal to plane of wire less than 2 in. from the pointof the criticalsection, the
hook) notless than 2l/, in., and for90deg hook, cover on bar wire fabric factor shall be taken as 1, and the development
extension beyond hook not less than 2 in. ...................... 0.7 length shall be determined as for deformed wire.
12.533 "Ties or stirrups 12.7.4 When any plain wiresare present in the deformed
For No. 11 bar and smaller, hook enclosed vertically or wire fabric in the direction of the development length, the
horizontally within ties or stimpties spaced along the full fabric shall be developed in accordance with 12.8.
development length /dh not greater than 3db, where db is di-
ameter of hooked bar....................................................... .0.8 12.8-Development of welded plain wire fabric in
tension
12.5.3.4 -Excess reinforcement
Yield strengthof welded plain wire fabric shall be consid-
Where anchorage or development forfp is not specifical-
ered developed by embedment of two cross wires with the
ly required, reinforcement in excess of that required by
closer cross wire notless than 2 in. from the pointof the crit-
analysis ................................... (A, required)/(A, provided) ical section. However, the development length 4 , in inches,
12.5.3.5 -Epoxy-coated reinforcement measured from the pointof the critical section to the outer-
Hooked bars with epoxy coating.................................. 1.2 most cross wire shall notbe less than
12.5.4 For bars being developed bya standard hook at dis-
continuous endsof members with both side cover and top (or
bottom) cover over hook less than 2V2in.,hooked bar shallbe
enclosed within ties or stirrup-ties spaced along the full devel-
2($10.27
opment length gdli not greater than 3db,where db is diameter
of hooked bar. For this case, factor of 12.5.3.3 shall not apply. except that when reinforcement provided is in excess of that
12.5.5 Hooks shall notbe considered effective in develop- required, this length may be reduced in accordance with
ing bars in compression. 12.2.5. pd shall notbe less than6 in. except in computation of
lap splices by 12.19.
12.6- Mechanical anchorage
12.6.1 Any mechanical device capable of developing the
12.9-Development of prestressing strand
strength of reinforcement without damage to concrete is al- 12.9.1 Three- or seven-wire pretensioning strand shall be
lowed as anchorage.
bonded beyond the critical section for
a development length,
12.6.2 Mechanical anchorages shall be designed in accor- in inches, not less than
dance with AppendixB-Steel Embedments.

12.7-Development of welded deformed wire

fabric in tension
12.7.1 Developmentlength pd , in inches, ofweldedde-
formed wire fabricmeasured from the point of critical section where db is strand diameter in inches, and
fps andLeare ex-
to the end of wire shallbe computed as the product of thede- pressed in kipdin.=

* Conscant carries unit of Ib/in.2 t Expression in parenthesis used as a constant without units

COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute

Licensed by Information Handling Services
 NUCLEAR SAFETY STRUCTURES CODE
12.9.2 Limiting the investigation to cross sectionsnear-
est each end of the member that are required to develop
full design strength under specified factored loads shall be
permitted.
12.9.3 Where bonding of a strand does not extend to end
of member, and design includes tension at service load in
precompressed tensile zone as permitted by 18.4.2, develop-
ment length specified in 12.9.1 shall be doubled.
12.1 &Development of flexural reinforcement:
General
12.10.1 Development of tension reinforcementby
bending across the web to be anchored or made continu-
ous with reinforcement on the opposite face of member
shall be permitted.
12.10.2 Critical sections for development of reinforce-
ment in flexuralmembers are at points of maximumstress
and at points within the span where adjacent reinforce-
ment terminates, oris bent. Provisions of 12.11.3 must be
satisfied.
12.103 Reinforcement shall extend beyond the point at
which it is no longer required to resist flexure for a distance
equal to the effective depth of member or 12db,whichever is
greater, exceptat supports of simple spans and at free end of at the section to be stressed to the specified yieldstrengthf,.
cantilevers.
12.10.4 Continuing reinforcement shall have an embed-
ment length not less than the development length4 beyond
the point where bent or terminated tension reinforcement is
no longer required to resist flexure.
12.10.5 Flexural reinforcement shall not be terminated
in a tension zone unless one of the following conditionsis
satisfied:
12.10.5.1 Shear at the cutoff point does not exceed two- permitted when the ends of reinforcement are confined by a
thirds that permitted, including shear strength of shear rein-
forcement provided.
12.10.5.2 Stirrup area in excess of that required for
shear and torsion is provided along each terminated bar or
wire over a distance from the termination point equal to
three-fourths the effective depth of member. Excess stir-
rup area A, shall be not less than60bwsvy.Spacing s shall
not exceedd/8ßbwhere ß b is the ratio of area of reinforce-
ment cut off to total area of tension reinforcement at the
section.
12.10.53 For No. 11 bar and smaller, continuing rein-
forcement provides double the area required for flexure at
the cutoff point andshear does not exceed three-fourths that
permitted.
12.10.6 Adequate anchorage shallbe provided for tension
reinforcement in flexural memberswherereinforcement
stress is not directly proportional to moment, suchas: sloped,
stepped, or tapered footings; brackets; deep flexural mem-
bers; or members in whichtension reinforcement is not par-
allel to compression face. See 12.11.4 and 12.12.4 for deep
flexural members.
12.11"Development of positive moment
reinforcement
12.11.1 At least one-third the positive moment reinforce-
ment in simple members and one-fourth the positive moment
COPYRIGHT American Concrete
S T DInstitute
- A C 1 349-ENGL
Licensed by Information Handling Services
L997 = Obb29LI9
34967
reinforcement in continuous membersshall extend alongthe
same face of member into the support. In beams, such rein-
forcement shall extend into the support at least 6 in.
12.11.2 When a flexural member is part of a primarylat-
eral load resisting system, positive moment reinforcement
required to be extended into the support by 12.1 1.1 shall be
anchored to develop the specified yield strengthf, in tension
at the face of support.
12.113 At simplesupportsand at points of inflection,pos-
itive moment tension reinforcement shallbe limited to a di-
ametersuchthat 4 computedfor fy by12.2 satisfies
Eq. (12-2); except, Eq. (12-2) need not be satisfied for rein-
forcement terminating beyondcenterline of simple supports
by a standard hook, or a mechanicalanchorage at least
equivalent to a standard hook.
(12-2)
where:
M,,is nominal moment strength assuming all reinforcement
V, is factored shear force at the section.
4 at a support shall be the embedment length beyondcenter
of support.
4 at a point of inflection shall be limited to the effective
depth of memberor Udb, whichever is greater.
An increase of 30 percent in the value of M,, /V,shall be
compressive reaction.
12.11.4 At simple supportsof deep flexural members,pos-
itive moment tension reinforcementshall be anchoredto de-
velop the specified yieldstrengthfy in tension at the face of
support. At interior supports of deepflexural members, pos-
itive moment tension reinforcement shall be continuous or
be spliced with that ofthe adjacent spans.
12.12- Development of negative moment
reinforcement
12.12.1 Negative moment reinforcement in a continuous,
restrained, or cantilever member,or in any member of a rigid
frame, shall be anchored inor through the supporting mem-
ber by embedment length, hooks,or mechanical anchorage.
12.12.2 Negative moment reinforcement shall have an em-
bedmentlengthinto the span as requiredby12.1and
12.10.3.
12.123 At least one-third the total tension reinforcement
provided fornegative moment at a support shall have an em-
bedment length beyondthe point of inflection not less than
effective depth of member, 12db, or one-sixteenth the clear
span, whichever is greater.
12.12.4At interior supports of deep flexural members,
negative moment tension reinforcement shallbe continuous
with that of the adjacent spans.
0538L02 05T =
 ~
S T D = A C I 349-ENGL 3997
34448 AC1 STANDARD
12.13-Development of web reinforcement
12.13.1 Web reinforcement shall be carried as close to
compression and tension surfaces of member as cover re-
quirements and proximity of other reinforcement will per-
mit.
12.13.2 Ends of single leg, simpleU-, or multiple U-stir-
rups shall be anchored by one of the following means:
12.13.2.1 For No. 5 bar and D31 wire, and smaller, and
for No. 6, No. 7, and No. 8 bars withf, of 4
O
0
,OO psi or less,
a standard hook around longitudinal reinforcement.
12.13.2.2 For No. 6, No. 7, and No. 8 stirrups with$,
greater than 40,000 psi,a standard stirrup hook around a lon-
gitudinal bar plusan embedment between midheight of the
member and the outside end ofthe hook equal to or greater
than 0.014dbf,,I R .
12.13.2.3For each leg of welded plainwire fabric form-
simple U-stirrups, either:
%o longitudinal wires spaced at a 2 in. spacing along
the member at the top ofthe U.
One longitudinal wire located not more thandl4 from
the compression face and a second wire closer to the
compression face and spaced not less than 2 in. from
the first wire. The second wire shall be permitted
to be
located on the stimp leg beyond a bend, or on a bend
with aninside diameter of bend not lessthan 8db
12.13.2.4 For each end ofa single legstirrup of welded
plain or deformed wire fabric, two longitudinal wires at a
minimum spacing of2 in. and with the inner wireleast at the
greater of d/4 or 2 in. from middepth of memberdn. Outer
longitudinal wire at tension face shallnot be farther from the
face than theportion of primary flexural reinforcementclos-
est to the face.
12.13.2.5 In joist construction as defined in 8.1 1, for
No. 4 bar and D20 wire and smaller, a standard hook.
12.133 Between anchored ends, each bend in thecontin-
uous portion of a simple U-stirrupor multiple U-stirrup shall
enclose a longitudinal bar.
12.13.4 Longitudinal bars bent to act as shear reinforce-
ment, if extended into a region of tension, shall becontinu-
ous with longitudinal reinforcement and,if extended into a
region of compression, shall be anchored beyond middepth
d /2 as specified for development length in 12.2 for that part
of& required to satisfy Eq. (1 1-19).
12.13.5 Pairs of U-stirrups or ties so placed as to form a
closed unit shall be considered properly spliced when length
of lapsarel.34. In membersat least 18 in. deep, such splices
withA,& not more than 9000 lb per leg shallbe considered
adequate if stirrup legs extend the full available depth of
member.
12.14-Splices of reinforcement: General
12.14.1 Splices of reinforcement shallbe made only as re-
quired or permitted on design drawings, or in specifications,
or as authorizedby the Engineer.
12.14.2-Lap splices
12.14.2.1 Lap splices shall not be used for bars larger
than No. 11 except as provided in 12.16.2 and 15.8.2.3.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
~~ ~~
0662949 0 5 3 8 3 0 3 T96 W
12.14.2.2 Lap splices of bars ina bundle shallbe based
on the lap splice length required for individual bars within
the bundle, increased in accordance with 12.4. Individual bar
splices within a bundle shall not overlap. Entire bundles shall
not be lap spliced.
12.14.2.3 Bars splicedby noncontact lap splices inflex-
ural members shall not be spaced transversely farther apart
than one-fifth the required lap splice length, 6nor in.
12.14SWelded splices and mechanical connections
12.143.1 Welded splices and other mechanicalCOM=-
tions are allowed.
12.14.3.2 Except as provided in this code, all welding
shall conform to “Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing
Steel” (ANSVAWS Dl .4).
12.143.3 A full welded splice shall develop least
at 125
percent of the specified yield strengthf,of the bar.
12.143.4 A full mechanical connection shall develop in
tension or compression, as required, at least 125 percent of
specified yieldstrengthf, of the bar.
12.143.4.1 Mechanical connections shall be quali-
fied for use in the construction on thebasis of the following
performance tests:
(a) Static Tensile Strength Tests-A minimum of six static
tensile strength tests shall be conducted consideringthe
range of variabilities in splicing material, material
in of
reinforcing bars and in the anticipated environmental
conditions. All test samples shall meetthe requirement
of 12.14.3.4.
(b) Cyclic Tests-Three specimens of the bar-to-bar con-
nection for each reinforcing bar size and grade shall
be subjected to 100 cycles of tensile stress variations
from 5 percent to 90 percent of the specified minimum
yield strength of the reinforcing bar. The specimens
shall withstand the cyclic test without loss of static
tensile strength capacity whencomparedwith like
specimen in (a) and tested statically to failure follow-
ing cyclic tests.
12.14.35 Welded splices and mechanical connections
not meeting requirements of 12.14.3.3 or 12.14.3.4 are al-
lowed onlyfor No. 5 bars and smaller and in accordance with
12.15.4.
12.143.6 All welded splices and mechanical connec-
tions shall be visually examined by a qualified and experi-
enced inspector to assure that they are properly installed at
the place of construction. Where itis deemed necessary, the
Engineer shallbe permitted to require the destructive tests of
production splices to assure the compliance with 12.14.3.3
and 12.14.3.4.
12.14.3.7 Mechanical connections shallbe staggered if
the strain measured over the full length of connection (at 0.9
yield) exceeds thatof a bar thatis not mechanicallyconnect-
ed by more than 50 percent and if the maximum computed
factored load stress thein bar equalsor exceeds 0.5f,.If stag-
gered mechanical connections are required, no more than
one-half of the barsshall be connected in one plane normal
to the bars and the mechanical connections shall be stag-
gered at least36 in.
 STD.AC1 349-ENGL 3 9 9 7
NUCLEAR SAFETY
CODESTRUCTURES
12.15-Splices of deformed bars and deformed
wire in tension
12.15.1 Minimum length of lap for tension lap splices
shall be as required for Class A or B splice, but notless than
12 in., where:
Class A splice ................................................................
Class B splice ................................................................
where /d is the tensile development length for the specified
yield strengthf, in accordance with12.2 without the modifi-
cation factor of 12.2.5.
12.15.2 Lap splices of deformed bars and deformed wire
in tensionshall be ClassB splices except that Class A splices
are allowed when: (a) the area of reinforcement providedis
at least twice thatrequired by analysis over the entire length
of the splice, and (b) one-half or less of the total reinforce
ment is spliced within the requiredlap length.
12.15.3 Welded splices or mechanical connections used
where area of reinforcement providedis less than twicethat
required by analysis shall meet requirements of 12.14.3.3 or
12.14.3.4.
12.15.4 Welded splices and mechanical connections not
meeting the requirements of 12.14.3.3 or 12.14.3.4 are al-
lowed for No. 5 bars and smaller when the area of reinforce-
ment providedis at least twice that required by analysis, and
the following requirementsare met:
12.15.4.1 Splices shall be staggered at least 24 in. and in
such manneras to develop at every section at least twice the
calculated tensile force at that section butnot less than
20,000 psi for total area of reinforcement provided.
12.15.4.2 In computingtensile forces developed at each
section, rate the spliced reinforcement at the specified splice
strength. Unspliced reinforcementshall be rated at that frac-
tion o f 4 defined by the ratio of the shorter actual develop-
ment length to 4 required to develop the specified yield
strength!, . 12.17.2.4 Intied reinforced compressionmembers,
12.15.5 Splices in “tension tie members” shall be made
with a full welded splice or full mechanical connectionin ac-
cordance with 12.14.3.3 or 12.14.3.4 and splices in adjacent
bars shall be staggered at least 30 in.
12.15.6 Welded splices or mechanical connections shall
be used for connectingtension resisting, but not crack-con-
trolling, reinforcing bars located in a region with membrane
tension normal to the welded splice or mechanical connec-
tion. The average strength of these welded splices or me-
chanical connections shall be equal to the minimumultimate
strength of the bar.
12.1 6-Splices of deformed bars in compression
12.16.1 Compression lap splice length shall be O.OOOSf,db,
for4 of 60O , OO psi or less, or (O.oooSf, - 24)dbfor4 greater
than 6 0 , O O O psi, but notless than 12 in. For!,‘ less than 3000
psi, length oflap shall be increased by one-third.
12.16.2 When bars of different size are lap spliced in com-
pression, splice length shall be the larger of development
length of larger bar, or splice length of smaller bar. Lap
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
W 0662999 0538304 922
349-49
splices of No. 14 andNo. 18 bars to No. 11 and smaller bars
shall be permitted.
12.163 Welded splices or mechanical connections used in
compression shall
meet
requirements of
12.14.3.3 or
12.14.3.4.
1.04 12.16.4-End-bearing splices
12.16.4.1 In bars required for compression only,
1.34
transmission of compressive stress by bearing of square
cut ends held in concentric contact by a suitable device
shall be permitted.
12.16.4.2 Bar endsshall terminate in flat surfaces within
11/* deg of a right angleto the axis of the bars and shall be
fitted within 3 deg offull bearing after assembly.
12.16.43 End-bearing splices shall be usedonlyin
members containingclosed ties, closed stirrups, or spirals.
12.17“~pecialsplice requirementsfor columns
12.17.1 Lap splices, butt welded splices, mechanical con-
nections, or end-bearing splices shall be used withthe limi-
tations of12.17.2through12.17.4. A splice shall satisfy
requirements for all load combinationsfor the column.
12.17.2-Lap splices in columns
12.17.2.1 Where the bar stress due to factored loads is
compressive, lap splices shall conform to 12.16.1, 12.16.2,
and, where applicable, to 12.17.2.4 or 12.17.2.5.
12.17.2.2 Where the bar stress due to factored loads is
tensile and does not exceed 0.54 in tension,lap splices shall
be Class B tension lap splices if more than one-half of the
bars are spliced at anysection, or Class A tension lap splices
if half or fewer of the bars are spliced at any section and al-
(,
ternate lap splices are staggered by .
12.17.2.3 Where the bar stress due to factored loads is
greater than 0.5fY in tension, lap splices shall be Class B
tension lap splices.
where ties throughoutthe lap splice length have an effective
area not less than 0.0015hs, lap splice length shall be permit-
ted to be multiplied by 0.83, but lap length shall not be less
than 12 in. Tie legs perpendicular to dimension h shall be
used in determining effective area.
12.17.2.5 In spirally reinforced compression members,
lap splice length of bars within a spiral shall be permitted
to be multiplied by 0.75, but lap length shall not be less
than 12 in.
12.173-Welded splices or mechanical connectors in
columns
Welded splicesor mechanical connectors in columns shall
meet the requirements of 12.14.3.3 or 12.14.3.4.
12.17.4-End-bearing splices in columns
End-bearing splices complying with 12.16.4shall be per-
mitted to be used for column bars stressed in compression
provided the splices are staggered or additional bars are pro-
vided at splice locations. The continuing bars in eachface of
the column shall have atensile strength, based on the speci-
fied yield strength&, not less than 0.254 times the area of
the vertical reinforcementin that face.
 349-50 AC1 STANDARD
12.18-Splices of welded deformed wire fabric in
tension
12.18.1 Minimum length of lap for lap splices of welded
deformed wire fabric measured between the ends of each
fabric sheet shall be not less than 1.34 nor 8 in., and the
overlap measured between outermost cross wires of each
fabric sheet shall benot less than 2 in. 4 shall be the devel-
opment length for the specified yield strength4 in accor-
dance with 12.7.
12.18.2 Lap splices of welded deformed wirefabric, with
no cross wires within the lap splice length, shall be deter-
mined as for deformed wire.
12.183 When any plain wires are present the in deformed
wire fabric in the direction of the lap splice or when de-
formed wirefabric is lap splicedto plain wirefabric, the fab-
ric shallbe lap spliced in accordance with 12.19.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete
S T D -Institute
A C 1 349-ENGL
Licensed by Information Handling Services
L997 m Obb2949 0538105 8 b 9
12.19-Splices of welded plain wire fabric in
tension
Minimum length of lap for lap splices of welded plain wire
fabric shallbe in accordance with the following.
12.19.1 When area of reinforcement providedis less than
twice that required by analysis at splice location, length of
overlap measured between outermost cross wires of each
fabric sheet shallbe not less than one spacingof cross wires
plus 2 in., nor less than1.5 4 , nor 6 in. /a shall be the devel-
opment length for the specified yield strengthf’ in accor-
dance with 12.8.
12.19.2 When area of reinforcement provided is at least
twice that required by analysis at splice location, length of
overlap measured between outermost cross wires of each
fabric sheet shall be not less than 1.5 4, nor 2 in. 4 shall be
the developmentlength for the specified yield strength& in
accordance with12.8.
m
 STD.ACI 349-ENGL L997
NUCLEAR SAFETY STRUCTURESCODE
PART 5-STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS OR ELEMENTS
Chapter13-Two-waySlabSystems
13.O-Notation
el = size of rectangular or equivalentrectangular column,
capital, or bracket measured in the direction of the
span for which moments are being determined,in.
e2 = size of rectangularor equivalentrectangular column,
capital, or bracket measured transverse to the
direction of the spanfor which moments are
being determined, in.
C = cross-sectional constant to define torsional
properties. See Eq. (13-7)
Ecb = modulus of elasticity of beam concrete
E , = modulus of elasticity of slab concreteEng
h = overall thickness ofmember,in.
Zb = moment of inertia about centroidal axis of gross
section of beamas defined in 13.2.4.
Z, = moment of inertia about centroidal axis of gross
section of slab
= h3/ 12 times width ofslab defined in notations
a and B,
Kb = flexural stiffness of beam; moment per unit rotation
Kc = flexural stiffness of column; moment per unit
rotation
Ks = flexural stiffness of slab; moment per unit rotation
Kt = torsional stiffness of torsional member; moment per
unit rotation
= length of clear span in direction that moments are
being determined, measuredface-to-face of supports
4 = length of span in direction that moments are being
determined, measuredcenter-to-center of supports
4.
4 = length of span transverse to measured center-to-
center of supports. See also 13.6.2.3 and 13.6.2.4.
M, = total factored static moment
Mu = factored moment at section
Wd = factored dead load per unit area
W / = factored live load per unit area
W , = factored load per unit area
x = shorter overall dimension of rectangular part of
cross section
y = longer overall dimension of rectangularpart of cross
section
a = ratio of flexural stiffness of beam section to flexural
stiffness of a width ofslab bounded laterally by
centerlines of adjacent panels (if any)on each
side of the beam
- W b above or below theslab, whichever isgreater, but notgreater
E,$,
a, = ratio of flexural stiffness of columns above and
below the slab to combinedflexural stiffness ofthe
slabs and beams at a joint taken in the direction of
the span for which moments are being determined
-
- CK,
C(K,+ K b )
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
m 0662747 0538LOb 7T5 m
349-51
U= minimum a,to satisfy 13.6.10(a)
al = a indirectionof/l
a2 = a in direction of 4
B, = ratio of dead load per unit area to live load per unit
area (in eachcase without load factors)
ßt = ratio of torsional stiffness of edge beam section to
flexural stiffness of a width ofslab equal to span
length of beam, center-to-center of supports
-
”
2EJS
y~ = fraction of unbalanced moment transferred by
flexure at slab-column connections. See 13.3.3.2.
6, = factor definedby Fq. (13-5). See 13.6.10.
13.1“Scope
13.1.1 Provisions of Chapter 13 shall apply for design of
slab systems reinforced for flexure in more than one direc-
tion with or without beams between supports.
13.1.2 A slab system may be supported on columns or
walls. If supported by columns, the dimensions el and c2
and the clear span /n shall be based on an effective support
area defined by theintersection of the bottom surface of the
slab, or of the drop panel if there is one, with the largest
right circular cone, right pyramid or tapered wedge whose
surfaces are located within the column andcapital or brack-
et and are oriented no greater than 45 degto the axis of the
column.
13.13 Solid slabs and slabs with recesses or pockets made
by permanent or removable fillers between ribs or joists in
two directions are included withinthe scope of Chapter13.
13.1.4 Minimum thickness of slabs designed in accor-
dance with Chapter13 shall be as required by 9.5.3.
13.2-Definitions
13.2.1 Column strip is a design strip with a width on each
side of a columncenterline equal to 0.254 or 0.254, which-
ever is less. Column strip includes beams, if any.
13.2.2 Middle strip is a design strip bounded by two col-
umn strips.
13.2.3 A panel is bounded by column, beam,or wall cen-
terlines on all sides.
13.2.4 For monolithic or fully composite construction, a
beam includes that portion of slab on each side of the beam
extending a distance equal to the projection of the beam
than 4 times theslab thickness.
13.3-Designprocedures
133.1 A slab system may be designed by any procedure
satisfying conditions of equilibrium and geometric compati-
bility if shown thatthe design strength at every section is at
least equal to the required strength considering 9.2 and 9.3
and that all serviceability conditions, including specified
limits on deflections, are met.
 S T D D A C I 349-ENGL L997
349-52 AC1 STANDARD
13.3.1.1 For gravity loads, a slab system, including the
slab and beams (if any) between supports and supporting
columns or walls forming orthogonal frames, may be de-
signed by either the Direct Design Method of 13.6 or the
Equivalent Frame Method of 13.7.
13.3.1.2 For lateral loads, analysis of unbraced frames
shall take into account effects of cracking and reinforcement
on stiffness of frame members.
133.1.3 Results of the gravity load analysis may be
combined with results onthe lateral load analysis.
13.3.2 The slab and beams (if any) between supports shall
be proportioned for factored moments prevailing at every
section.
133.3 When gravity load, wind, earthquake, or other lat-
eral forces cause transfer of moment between slab and col-
umn,a fraction of the unbalanced moment shall be
transferredby flexure inaccordancewith13.3.3.2and
13.3.3.3.
13.3.3.1 Fraction of unbalanced moment not transferred
by flexure shall be transferred by eccentricity of shear in ac-
cordance with 11.12.6.
133.3.2 A fraction of the unbalanced moment givenby
yjMU shall be consideredto be transferred by flexure within
an effective slab width between lines that are one and one-
half slab or drop panel thicknesses (1.5h ) outside opposite
faces of the column or capital, where M,,is the moment to be
transferred and
1 center line of support a distance not less than one-sixth the
Yf = (13-1)
1 +),J= c2 +
cl +d
133.33 Concentration of reinforcement over the col-
umn by closer spacing or additional reinforcement shall be
used to resist moment on the effective slab width defined in
13.3.3.2.
133.4 Design for transfer of load fromslab to supporting
columns or walls through shear and torsion shall be in accor-
dance with Chapter 11.
13.4-Slab reinforcernent
13.4.1 Area of reinforcement in each direction for two-
way slab systems shall be determined from moments at crit-
ical sections but shall not be less than required by 7.12.
13.4.2 Spacing of reinforcement at critical sections shall
not exceed two times the slab thickness, except for portions
of slab area that may be of cellular or ribbed construction.In
the slab over cellular spaces, reinforcement shall be provided
as required by 7.12.
13.43 Positive moment reinforcement perpendicular to a
discontinuousedge shall extendto the edge ofslab and have
embedment, straight or hooked, at least 6in.in spandrel
beams, columns,or walls.
13.4.4 Negative moment reinforcement perpendicularto a
discontinuous edge shall be bent, hooked, or otherwise an-
chored, in spandrel beams, columns, or walls, to be devel-
oped at face of support according to provisions of
Chapter 12.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
Ohhi2949 0538107 b3L W
13.4.5 Where a slab is not supportedby a spandrel beam
or wall at a discontinuous edge, or where a slab cantilevers
beyond the support, anchorageofreinforcementmay be
within the slab.
13.4.6 In slabs with beams betweensupports with a value
of a greater than 1.0, special top and bottom slab reinforce-
ment shall be providedat exterior corners in accordance with
the following:
13.4.6.1 The special reinforcement inboth top and bot-
tom of slab shall be sufficient to resist a moment equal to
the maximum positive moment (per foot of width) in the
slab.
13.4.6.2 Direction of moment shall be assumedparallel
to the diagonal fromthe comer inthe top of the slab and per-
pendicular to the diagonal in the bottom of the slab.
13.4.63 The special reinforcement shall be providedfor
a distance in each direction from the comer equal to one-fifth
the longer span.
13.4.6.4 In either the top or bottom of the slab, the spe-
cial reinforcement may be placedin a single band in the di-
rection of the moment or in two bands parallel to the sides of
the slab.
13.4.7 Where a drop panel is used to reduce amount of
negative moment reinforcement over the column of a flat
slab, size of drop panel shall be in accordance with the
following.
13.4.7.1 Drop panelshall extend in each direction from
span length measured from center-to-center of supports in
that direction.
13.4.7.2 Projectionof drop panel below the slab shall be
at least one-quarter the slab thickness beyond the drop.
13.4.7.3 In computing required slab reinforcement,
thickness of drop panel below theslab shall not be assumed
greater than the distance from edge of drop panel to edge
of columnor column capital.
13.4.8-htails of reinforcement in slabs without beams
13.4.8.1 In addition to the other requirements of 13.4,
reinforcement in slabs without beams shall have minimum
bend point locations and extensionsfor reinforcement as pre-
scribed in Fig. 13.4.8.
13.4.8.2 Where adjacent spans are unequal, extensionof
negative reinforcement beyond the face of support as pre-
scribed in Fig. 13.4.8 shall be based on requirements of the
longer span.
13.4.83 Bent bars may be used only when depth-span
ratio permits useof bends 45 degor less.
13.4.8.4 For slabs in frames not braced against side-
sway and for slabs resisting lateral loads, lengths of rein-
forcement shall be determined by analysis but shall not be
less than those prescribed in Fig. 13.4.8.
13.4.8.5 At least two of the columnstrip bottom bars or
wires in each direction shall be continuous or spliced at the
support with Class A splices or anchored within support.
These bars shall pass through the column and shall be placed
within the column core.
 S T D - A C 1 349-ENGL L997 0662947 0538L08 578 W

F
NUCLEAR SAFETY STRUCTURESCODE 34863

WITHOUT DROP PANELS WITH DROP PANELS

2j AT SECTION

o. 50
e
Remainder

5 50
e
I-
O
m Remainder

50
*v,
œ
L
E
Remainder
a
m
I-
z
W
m
1
l
i-

Remainder

v)
[L
U
m
I too
c
I
c3
U 50
œ t-
c t-
v) O
m Remainder
-
* n-
O
1 50
CI)
[L
a
m
I-
1 Remainder
I"
z
W
m 50
k
ò

3i -/,>li
Remainder

k/ k-- Clear
support
span"Pn-
Face of
k e a ' span
Face of support
+"enter to center span-P+Center to center span-1.-4
support
Exterior gsupport
Exterior
support
Interior $
( N o slob continuity)
(Continuity provided) (No slab continuity)

* Bent bars at exterior supports I BAR LENGTH FROM FACE OF SUPPORT

MINIMUM
LENGTH IMAXIMUM
LENGTH
may be used if a general
analysls IS made

I
l Fig. 13.4.8-Minimum bend point locations and extensionsfor reinforcementin slabs without beams
(See 12.11.1 for reinforcement extension intosupports)
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
 13.5"0penings in slab systems
13.5.1 Openings of any size may be providedin slab sys-
tems if shown by analysis that the design strength is at least
equal to the required strength considering 9.2 and 9.3, and
that allserviceabilityconditions, including the specified lim-
its on deflections, are met.
13.5.2 In lieu of special analysis as required by 13.5.1,
openings may be provided in slab systems without beams
only in accordance with the following.
13.5.2.1 Openings of anysize may be located in the area
common to intersecting middle strips, provided total amount
of reinforcement requiredfor the panel withoutthe opening
is maintained.
13.5.2.2 In the area common to intersecting column
strips, not more than one-eighth the width of column strip in
either span shall be interrupted by openings. An amount of
reinforcement equivalent to that interrupted by an opening
shall be added onthe sides of the opening.
13.5.23 In the area common to one column strip and
one middle strip, not more than one-quarter the reinforce-
mentin either strip shall be interrupted by openings. An
amount of reinforcement equivalent to that intempted by an
opening shall be added onthe sides of the opening.
135.2.4 Shear requirementsof 1 1.12.5 shall satisfied.
be
13.6-Direct design method
13.6.1-Limitations
Slab systems withinthe following limitations may be de-
signed bythe Direct Design Method.
13.6.1.1 There shall be a minimum of three continuous
spans in each direction.
13.6.1.2 Panels shall be rectangular with aratio of long-
er to shorter span center-to-center ofsupports within a panel
not greater than 2.
13.6.1.3 Successivespanlengths center-to-center of
supports in each direction shall not differ by more than one-
13.6.2-Total factored static moment for a span
13.6.2.1 Total factored static moment for a spanshall be
determined in a strip bounded laterally by center line of pan-
el oneach side of centerline of supports.
13.6.2.2 Absolute sum of positive and averagenegative
factored moments in each direction shall not be less than
(13-3)
13.6.23 Where the transverse span of panels on either
side of thecenterline of supports varies, /2 in Eq. (13-3) shall
be takenas the average of adjacent transverse spans,
13.6.2.4 When the span adjacent and parallel to an edge
is being considered, the distance from edge to panel center-
line shall be substituted for 4 in Eq. (13-3).
13.62.5 Clear span 4 shall extend from face to face of
columns, capitals, brackets, or walls. Value of 4 used in
Q. (13-3) shall not be less than 0.654.
Circular or regular polygon shapedsupportsshall be treat-
ed as square supports with the same area.
13.6.3-Negative and positive factored moments
13.63.1 Negative factored moments shall be located at
face of rectangular supports. Circular or regular polygon
shaped supports shall be treated as square supports with the
same area.
13.63.2 In an interior span, total static moment M , shall
be distributed as follows:
Negative factored moment .......................................... 0.65
Positive factored moment ........................................... 0.35
13.63.3 In an endspan, total factored static moment M,
shall be distributed as follows:
(1) (2) (3) 1 (4) (5)
I I 1-1
Slab without beams
between interior
...:L

third the longer span. Exterior "

E :
?
edge unre- betweenall Without With edge edefully
Exterior

13.6.1.4 Columns may beoffset a maximum of10 per- strained s u m r t s edpe beam' restralned

cent of the span (in direction of offset) from either axis be-
tween centerlines of successive columns.
Interior
neaati
fasored
I I I I I
moment 0.75 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.65
13.6.1.5 All loads shall be due to gravity only and uni- Positive
formly distributed over an entire panel. Live load shall not factored
moment I 0.63 I 0.57 I 0.52 I 0.50 I 0.35
exceed three times dead load.

1 1 1 1 1
Exterior
13.6.1.6 For a panel with beams between supports on negative
factored
all sides, the relative stiffness of beams in two perpendicular moment O 0.16 0.26 0.30 ' 0.65
directions * See 13.6.3.6

13.63.4 Negative momentsections shall be designed to

(13-2)
shall not be less than 0.2 nor greater than5.0.
13.6.1.7 Momentredistribution as permitted by 8.4
shall not be applied for slab systems designed by the Direct
Design Method. S e e 13.6.7.
13.6.1.8 Variations from the limitations of 13.6.1 may
be considered acceptable if demonstrated by analysis that re-
quirements of 13.3.1 are satisfied.
resist the larger of the two interior negative factored mo-
ments determinedfor spans framing into a common support
unless an analysis is made to distribute the unbalanced mo-
ment in accordance withstiffnesses of adjoining elements.
13.63.5 Edge beams or edges of slab shall be propor-
tioned to resist in
torsion their share of exterior negative fac-
tored moments.
13.63.6 For moment transfer between slab and an edge
column in accordance with 13.3.3.1, column strip nominal
moment strength provided shall be used as the transfer mo-
ment for gravity load.

COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute

Licensed by Information Handling Services
 S T D - A C 1 349-ENGL L997 0662949 0538LLO 126
NUCLEAR SAFETY STRUCTURES CODE
= 34955

13.6.4-Factored moments in column strips 13.6.L-Factored momentsin middle strips

13.6.4.1 Column strips shall be proportioned to resist 13.6.6.1 That portion ofnegative and positive factored
the following portions in percent of interior negative fac- moments not resisted by column strips shall be proportion-
tored moments: ately assigned to corresponding half middle strips.
13.6.6.2 Each middlestrip shall be proportioned to resist
0.5 1.o 2.0 the sum of the moments assigned to its two half middle
(al444 = 0 75 75 75 strips.
(a&/l) L 1 .o 90 75 45 13.6.6.3 A middle strip adjacent to and parallel withan
edge supportedby a wallshall be proportioned to resist twice
Linear interpolations shall be madebetween values the moment assigned to the half middle strip corresponding
shown. to the first row of interior supports.
13.6.4.2 Column strips shall be proportioned to resist 13.6.7-Modification of factored moments
the following portions in percent of exterior negative fac- Negative and positivefactored moments may be modified
tored moments: by 10 percent provided the total static moment for a panel in
the direction considered is not less than that required by
1.o E q . (13-3).
44 0.5 2.0
(a144 = 0 ßt= o 100 1O0 100 13.6.0Factored shear in slab systems with beams
ß t 2 2.5 75 75 75 13.6.8.1 Beams with (ial/z//l)equal to or greater than
1.0 shall be proportioned to resist shear caused by factored
(al+/4)z 1.O ßt =0 100 1O0 100 loads ontributary areas bounded by45 deg lines drawn from
ß, 2 2.5 90 75 45 the comers of the panels andthe centerlines of the adjacent
panels parallel to the long sides.
13.6.8.2 Beams with (al/z//l) less than 1.0 maybe pro-
Linear interpolations shall be madebetween values
portioned to resist shear obtained by linear interpolation, as-
shown.
suming beams carry no load at a = O.
13.6.4.3 Where supports consist of columns or walls
13.6.8.3 In addition to shears calculated according to
extending for a distance equal to or greater than three-quar-
13.6.8.1 and 13.6.8.2, beams shall be proportioned to resist
ters the span length /z used to compute M,,negative mo-
shears caused by factored loads applied directly on beams.
ments shall be considered to be uniformly distributed
across 4. 13.6.8.4 Slab shearstrength may be computed on theas-
sumption that load isdistributed to supporting beams in ac-
13.6.4.4 Column strips shall be proportioned to resist
cordance with 13.6.8.1 or 13.6.8.2. Resistance to total shear
the following portions in percent of positive factored mo-
occurring on a panel shallbe provided.
ments:
13.6.8.5 Shear strength shall satisfy requirementsof
Chapter 11.
@fi 0.5 1.o 2.0
13.6.!l-Factored moments incolumns and walls
(a1441 = 0 60 60 60 13.6.9.1 Columns and walls built integrally with a slab
(all&)5 1.O 90 75 45 system shall resist moments caused byfactored loads on the
slab system.
Linear interpolations shall be madebetweenvalues 13.6.9.2 At an interior support, supportingelements
shown. above and below the slab shall resist the moment specified
13.6.4.5 For slabs with beams between supports, the by Eq. (13-4) in direct proportion to their stiffnesses unless
slab portion of columnstrips shall be proportionedto resist a general analysis is made.
that portion ofcolumn strip momentsnot resisted by
beams. M = 0.07[(wd+O.5w,)t2t,2 -~2!>(!;)~] (13-4)
13.6.5-Factored moments in beams
13.6.5.1 Beams between supports shall be proportioned
to resist 85 percent of column strip moments if (alh/tl)is
where w'd. !i ,and A! refer to shorter span.
equal to or greater than 1.O.
13.6.10-Provisions for effects of pattern loadings
Where ratiofi, of dead loadto live load is less than2, one
13.6.5.2 For values of ( C X I ~ / ! between
~) 1.0 and zero,
proportionofcolumn strip moments resisted by beams of the followingconditions shall be satisfied:
shall be obtained by linear interpolation between 85 and Sum of flexural stiffnesses of the columns above and
zero percent. below the slab shall be such thatacis not less thanad,,
13.6.5.3 In addition to moments calculated for uniform specified in Table 13.6.10.
loads according to 13.6.2.2, 13.6.5.1, and 13.6.5.2, beams If a, for the columns above and belowthe slab is less
shall be proportioned to resist all moments caused by con- thanspecified
in
Table
13.6.10,
positive factored
centrated or linear loads applied directly to beams, includ- moments in panels supported by such columnsshall be
ing weight of projecting beam stem above or below the multiplied by the coefficient 6, determinedfrom
slab. m. (13-5).
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
 S T D a A C I 349-ENGL I1997 W 0662749 0538111 Ob2 W
3
445
6 AC1 STANDARD

Table 13.6.1 &Values of amln 13.72.6 Where slab-beams are analyzed separately, it
may be assumed in determining moment at a given support
Aspect Relative beam stiffness, a
ratio that the slab-beam is fixed at any supporttwo panels distant
ßa I
O 0.5 1.o 2.0 I
4.0 therefrom, provided the slab continues beyond that point.
13.7.3-Slab-beams
13.73.1 Moment of inertia of slab-beams at any cross
section outside of joints or column capitals may be based on
1.0 1.0 1 0.7 I 0.1 I O I O I O the gross area of concrete.
1.25 I 0.6 I 0.4 I O 1 O I O 13.73.2 Variation in moment of inertia along axis of

1
L
slab-beams shall be takeninto account.
13.733 Moment of inertia of slab-beams from center of
column to face of column, bracket, or capital shallbe assumed
0.5 equal to the moment ofinertia of the slab-beam at face of col-
1.25 1.9 0.5 umn, bracket, or capital divided by the quantity(1 - c2 / 4)'
2.0 4.9 1.6 0.8 0.3 where c, and 4 are measured transverseto the direction ofthe
0.5 I
1.8 I 0.5 I 0.1 1 O I O span for which moments are being determined.
0.8 I 2.0 I 0.9 1 0.3 1 O 1 O 13.7.Aolumns
0.33 1.O 1
2.3 1 0.9 I 0.4 I O I O 13.7.4.1 Moment ofinertia of columns at any cross sec-
1.25 I 2.8 I 1.5 1 0.8 I 0.2 I O
tion outside of joints or column capitals may be based on the
1 2.0 I
13.0 I 2.6 I
~~

1.2 1 0.5 I 0.3 gross area of concrete.

13.7.4.2 Variation in moment of inertia along axis of
columns shall be taken into account.
6, = 1+-" ( 1 - E ) 13.7.43 Moment ofinertia of columns fromtop to bot-
(13-5)
4+ P, tom ofthe slab-beam at a joint shall be assumed infinite.
13.7.5-Torsional members
where ßa is ratio of dead load to live load, per unit area (in 13.75.1 Torsionalmembers (13.7.2.3) shall be as-
each case without loadfactors). sumed to havea constant cross section throughout their
length consisting of the larger of
13.7-Equivalent frame method a) A portion of slab having a width equal to that of the
13.7.1 Design of slab systems by the Equivalent Frame column, bracket, or capital in the direction of the span
Method shall bebasedonassumptionsgivenin13.7.2 for which momentsare being determined
through13.7.6,and all sections of slabs and supporting b) For monolithicor fully composite construction, the por-
members shall be proportionedfor moments andshears thus tion of slab specified in (a) plus that part of the trans-
obtained. verse beam above and belowthe slab.
13.7.1.1 Where metal columncapitals are used, account c) Transverse beam as defined in 13.2.4.
may be taken of their contributionsto stiffnessand resistance
to moment and to shear.
13.7.1.2 Change in length of columns and slabs due to
direct stress, anddeflectionsdue to shear, maybe neglected.
I 13.75.2 Stiffness Kt of an attached torsional member
shall be calculatedby the following expression:

13.7.2-Equivalent frame (13-6)

13.7.2.1 The structure shall be consideredto be made up
of equivalent frames on column lines taken longitudinally
and transversely throughthe building.
13.7.2.2 Each frame shall consist of a row of columns where c2 and fZ relate to the transverse spans on eachside of
or supports and slab-beam strips, bounded laterally by the column.
centerline of panelon each side of the centerline of columns 13.7.5.3 The constant C in Eq. (13-6) may be evaluated
or supports. for the cross section by dividing it into separate rectangular
13.7.2.3 Columns or supports shall be assumed to be at- parts and carrying out the following summation:
tached to slab-beam strips bytorsionalmembers(13.7.5)
transverse to the direction of the span for which momentsare
being determined and extending to bounding lateral panel
centerlines on eachside of a column.
C = c( 3
1 -0.63-)x x y
Y 3
( 13-7)

13.7.2.4 Frames adjacent and parallelto an edgeshall be

bounded by that edge andthe centerline of adjacent panel. 13.7.5.4 Where beams frameinto columns inthe direc-
13.7.2.5 Each equivalent frame may be analyzed in its tion of the span for which moments are being determined,
entirety, or for gravity loading, each floor andthe roof (slab- value of Kt as computed by Eq. (13-6) shall be multiplied by
beams) may be analyzed separately with far ends of columns the ratio of momentof inertia of slab with such beamto mo-
considered fixed. ment of inertia of slab without such beam.

COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute

Licensed by Information Handling Services
 S T D - A C 1 347-ENGL L777
STRUCTURES
SAFETY NUCLEAR
13.7.6-Arrangement of live load
13.7.6.1 When loading pattern is known,the equivalent
frame shall be analyzed for that load.
13.7.6.2 When live load is variable but does not exceed
three-quartersthe dead load,or the nature of live load is such
that allpanels will be loadedsimultaneously,maximum fac-
tored moments may be assumedto occur at all sections with
full factored live load onentire slab system.
13.7.6.3 For loading conditions other than those defined
in 13.7.6.2, maximum positive factored moment near mid-
span of a panel may be assumed to occur withthree-quarters
the full factored live load on the panel and onalternate pan-
els; and maximum negativefactored moment inthe slab at a
support may be assumed to occur withthree-quartersthe full
live load onadjacent panels only.
13.7.6.4 Factored moments shall be taken not less than
those occurring with full factoredlive load on all panels.
13.7.7-Factored moments
13.7.7.1 At interior supports, critical section for nega-
tive factored moment (in both column and middle strips)
shall be taken at face of rectilinear supports, but not greater
than O. 1754 from center of a column.
13.7.7.2 At exterior supports provided with brackets or
capitals, critical section for negative factored moment in the
span perpendicular to an edge shall be taken at a distance h m
face of supporting element not greater than one-halfthe projec-
tion of bracket or capital beyondface of supporting element.
13.7.73 Circular or regular polygon shaped supports
shall be treated as square supports with the same area for lo-
cation of critical section for negative design moment.
13.7.7.4 Slab systems within limitations of 13.6.1, when
analyzed by the Equivalent Frame Method, may have result-
ing computed moments reduced in such proportion that the c)
solute sum ofthe positive and average negative moments used
in design need not exceed the value obtained Eq. from
(13-3).
13.7.7.5 Moments at critical sections across the slab-
beam strip of each framemay bedistributed to column strips,
beams, and middle strips as provided in 13.6.4, 13.6.5, and
13.6.6 if the requirement of 13.6.1.6 is satisfied.
Chapter 14-Walls
14.0-Notation
A, = gross area of section, sq. in.
f' = specified compressivestrength of concrete, psi
h = overall thickness of member,in.
k = effective length factor
r , = vertical distance between supports, in.
p n w = nominal axial load strength of wall designedby 14.4
$ = strength reduction factor. See 9.3.
14.1-SCO~
14.1.1 Provisions of Chapter 14 shall apply for design of
walls subjected to axial load, withor without flexure.
14.1.2 Cantilever retaining walls are designed in accor-
dance withthe flexural design provisions of Chapter 10. The
minimum horizontal reinforcement shall be in accordance
with 14.3.3but shall not be less than that required by 7.12.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
Ob62949 0538112 T T 7
CODE 349-57
14.2-General
14.2.1 Walls shallbe designed for eccentric loads and any
lateral or other loads to which they are subjected.
14.2.2 Walls subject to axial loads shall be designed in ac-
cordance with 14.2, 14.3, andeither 14.4 or 14.5.
14.2.3 Design for shear shall be in accordance with 1 1.10.
14.2.4 Unless demonstrated by a detailed analysis, hori-
zontal length of wall to be considered as effective for each
concentratedload shall notexceed center-to-center dis-
tance between loads, nor width of bearing plus 4 times the
wall thickness.
14.2.5 Compression members built integrally with walls
shall conformto 10.8.2.
14.2.6 Walls shall be anchored to intersecting elements
such as floors, roofs, or to columns, pilasters, buttresses, and
intersecting walls, and footings.
14.2.7 Limitsof thickness required by14.5may be
waived where structural analysis shows adequate strength
and stability.
14.2.8 Transfer of force to footing atbase of wall shall be
in accordance with 15.8.
14.3-Minimum reinforcement
143.1 Minimum vertical andhorizontalreinforcement
shall be in accordance with 14.3.2 and 14.3.3 unless greater
a
amount is required for shear by 11.10.8 and 11.10.9.
143.2 Minimum ratio of vertical reinforcement area to
gross concrete area shall be:
a) 0.0012 for deformed bars not larger than No. 5 with
specified yieldstrength not less than 60,000psi, or
b) 0.0015 for other deformed bars, or
ab- 0.0012 for welded wire fabric (plain or deformed) not
larger than W3 or 1 D31.
143.3 Minimum ratio of horizontal reinforcement area to
gross concrete area shall be:
a) 0.0020 for deformed bars not larger than No. 5 with a
specified yield strength not less than 60,000 psi,or
b) 0.0025 for other deformed bars, or
c) 0.0020 for welded wire fabric (plain or deformed) not
larger than W3 1or D3 1.
14.3.4 Wallsmorethan10in.thick,exceptbasement
walls, shall have reinforcement for each direction placed in
two layers parallel with faces of wallin accordance withthe
following:
a) One layer consisting of not less than one-half and not
more thantwo-thirds of total reinforcement requiredfor
each direction shall be placed not less than 2 in. nor
more than one-third the thickness of wall from exterior
surface.
b) The other layer, consisting of the balance of required
reinforcement in that direction, shall be placed not less
than 3/4in. nor more than' one-thirdthe thickness of wall
from interior surface.
143.5 Vertical and horizontal reinforcement shall not be
spaced farther apart than three times the wall thickness, nor
18 in.
 14.3.6 Vertical reinforcement need not be enclosed by lat-
eral ties if vertical reinforcementarea is not greater than 0.01
times gross concretearea, ar where vertical reinforcementis
not required as compression reinforcement.
14.3.7 In addition tothe minimum reinforcement required
by 14.3.1, not less than two No. 5 bars shall be provided
around all window and door openings. Such bars be ex-
shall
tended to develop the bar beyond the comers of the openings
but not less than 24 in.
14.4-Walls designed as compression members
Except as provided in 14.5, walls subject to axial load or
combined flexure and axial load shall be designed as com-
pression members in accordance with provisions of 10.2.
10.3, 10.10, 10.11, 10.12, 10.15, and 14.2 and 14.3.
14.5-Empirical design method
14.5.1 Walls of solid rectangular cross section may be de-
signed by the empirical provisionsof 14.5 if resultant of all
factored loadsis located withinthe middle-third of the over-
all thicknessof wall and alllimits of 14.2, 14.3, and 14.5 are
satisfied.
14.5.2 Design axial load strength$P,, of a wall satisfying
limitations of 14.5.1 shall be computed by Eq. (14-1) unless
designed in accordance with 14.4
+
where = 0.70 and effective length factorR shall be:
For walls braced top and bottom against lateral translation
and
a) restrained against rotationat one or both ends
(top and/or bottom)................................................. 0.8
b) unrestrained against rotation at both ends .............. 1.0
................ 2.0
For walls not braced against lateral translation
1 4 5 3 Minimum thicknessof walls designedby empirical
design method.
14.53.1 Thickness of bearing walls shall not be less
than 'lu theunsupportedheight or length,whichever is
shorter, nor less than4 in.
14.5.3.2 Thickness of exterior basement walls and foun-
dation walls shall notbe less than 71/2in.
14.6"Nonbearing walls
14.6.1 Thickness of non-bearing walls shall not be less
than 4 in., nor less than 1/30 the least distance between mem-
bers that provide lateral support.
14.7-Walls as grade beams
14.7.1 Walls designed as grade beams shall have top and
bottom reinforcement as required for moment in accordance
with provisions of 10.2 through 10.7. Design for shear shall
be in accordance with provisionsof Chapter 1 1.
14.7.2 Portions of grade beam walls exposed above grade
shall also meet requirements of 14.3.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
Chapter 15-Footings
15.O-Notation
A, = gross area of section, sq. in.
dp = diameter of pile at footing base
B = ratio of long side to short side of footing
15.1-Scope
15.1.1 Provisions of Chapter 15 shall apply for design of
isolated footings and, where applicable, to combined foot-
ings and mats.
15.1.2 Additional requirements for design of combined
footings and mats aregiven in 15.10.
15.24oads and reactions
15.2.1 Footings shallbe proportioned to resist the factored
loads and induced reactions, in accordance with the appro-
priate design requirements of this code and as provided in
Chapter 15.
15.2.2 Base area of footing or number and arrangement of
piles shall be determined from unfactored forces and mo-
ments transmittedby footing to soil or piles and permissible
soil pressure or permissible pile capacity selected through
principles ofsoil mechanics.
15.23 For footings on piles, computations for moments
and shearsmay be based on the assumption thatthe reaction
from any pile is concentrated at pile center.
15.3-Footings supporting circular or regular
polygon shaped columns or pedestals
For location of critical sections for moment, shear, and de-
velopment of reinforcement in footings, it is permissible to
treat circular or regular polygon shaped concrete columns or
pedestals assquare members with the same area.
15.4"oment in footings
15.4.1 External moment on any section ofa footing shall
be determined by passing a vertical plane through the foot-
ing, and computing the moment of forces the acting over en-
tire area of footing on one side of that vertical plane.
15.4.2 Maximum factored moment for an isolated footing
shall be computed as prescribed in 15.4.1 atcritical sections
located as follows:
a) At face of column, pedestal, or wall, for footings sup-
porting a concrete column, pedestal,or wall.
b) Halfway between middle and edge of wall, for footings
supporting a masonry wall.
c) Halfwaybetween face of columnand edge of steel
base plate, for footings supporting a column with steel
base plate.
15.4.3 In one-way footings, and two-way square footings,
reinforcement shall be distributed uniformly across entire
width of footing.
15.4.4 Intwo-wayrectangularfootings,reinforcement
shall be distributed as follows:
a) Reinforcement in long directionshall be distributed
uniformly across entire width of footing.
 S T D = A C I 347-ENGL L977
STRUCTURES
SAFETY NUCLEAR
b)Forreinforcementin short direction, aportionofthe
total reinforcement given byEq. (15-1) shall be distrib-
uted uniformly over a band width (centered on center
line of column or pedestal) equal to the length of short
side of footing. Remainder of reinforcement required in bearing strength for either surface as given by 10.15.
short direction shall be distributed uniformly outside
center band width of footing.
Reinforcement in
2 widthband
=- (15-1) b) any computed tensile force across interface.
Total reinforcement (ß + 11
in short direction
15.5“Shear in footings
15.5.1 Computation ofshear in footings shall be in accor-
dance with 1 1.12.
15.5.2 Location ofcritical section for shear in accordance
with Chapter11 shall be measured fromface of column,ped-
estal, or wall, for footings supporting a column, pedestal,or
wall. For footings supporting a columnor pedestal with steel
base plates, thecritical section shall be measured from loca-
tion defined in 15.4.2 (c).
15.53 Computation of shear on any section through a
footing supported on piles shall be in accordance with the
following:
a) Entire reaction from any pile whose center is located
dp/2 or more outside the section shall be considered as
producing shear on that section.
b) Reaction from any pile whosecenter is located dp/2 or
more inside the section shall be considered as produc-
ing no shear on that section.
c) For intermediatepositions of pile center, the portion of
the pile reaction to be considered as producing shear on
the section shall be based onstraight-line interpolation
between full valueat dp/2 outside the section and zero
value at dp/2 inside the section.
15.6-Development of reinforcement in footings
15.6.1 Computation of development of reinforcement in
footings shall be in accordance with Chapter12.
15.6.2 Calculated tension or compression in reinforcement
at each section shall be developed on each side of that sec-
tionbyproperembedment length, endanchorage,hooks
(tension only), or combinations thereof.
15.63 Critical sections for development of reinforcement
shall be assumed at the same locations as defined in 15.4.2
for maximum factored moment,and at all other vertical
planes where changes of section or reinforcement occur. See
also 12.10.6.
15.7-Minimum footing depth
Depth offooting above bottom reinforcementshall not be
less than 6 in. for footings on soil, nor less than 12 in. for
footings on piles.
15.8-Transfer of force at base of column, wall, or
reinforced pedestal
15.8.1 Forces and moments at base of column, wall, or
pedestal shall be transferredto supporting pedestalor footing
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
Ob62949 0538114 871
CODE 349-59
by bearing on concrete and by reinforcement, dowels, and
mechanical connectors.
15.8.1.1 Bearing onconcrete at contact surface between
supported andsupportingmember shall not exceedconcrete
15.8.1.2 Reinforcement, dowels,or mechanical connec-
tors between supported and supporting members shall be ad-
equate to transfer
a) all compressive force that e x d s concrete bearing
strength ofeither member
In addition, reinforcement, dowels, or mechanical con-
nectors shall satisfy 15.8.2 or 15.8.3.
15.8.1.3 If calculated moments are transferred to sup-
porting pedestal or footing, reinforcement, dowels or me-
chanical connectors shall be adequateto satisfy 12.17.
15.8.1.4 Lateral forces shall be transferred to supporting
pedestal or footing in accotdance with shear-friction provi-
sions of 1 1.7,or by other appropriate means.
158.2 In cast-in-place construction, reinforcement re-
quired to satisfy 15.8.1 shallbe provided either by extending
longitudinal bars into supporting pedestal or footing, or by
dowels.
15.8.2.1 For cast-in-place columns and pedestals, area
of reinforcementacross interface shall be not less than 0.005
times gross area of supported member.
15.8.2.2 For cast-in-place walls, area of reinforcement
across interface shall be not less than minimum vertical rein-
forcement givenin 14.3.2.
15.8.23 At footings,No. 14 and 18longitudinalbars, in
compression only, may be lap spliced with dowels to provide
reinforcement requiredto satisfy 15.8.1. Dowels shall not be
larger than No. 1 1 bar andshall extend into supported mem-
ber adistance not less than the development length of No. 14
or No. 18 bars or the splice length of the dowels, whichever
is greater, and into the footing a distance not less than the de-
velopment length of the dowels.
15.8.2.4 If a pinnedor rocker connection is provided in
cast-in-place construction, connection shall conform to
15.8.1 and 15.8.3.
15.8.3 In precast construction,anchor bolts or suitable me-
chanical connectors are permitted for satisfying 15.8.1.
15.8.3.1 Connection betweenprecast columns or pedes-
tals and supporting member shall have atensile strength not
less than 200A, in pounds, where A, is area of supported
member.
15.8.3.2 Connection between precast wall and support-
ing member shall have a tensile strength not less than 50Ag
in pounds, whereAg is cross-sectionalarea of wall.
15.8.33 Anchor bolts and mechanical connectors shall
be designed to reach their designstrength prior to anchorage
failure or failure of surroundingconcrete.
15.9”sloped or stepped footings
15.9.1 In sloped or stepped footings, angle of slope or
depth and locationof steps shall be such that design require-
ments aresatisfied at every section.
15.9.2 Sloped or stepped footings designed as a unit shall
be constructed to assure action as a unit.
 34460 AC1 STANDARD
15.1O-Combined footings and mats
15.10.1 Footings supporting more than one column, ped-
estal, or wall (combined footings or mats) shall be propor-
tioned to resist the factored loads and induced reactions, in
accordancewith appropriate designrequirementsof this
code.
15.10.2 The Direct Design Methodof Chapter 13 shall not
be used for designof combined footings and mats.
15.10.3 Distribution of soil pressure undercombined
footings and mats shall be consistent with properties of the
soil and the structure and withestablished principles of soil
mechanics.
Chapter 1&Precast Concrete
16.1-Scope
16.1.1 Provisions of Chapter 16 shall applyfor design of
precast concrete members defined as concrete elements cast
elsewhere thantheir final position in the structure.
16.1.2 All provisions of this Code notspecificallyexclud-
ed, and not in conflict with provisions of Chapter 16, shall
apply to precast concrete.
16.2-Design
16.2.1 Design of precast members shall consider all load-
ing and restraint conditions from initial fabrication to com-
pletionofthe structure, including form removal, storage,
transportation, and erection.
16.2.2 In precast construction that does not behave mono-
lithically, effects at all interconnected and adjoining details
shall be considered to assure properperformanceof the
structural system.
16.2.3 Effects of initial and long-timedeflections shall be
considered, including effects on interconnectedelements.
16.2.4 Design of joints and bearings shall include effects
of all forces to be transmitted, including shrinkage, creep,
temperature, elastic deformation, wind, and earthquake.
16.25 All details shall be designed to provide for manu-
facturing and erection tolerances andtemporary erection
stresses.
16.3-Precast wall panels
16.3.1 Precast bearing and nonbearing walls shall be de-
signed in accordance with provisions of Chapter 14.
16.3.2 Where precast panels are designed to span horizon-
tally to columns or isolated footings, the ratio of height to
thickness shall not be limited, provided the effect of deep
beam action, lateral buckling, and deflections are provided
for in the design. See 10.7.
16.4-Details
16.4.1 All details of reinforcement, connections, bearing
seats, inserts, anchors, concrete cover, openings, lifting de-
vices, fabrication, and erection tolerances shall be shown on
the shop drawings.
16.4.2 When approved by the Engineer, embedded items
(such as dowels or inserts) that either protrude from concrete
or remain exposed for inspection may be embedded while
concrete is in a plastic state provided:
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
Embedded items are not required to be hooked or tied
to reinforcement withinplastic concrete,
Embeddeditems are maintained in correct position
while concrete remainsplastic, and
Embedded items are properlyanchoredtodevelop
required factored loads.
16.5-Identification and marking
16.5.1 Each precast member or element shall be marked
to indicate location in thestructure, top surface, and date of
fabrication.
16.5.2 Identification marks shall correspond to the placing
plans.
16,6--Transportation, storage, and erection
16.6.1 During curing, form removal, storage, transporta-
tion, and erection, precast members shall notbe over-
stressed, warped, or otherwise damagedor have camberad-
versely affected.
16.6.2 Precast members shall be adequately braced and
sup
ported during erectionto insure proper alignment and structur-
al integrity until permanent connectionsare completed.
Chapter 17"Composite Concrete Flexural
Members
17.+Notation
A , = area of contact surface being investigated for
horizontal shear, in.2
A, = area of ties within a distances, in?
b, = width of cross section at contact surface being
investigated for horizontal shear
d = distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid
of tension reinforcement for entire composite
section, in.
h = overall thickness ofcompositemember,in.
s = spacing of ties measured along the longitudinal axis
of the member, in.
Vnh = nominal horizontal shear strength
V,, = factored shear force at section
h = correction factor related to unit weight of concrete
pv = ratio of tie reinforcement area to area of contact
surface
= A,/b,s
+ = strength reduction factor.See 9.3.
17.1-Scope
17.1.1 Provisions of Chapter 17 shall apply for design of
composite concrete flexural members definedas precast a n d
or cast-in-place concrete elements constructed in separate
placements but so interconnected that all elements respond
to loads as a unit.
17.1.2 All provisions ofthis code shall apply to composite
concrete flexural members, except as specifically modified
in Chapter 17.
17.2-General
17.2.1 An entire composite member or portions thereof
may be used inresisting shear and moment.
 S T D m A C I 349-ENGL L997 0662947 0538LLb 6 4 4
NUCLEAR SAFETY STRUCTURES CODE 349-61

17.2.2 Individual elements shall be investigated for all 17.5.2.4 When factored shear force V, at section consid-
critical stages of loading. ered exceeds$(500 b,d), design for horizontal shear shall be
17.2.3 If the specified strength, unit weight,or other prop- in accordance with11.7.4.
erties of the various elementsare different, properties of the 17.5.2.5 Whendeterminingnominalhorizontalshear
individual elementsor the most critical values,shall be used strength over prestressed concrete elements, d shall be as de-
in design. fined or 0.8h, whicheveris greater.
17.2.4 In strength computations of composite members, 175.3 Horizontal shear may be investigated by computing
no distinction shall be made between shored and unshored the actual Chang in compressive or tensile force in any seg-
members. ment, and provisions made to transfer that as force
horizontal
17.2.5 All elements shall be designed to support all loads shear to thesupportingelement.Thefactoredhorizontal
introduced prior to full development of design strength of shear force shall not exceed horizontal shear strength +Vnh
composite members. as given in 17.5.2.1 through 17.5.2.4, where area of contact
17.2.6 Reinforcement shallbe provided as required to con- surface A, shall be substituted forb,d.
trol cracking and to prevent separation of individual ele- 1753.1 When ties provided to resist horizontal shear
ments of composite members. are designed to satisfy 17.5.3, thetie area to tie spacing ratio
17.2.7 Composite members shall meet requirements for along the member shall approximately reflect the distribu-
control of deflections in accordance with9.5.5. tion of shear forcesin the member.
175.4 When tension exists across any contact surface be-
17.3-Shoring tween interconnected elements, shear transfer by contact
When used, shoring shall notbe removed until supported shall be permitted only when minimum ties are provided in
elements have developed design properties required to sup accordance with 17.6.
port all loads and limit deflections and cracking at time of
shoring removal. 17.6-Ties for horizontal s h e a r
17.6.1 When tiesare provided to transfer horizontal shear,
17.4-Vertical shear strength tie area shall not be less than that required by 11.5.5.3, and
17.4.1 When an entire composite member is assumed to tie spacing shall not exceed 4 times the least dimension of
resist vertical shear, design shall be in accordance with re- supported element, nor 24in.
quirements of Chapter 11 as fora monolithically cast mem- 17.6.2 Ties for horizontal shearmay consist of single bars
ber of the same cross-sectional shape. or wire, multiple leg stirrups, or vertical legsof welded wire
17.4.2 Shear reinforcement shall be fully anchoredinto in- fabric (plainor deformed).
terconnected elements in accordance with 12.13. 17.63 All ties shall be fully anchored into interconnected
17.4.3 Extended and anchored shear reinforcement may be elements in accordance with 12.13.
included as ties for horizontal shear.
Chapter 1&-Prestressed Concrete
17.5-Horizontal shear strength
175.1 In a composite member, full transfer of horizontal 18.O-Notation
shear forces shall be assured at contact surfaces of intercon- A = area of that part of cross section between flexural
nected elements. tension face andcenter of gravity of gross section,
175.2 Unless calculated in accordance with 17.5.3, design in.2
of cross sections subject to horizontal shear be shall
based on Aps = area of prestressed reinforcement in tension zone,
in.2
v, 5 $V,, (17-1) As = area of nonprestressed tension reinforcement, in.2
A L = area of compression reinforcement,in?
where V, is factored shear force at section considered and b = width of compression face of member, in.
V n h is nominal horizontal shear strength in accordance with
d = distance from extreme compression fiber to centroid
the following. of nonprestressed tension reinforcement, in.
17.5.2.1 When contactsurfacesare clean, free of
d ' = distance from extreme compression fiberto centroid
laitance, andintentionallyroughened,shearstrength Vnh
of compression reinforcement,in.
shall not be taken greater than806,d in pounds.
17.5.2.2 Whenminimumtiesareprovided in accor- dp = distance from extreme compression fiberto centroid
dance with 17.6, and contact surfaces are clean and free of of prestressed reinforcement
laitance, but not intentionally roughened, shear strengthV,,,, D = dead loads, or related internal moments and forces
..
shall not be taken greater than80b,d in pounds. e = baseofNapierianlogarithms
17.5.2.3 When ties are provided in accordance with f = specifiedcompressivestrengthofconcrete,psi
17.6, and contact surfaces are clean, freeof laitance, and
intentionally roughened to a full amplitude of approxi- fi
= 'quare root Of strength Of
mately 'I4 in., shear strength Vnr shall be taken equal to concrete,
psi
(260 + 0.6pJY)hb,d in pounds, butnot greater than fi¿ = compressivestrengthofconcreteattime of initial
500b,d in pounds, Values for h in 11.7.4.3 shall apply. prestress,
psi
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
 349-62 AC1 STANDARD
E = square rootof compressive strengthof concrete at
time of initial prestress, psi
fpc = average compressive stress in concrete due to
effective prestress force only (after allowance
for all prestresslosses), psi
fps = stress in prestressed reinforcement at nominal
strength, psi
fpu = specified tensile strength of prestressing tendons,psi
fPY = specified yield strength of prestressing tendons, psi
f r = modulus of rupture of concrete, psi
fse = effective stress in prestressed reinforcement, (after
allowance for all prestresslosses), psi
f y = specified yield strength of nonprestressed
reinforcement, psi
h = overall thicknessof member, in.
K = wobble friction coefficient per foot of prestressing
tendons
! = length of span of two-way flat plates in direction
parallel to that of the reinforcement being deter-
mined, in. See Eq. (1 8-8).
c = length of prestressing tendon element from jacking
endtoanypointx,ft.SeeEq.(18-1)and(18-2)
L = live loads, or related internal moments and forces
N, = tensile force in concrete dueto unfactored dead load
plus live load(D + L)
PS = prestressing tendonforce at jacking end
Px = prestressing tendonforce at any pointx
a = total angular change of prestressing tendon profile in
radians from tendon jacking end toany point x
R1 = factor defined in 10.2.7
Y p = factor for type of prestressing tendon
- 0.55 forfpy/fpu not less than 0.80
- 18.3-Design assumptions
-- 0.40 forfpy/fpu not less than0.85
- 0.28 forfpy/fpu not less than0.90
P = curvature friction coefficient
P = ratio of nonprestressed tension reinforcement
- A, /bd
P' = ratio of compression reinforcement
- Aj /bd
PP = ratio of prestressed reinforcement
- Apsibdp
$ = strength reduction factor.See 9.3.
o 18.4.1 Stressesin concrete immediatelyafterprestress
w'
op = PpfpJfi
cy,o p w , o; = reinforcement indices for flanged sections
computed as forW, op,and W' except thatb shall be
the web
width,
reinforcement
and area shall be that
except
required to develop compressive strength of web
only
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
18.1-SCOpe
18.1.1 Provisions of Chapter 18 shall apply- to members
"
prestressed with wire, strands, or bars conformingto provi-
sions for prestressing tendons in 3.5.5.
18.1.2 All provisions of this code not specifically exclud-
ed, and not in conflict with provisions of Chapter 18, shall
apply to prestressedconcrete.
18.13 The following provisionsof this code shall not ap-
ply to prestressed concrete, except as specifically noted: Sec-
tions 7.6.5, 8.4, 8.10.2, 8.10.3, 8.10.4, 8.11, 10.3.2, 10.3.3,
10.5,10.6,10.9.1,10.9.2;Chapter13;andSections14.3,
14.5, and 14.6.
18.1.4 Services load conditions are defined to be Load
Combinations 1,2,3,9,10, and 11 of 9.2.1 withthe load fac-
tors taken as unity.
18.24àeneral
18.2.1 Prestressed members shall meet the strength re-
quirements specified inthis code.
18.2.2 Design of prestressed members shall be based on
strength and on behavior at service conditions at all load
stages that may be critical during the life of the structure
from the time prestressis first applied.
18.23 Stress concentrations due to prestressing shall be
considered in design.
18.2.4 Provisions shall be made for effects on adjoining
construction of elastic and plastic deformations, deflections,
changes in length, and rotations due to prestressing. Effects
of temperature andshrinkage shall also be included.
18.2.5 Possibility of buckling in a member between points
where concrete and prestressing tendons arein contact and
of buckling in thin webs and flanges shall be considered.
18.2.6 In computing section properties prior to, bonding of
prestressing tendons,effect of loss of areadue to open ducts
shall be considered.
18.3.1 Strength designof prestressed members for flexure
and axial loads shall be based on assumptions given in 10.2,
except 10.2.4 shall apply onlyto reinforcement conforming
to 3.5.3.
18.3.2 For investigation of stressesat transfer of prestress,
at service loads, and at cracking loads, straight-line theory
may be used with the following assumptions.
18.3.2.1 Strains vary linearly with depth throughentire
load range.
18.3.2.2 At cracked sections, concrete resists no tension.
18.4-Permissible stresses in concrete: flexural
members
transfer (before time-dependent prestress losses) shall not
-
exceed the following:
(a) Extreme fiber stress in compression................ 0.Wh
(b) Extreme fiber stress intension
as permitted in (c) .................................. 3 K
(c) Extreme fiber stress in tension at ends of simply su -
P
ported members ................................................ 6 fli
 ~~

S T D - A C 1 349-ENGL L997 Obb2949 0538118 417 m

CODESTRUCTURES
NUCLEAR SAFETY 349-63

Wherecomputedtensilestressesexceedthesevalues,bond- 18.6.2.2 Frictionlossshallbebasedonexperimentally

ed auxiliaryreinforcement(nonprestressed or prestressed)determinedwobble K andcurvature p frictioncoefficients,
shall be provided in the tensile zone to resist thetotal tensile and shall be verified during tendon stressing operations.
forceinconcretecomputedwith the assumption of an un- 18.6.23 Valuesofwobbleandcurvaturefrictioncoeffi-
section.
cracked shownbe shall
design
cients
in used ondrawings.
design
18.4.2 Stresses in concrete at service loads (after allow- 18.63 Where loss of prestress in a membermay occur due
ance for allprestresslosses)shallnotexceedthefollowing: to connectionof member to construction,such loss
Extreme fiber stress in compression of prestress shallbe allowed for in design.
Load Combinations1, 2, 3 ................................. 0.45f:
Load Combinations9, 10, 11 ............................. 0.60f: 18.7-Flexural strength
Extreme fiber stress in tension in 18.7.1 Design moment strength of flexural members shall
precompressed tensile zone .................................. 6 E be computed by the strength design methods of this code.
Extreme fiber stress in tension in precompressed tensile For prestressing tendons, fps shall be substituted for &,, in
zone of members (except two-way slab systems) where strength computations.
analysis based on transformed cracked sections and on 18.7.2 In lieu of a more accurate determination of fps based
bilinear
moment-deflection relationships show that on strain compatibility, the following approximate values of
immediate and
long-timedeflections comply with fps shall be used iff,, is not less than 0.5fpu
requirementsof9.5.4,andwherecoverrequirements a) For members with bonded prestressing tendons
comply with 7.7.3.2............................................ 1 2 E
18.4.3 Permissible stresses inconcreteof18.4.1and
18.4.2 may be exceeded if shown
formance will not be impaired.
by test or analysis that per-
fps = f p u { 1” B, pp f,.+-(W-o’)
fc’ dp I} (18-3)

18.5-Permissible stresses in prestressing

tendons when
accountinto takencompression
reinforcement
is any If
185.1 Tensilestressinprestressingtendonsshallnotex-calculatingfp, by (18-3), the term
ceed the following:
a)Duetotendon
than
the
lesser
jacking force, 0.94fp,,butnot
of 0.80fp,and the maximum value
greater
rec-
ommended by manufacturer of prestressing tendons or
[P+ + W’> -d p - (18.7.2)l
anchorages.
shall be taken not less than 0.17 andd’ shall be no greater
b)Immediatelyafterprestresstransfer, 0.82fp,,butnot
greater than 0.74fp,. thano.15dp.
c) Post-tensioningtendons, at anchoragesandcouplers, b) For mmbers With unbonded Prestressing tendons and
immediately
after
tendon
anchorage,
0.70fpu.
with a span-to-depth
ratio
35
of

18.6-Loss of prestress L-’

18.6.1 To determine effective prestressf,,, allowance for f p s = f,, + 10,OOo + -J C ( 18-4)
the following sourcesof loss of prestress shallbe considered: loop,
a) Anchorageseatingloss
butfp, in Eq. (18-4) shall not be taken greater thanfp,, nor
b) Elastic shortening of concrete
c)Creep of concrete
cf,+,60,OOo).
d)Shrinkage of concrete c) For members with unbonded prestressing tendons and
e) Relaxation of tendon stress with a span-to-depth ratiogreater than 35
f) Friction loss due to intended or unintended curvature in
f ’
post-tensioning tendons.
fps = f,, + 1~,OOo+ -Jc (18-5)
18.6.2-Friction loss in post-tensioning tendons 30Pp
18.6.2.1 Effect of friction loss in post-tensioning ten-
dons shallbe computed by but fps in Eq. (18-5) shall not be taken greater thanfppr nor
Cf, + 30,000).
(18-1) 18.7.3 Nonprestressed reinforcement conforming to 3.5.3,
if used with prestressing tendons, may be considered to con-
tribute to the tensileforce and may be included in moment
When (KG+ pa)is not greater than 0.3, effect of frictionstrength computationsat a stress equal to the specified yield
loss may be computedby strength& Other nonprestressed reinforcementmay be in-
cluded in strength computations only if a strain compatibility
P, = P,( 1 + K/,+ pa) ( 18-2) analysis is made to determine stresses in such reinforcement.

COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute

Licensed by Information Handling Services
 S T D - A C 1 347-ENGL L977 W Obb2949 0538119 353 W
349-64 AC1 STANDARD

18.8-Limits for reinforcement of flexural members each direction. Spacing of bonded reinforcement shall not
18.8.1 Ratio of prestressed and nonprestressed rein- exceed 12 in.
forcement used for computation of moment strength of a 18.9.4 Minimum lengthof bonded reinforcement required
member, except as provided in 18.8.2, shall be such that by 18.9.2 and 18.9.3shall be as follows.
op,[ap+ d/dp(a- a')l or [opw + did, (W, - W',,,)] is not 18.9.4.1 In positive moment areas, minimum length of
greater than 0.368,. bondedreinforcement shall beone-thirdthe clear span
18.8.2 When a reinforcement ratio in excess of that speci- length and centeredin positive moment area.
fied in 18.8.1 is provided, design moment strength shall not 18.9.4.2 In negative moment areas, bonded reinforce-
exceed the moment strength basedon the compression por- ment shall extend one-sixth the clear span on each side of
tion of the moment couple. support.
18.8.3 Total amount of prestressed and nonprestressed re- 18.9.4.3 Where bonded reinforcement is provided for
inforcement shall be adequate to develop a factored load at design moment strength in accordance with 18.7.3, or for
least 1.2 times the cracking load computed on the basis of the tensile stress conditions in accordance with 18.9.3.2, mini-
modulus of rupture& specified in 9.5.2.3, exceptfor flexural mum length also shall conformto provisions of Chapter 12.
members with shear and flexural strengthat least twice that
required by 9.2. 18.1O-Statically indeterminate structures
18.10.1 Staticaliy indeterminate structures of prestressed
18.4"Minimum bonded reinforcement
18.9.1 A minimum area of bondedshall be concrete shall be designed for satisfactory performance at
provided
flexural
all
in memberswith
unbonded
prestressing
load conditions and for strength*
tendons as requiredby 18.9.2 and 18.9.3. 18.10.2 Performance at service load conditions shall be
18.9.2 Except as in 18.9.3, of determined by elastic analysis, considering reactions, mo-
bonded
reinforcement
shall be computed
ments,
by shears, and axial forces produced by prestressing,
creep, shrinkage, temperature change, axial deformation,
A, = 0.004A (18-6) restraint of attached structural elements, and foundation
settlement.
18.9.2.1 Bonded reinforcement required by Eq. (18-6) 18.103 Moments to be usedto compute required strength
shall be uniformly distributed over precompressed tensile shall bethe sum of the moments due to reactions induced by
zone asclose as practicableto extreme tension fiber. prestressing (witha load factorof 1.O) and the moments due
18.9.2.2 Bonded reinforcement shall be required regard- to factored loads.The sum of these moments may be adjust-
less of service load stress conditions. ed as permitted in 18.10.4.
18.9.3 For two-way flat plates, defined as solid slabs of 18.10.4 Redistribution of negative momentsin contin-
uniform thickness, minimum area and distribution of bonded uous prestressed flexural members
reinforcement shallbe as follows. 18.10.4.1 Where bonded reinforcement is provided at
18.93.1 Bonded reinforcement shall not be required in supports in accordance with 18.9.2, negative moments cal-
positive momentareas where computed tensile stress in con- culated by elastic theory for any assumed loading arrange-
crete at service load (after allowance for all prestresslosses) ment, may be increasedor decreased by not more than
does not exceed2 fi.
!">
18.9.3.2 In positive moment areas where com uted ten-
sile stress in concrete atservice load exceeds2 f ,mini-
mum area of bonded reinforcement shallbe computed by

(18-7)
where design yield strength fy shall not exceed 60,000 psi.
Bonded reinforcement shall be uniformly distributed over
precompressed tensile zone as close as practicable to ex-
treme tension fiber.
18.9.3.3 In negative moment areasat column supports,
minimum area of bonded reinforcement in each direction
shall be computed by
A, = 0.00075ht ( 18-8)
where t is length of span in direction parallel to thatof the
reinforcement being determined. Bonded reinforcement re-
quired by Eq. (18-8) shall be distributed withina slab width
between lines that are 1.5h outside opposite facesof the col-
umn support. At least 4 bars or wires shall be provided in
18.10.4.2 The modified negative moments shallbe used
for calculatingmoments at sectionswithinspans for the
same loading arrangement.
18.10.4.3 Redistribution of negative moments shall
be made only when the section at which moment is re-
duced is so designed that ap,[ap+ d/dp(w - o')],or
[opw + d/dp (o, - a',,,)]whichever
, is applicable, is not
greater than 0.2481.
18.1l-Compression members: Combined flexure
and axial loads
18.11.1 Prestressedconcretememberssubject to com-
bined flexure and axial load, with or without nonprestressed
reinforcement, shall be proportioned by the strength design
methods of this code for members without prestressing.Ef-
fects of prestress, creep, shrinkage, and temperature change
shall be included.

COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute

Licensed by Information Handling Services
 ~-
S T D - A C 1 349-ENGL L997
NUCLEAR SAFETY
CODESTRUCTURES
18.11.2-Limitsforreinforcement of prestressed
compression members
18.11.2.1 Members with averageprestressfpc less than
225 psi shall have minimum reinforcement in accordance
with 7.10, 10.9.1 and 10.9.2for columns, or 14.3 for walls.
18.11.2.2 Except for walls, members with average pre-
stress& equal to or greater than 225 psi shall have all pre-
stressing tendonsenclosed by spirals or lateral ties in
accordance withthe following:
Spirals shall conformto 7.10.4.
Lateral ties shall be at least No. 3 in size or welded wire
fabric of equivalentarea, and spaced vertically not to
exceed 48 tie bar or wire diameters, or least dimension
of compression member.
Ties shall be located vertically not more than half a tie
spacing above top of footing or slab in any story, and
shall be spacedas provided herein to not more than half
a tie spacing below lowesthorizontal reinforcement in
members supported above.
Where beams or brackets frame into all sides of a col-
umn, ties may be terminated not more than 3 in. below
lowest reinforcement in such beamsor brackets.
18.11.23 For walls with average prestressf, equal to or
greater than 225 psi, minimum reinforcement required by
14.3 may be waived where structural analysis shows ade-
quate strength and stability.
18.12-Slab systems
18.12.1 Factored moments and shears in presmssed slab
systems reinforced for flexure in more than one direction
shall be determined in accordance with provisions of 13.7
(excluding 13.7.7.4 and 13.7.7.5), or by more detailed design
procedures.
18.12.2 Moment strength of prestressed slabs at everysec-
tion shall be at least equal to the required strength consider-
ing 9.2, 9.3,18.10.3,and 18.10.4. Shear strength of
prestressed slabs at columns shall be at least equal to the re-
quired strength considering 9.2, 9.3, 11.1, 11.11.2,and
1 1.12.2.4.
18.12.3 At service load conditions,all serviceability limita-
tions, including specified limits on deflections, shall be met,
with appropriate considerationof the factors listed in 18.10.2.
18.12.4 For normallive loads and loads uniformly distrib-
uted, spacingof prestressing tendonsor groups of tendons in
one direction shall not exceed 8 times the slab thickness, nor
5 ft. Spacing of tendons also shall provide a minimum aver-
age prestress, after allowance for all prestress losses, of
125 psi on the slab section tributary to the tendon or tendon
group. A minimum of two tendonsshall be provided in each
direction through the critical shear section over columns.
Special considerationof tendon spacingshall be provided for
slabs with concentrated loads.
18.12.5 In slabs withunbonded prestressing tendons,
bonded reinforcement shall be provided in accordance with
18.9.3 and 18.9.4.
18.1 &Tendon anchorage zones
18.13.1 Reinforcement shall be provided where required
in tendon anchorage zones to resist bursting, splitting, and
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
~ ~~ -~
m 0662947 0538320 075
349-65
spalling forces induced by tendon anchorages. Regions of
abrupt changein section shall be adequately reinforced.
18.132 End blocks shall be provided where required for
support bearingor for distributionof concentrated prestress-
ing forces.
18.133 Post-tensioning anchorages and supporting con-
crete shall be designedto resist maximum jackingforce for
strength of concrete at time ofprestressing.
18.13.4 Post-tensioning anchorage zones shallbe designed to
develop the guaranteed ultimate tensile strength of Prestressing
Q,of 0.90 for concrete.
tendons using a strength reduction factor
18.1A o r r o s i o n protection for unbonded
prestressing tendons
18.14.1 Unbondedtendons shall be completelycoated
with suitable material to ensure corrosion protection.
18.14.2 Tendon wrapping shall be continuous overentire
length to be unbonded, andshall prevent intrusionof cement
paste or loss of coating mat6rials duringconcreteplacement.
18.143 Unbonded single strand tendons shall be protected
against corrosion in accordance with the Post-Tensioning In-
stitute “Specification for Unbonded Single Strand Tendons,”
PTI Institute, July 1993.
18.1 5-Post-tensioning ducts
18.15.1 Ducts for grouted or unbonded tendons shall be
mortar-tight and nonreactive with concrete, tendons, or filler
material.
18.15.2 Ducts for grouted single wire, strand, or bar ten-
dons shall have an inside diameter at least 1/4 in. larger than
tendon diameter.
18.153 Ducts for grouted multiple wire, strand, or bar ten-
dons shall have an inside cross-sectional area at least 2 times
area of tendons.
18.15.4 Ducts shall be maintained free of water if mem-
bers to be grouted are exposed to temperatures belowfreez-
ing prior to grouting.
18.164àrout for bonded prestressing tendons
18.16.1 Grout shall consist of portland cement and water;
or portland cement, sand, and water.
18.163 Materials for grout shall conform to the following:
18.16.2.1 Portland cement shall conform to 3.2.
18.16.2.2 Water shall conformto 3.4.
18.16.2.3 Sand, ifused, shall conform to “Standard
Specifications for Aggregate for
MasonryMortar”
(ASTM C 144) except that gradation may be modified as
necessary to obtain satisfactoryworkability.
18.16.2.4 Admixtures conformingU, 3.6 and known to
have no injurious effects on grout, steel, or concrete may be
used. Calciumchloride shall not beused.
18.163Selection of grout proportions
18.163.1 Proportions ofmaterials for grout shall be
based on either ofthe following:
a) Resultsof tests onfreshandhardened grout prior to
beginning grouting operations, or
b) Prior documentedexperiencewith similar materials
and equipment and under comparable field conditions.
18.16.3.2 Cement used in the work shall correspond to
that on whichselection of grout proportions was based.
 18.16.3.3 Water content shall be minimum necessary
for proper pumping of grout; however, water-cement ratio
shall not exceed 0.45 by weight.
18.16.3.4 Water shall not be added to increase grout
flowability that hasbeen decreased by delayed use of
18.16.4"ixing andpumping grout
grout.
18.16.4.1 Grout shall be mixed in equipment capable of
continuous mechanical mixing and agitation that will pro-
duceuniform distribution of materials, passedthrough
screens, and pumped in a manner that will completely fill
tendon ducts.
18.16.4.2 Temperature of membersat time of grouting
shall be above 35 F and shall be maintained above 35 F until
field-cured 2-in. cubes of grout reach a minimum compres-
sive strength of 800 psi.
18.16.4.3 Grout temperatures shall not be above 90 F
during mixing and pumping.
18.1 7-Protection for prestressing tendons
Burning or welding operations in vicinity of prestressing
tendons shall be carefully performed, so that tendons are not
subject to excessivetemperatures, weldingsparks, or ground
currents.
18.1 &Application and measurement of
prestressing force
18.18.1 Prestressing force shall be determined by both of
the following methods:
a) Measurement of tendon elongation. Required elonga-
tion shall be determined from averageload-elongation
curves for prestressing tendons used.
b) Observation of jacking force on a calibrated gage or
load cell or by use of acalibrated dynamometer.
Cause of any difference in force determination between
(a) and (b) that exceeds5 percent for pretensioned elements
or 7 percent for post-tensioned construction shall be ascer-
tained and corrected.
18.18.2 Where transfer offorce from bulkheads of preten-
sioning bed to concrete is accomplished by flame cutting pre-
stressing tendons, cuttingpoints and cutting sequence shallbe
predetermined to avoid undesired temporary stresses.
18.183 Long lengths of exposed pretensioned strand shall
be cut near the member to minimize shock to concrete.
18.18.4 Total loss of prestress due to unreplaced broken
tendons shall not exceed 2 percent of total prestress.
18.14-Post-tensioning anchorages and couplers
18.19.1 Anchorages andcouplers for bonded and unbond-
ed prestressing tendons shall develop at least 95 percent of
the specified breaking strengthof the tendons, whentested in
an unbonded condition, without exceeding anticipated set.
For bonded tendons, anchorages andcouplers shall be locat-
ed so that 100 percent of the specified breaking strength of
the tendons shall be developed at critical sections after ten-
dons are bonded in the member.
18.19.2 Couplers shall be placed in areas approved by
the Engineer and enclosed in housing long enoughto per-
mit necessary movements.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
18.19.3 In unbonded construction subject to repetitive
loads, special attention shallbe given to the possibility of
fatigue in anchorages and couplers.
18.19.4 Anchorage and end fittings shall be permanent-
I ly protected against corrosion.
Chapter 19-Shells
19.0-Notation
f: = specified compressive strength of concrete, psi
19.1-Scope and definitions
19.1.1 Provisions of Chapter 19 shall apply for design
of shell concrete structures havingthicknesses equal to or
greater than 12 in.
19.1.2 All provisions of this Code not specifically ex-
cluded, and not in conflict with provisions of Chapter 19
shall apply to shell structures.
19.1.3 Shells may be bounded by supporting members
and edge members provided to stiffen the shell and dis-
tribute or carry load in composite actionwith that shell.
19.2"General
19.2.1 Methods of analysis which are based on accepted
principles of engineering mechanicsand applicable to the
geometry of the structure shallbe used.
19.2.2 Elastic behavior is an accepted basis for deter-
mining internalforces,displacements,andstability of
shells. Equilibrium checks of internal forces and external
loads shallbe made toinsure consistency of results.
19.2.3 The redistribution of forces in a statically inde-
terminate structure shall be considered.
19.2.4 The stiffening effect of buttresses or other inte-
gral portions of the structure shall be considered.
19.2.5 Shell elements shall be proportioned for the re-
quired
strength in accordance with provisions of
Chapter 9 of this Code.
19.2.6 Investigation of thin shells for stability shall in-
clude consideration of possible reduction in buckling ca-
pacity caused by large deflections, creep effects,
temperature, cracking and deviation between actual and
theoretical shell surface.
19.2.7 The effect of openings or penetrations on the
strength and behavior of the overall structure shall be con-
sidered. The shell may be thickened around the openings
or penetrations if necessary to satisfy strength require-
ments and facilitate concrete placement.
19.2.8 Nonlinear variations in circumferential and me-
ridional stresses acrossthe shell thickness shall be consid-
ered when appropriate.
19.2.9-Supporting members
19.2.9.1 Supporting membersshall be designed in ac-
cordance with applicable provisionsof this code.
19.2.9.2 A portion of the shell equal to the effective
flange width as specified in 8.10 may be assumed to act
with supporting members.
19.2.9.3 Within the effective flange width of shell as-
sumedtoact with supporting members, reinforcement
perpendicular tosupporting member shall be at least
~~ . ~~
 STD.ACI 347-ENGL L997
NUCLEAR SAFETY
STRUCTURES
equal to that required for a T-beam flange as specified in
8.10.5.
19.2.9.4 Compatibility shall be maintained atthe
junction of the shelland the supporting member and at all
locations of discontinuities in geometric and material
properties which affect the shell stiffness.
19.2.10-Model tests
19.2.10.1 Model tests may be used in support of the
design if they are planned and executed by individuals or
laboratories with experience in physical testing.
19.2.10.2 When model tests areused, only those por-
tions of the shell structure that significantly affect items
under study need be simulated.
19.2.10.3 Every attempt shall be made to insure that
elastic model tests reveal quantitative behavior of proto-
type structure.
19.3-Design strength of materials
Specifiedcompressivestrength of concrete f at
28 days shall not be less than 3000 psi.
19.4-Section design and reinforcement
requirements
19.4.1 Tensile strength of the concrete shall not be relied
upon to resist flexural and membrane action.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
0 b b 2 9 4 9 0538322 948 m
CODE 349-67
19.4.2 Reinforcement shallbe provided in two or more di-
rections and shall be proportioned such that its resistance in
any direction exceeds the component of applied forces in
that direction.
19.43 Shell reinforcement required for flexure shall be
proportioned with due regard to axial forces.
19.4.4 Reinforcement shall meet the minimum require-
ments of 7.12.
19.4.5 Shell reinforcement at junction of shell and sup-
porting members or edge members shall be anchored in or
through supporting members by embedment length,
hooks, or mechanical anchorage in accordance with
Chapter 12.
19.4.6 All forces imposed by curved reinforcement shall
be considered in the design of local areas, such as around
penetrations.
lg.!bConstruction
The Engineer shall specify the tolerances for the shapeof
the shell.If construction results in deviations from
the shape
greater thanthe specified tolerances, an analysis
of the effect
of the deviations shall be made.
 STD.ACI 349-ENGL L997 m Ob62949 0538123 B B 4
34468 AC1 STANDARD

PART 6-SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS

Chapter 2GStrength Evaluation of 20.4-Load tests of flexural

members
Existing
Structures 20.4.1 When flexural members, including beams and
slabs, are load tested, the additional provisions of 20.4 shall
20.0-Notation apply.
a = maximumdeflectionunder test load ofmember 20.4.2 Base readings (datum for deflection measurements)
relative to a line joining the ends of the span, or of shall be made immediately prior to application of test load.
the free end of cantilever relative to its support, in.
20.43 That portion of the structure selected for loading
D = dead loads, or related internal moments and forces
shall be subject to a total test load, including dead loads al-
h = overall thicknessofmember,in.
ready acting and other loads determined to be applicable by
/I = span of member under load test (shorter span of flat the Engineer.
slabs and of slabs supported onfour sides). Span of
member, except as provided in 20.4.9, is distance 20.4.4 Test load shall be applied in not less than four ap-
between centers of supports or clear distance proximately equal increments without shock to the struc-
between plus depth of member, whichever tureandin suchamanner as to avoidarching of loading
in. is smaller, materials,
L = live loads, or related internal moments and forces 20.45 After test load has been inposition for 24 hr, initial
deflection readings shall be taken.
20.1-Strength evaluation: General 20.4.6 Test loadshall be removed immediatelyafter initial
If doubtdevelopsconcerning the safety ofa structure or deflection readings, and final deflection readings shall be
member, and/or low-Strength ConCrete is Confirmed in aCCOr- taken 24 h after removal of the test load,
dance with 5.6.4.4 and computations indicate that load-car- 20.4.7 If the portion of the structure tested shows visible
Ting has significmtlY the Engineer evidence of failure, the portion tested shall be considered to
Order a * (For Of
have failed the test and no retesting of the previously tested
systems of design or construction, see 1.4 regarding use of portion shall be permitted.
tests.)
20.4.8 If the portion of the structure tested shows no visi-
ble evidence of failure, the following criteria may be taken
20.2-Analytical investigations: General
20.2.1 strength
If evaluation is by analysis,thorough
a as indication Of behavior:
field investigation shall be made of dimensions and details of a) If measured maximum deflection a of a beam, floor or
members, properties of materials, and other pertinent condi- roof is less than /?/ 20,000h.
tions of the structure as actually built. b) If measured maximum deflection a of a beam, floor, or
20.2.2 Analyses based oninvestigationrequired by 20.2.1 roofexceeds f:/20,000h, deflectionrecoverywithin
shall satisfy the Engineer that the load factors meet require- 24 hr after removal of the test load shall be at least
ments and intent of this code. See 20.6. 75 percent of the maximumdeflectionfornonpre-
stressed concrete, or 80 percent for prestressed concrete.
20.3-Load
tests:
General The Engineer shall also consider the original design
and
20.3.1 If strength evaluation is by load tests, a qualified
functional requirements structurein question when es-
Engineer authorized by the Owner and Engineer shall con-
tablishmg acceptancecriteria for the testing and determining
trol such tests.
satisfactory behavior.
20.3.2 A load test shall not be made until that portion of
the structure to be subject to load is at least 56 days old. If 20.4.9 In 20.4.8(a) and (b), 4 for cantilevers shall be taken
the Owner, Engineer andall other involved parties agree, it as two times thedistance from supportto cantilever end, and
is permitted to make the test at an earlier age. deflection shall be adjusted for any support movement.
20.3.3 When only aportion of the structure is to be load 20.4.10 Nonprestressed concrete construction failing to
tested, the questionable portion shall be load tested in such Show 75 percent recovey of deflection as required by
amanner as to adequatelytest the suspectedsource of 20.4.8tb) may be retested not earlier than 72 hr after removal
weakness. of the first test load. The portion of the structure tested shall
20.3.4 Forty-eight hours prior to application of test load, a be considered Satisfactory if:
load
to simulate effect of
that
portion
of the dead loads not a) me portion of the shows no visible
already acting shall beapplied and shall remain in place until dence offailure in the retest, and
all testing has been completed.
b)Deflectionrecoverycausedbysecond test loadis at
20.3.5 Load tests are not confinedto the completeconcrete
least 80 percent of the maximum deflection in the sec-
structure; tests may be utilized to determine strength charac-
teristics of specific elements suchas anchorages and embed- ond test.
ments.TheEngineer shall specify the appropriate testing 20.4.11 Prestressed concrete construction shall notbere-
parameters. tested.

COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute

Licensed by Information Handling Services
 NUCLEAR SAFETY
CODESTRUCTURES
20.5”embers other than flexural members
Members other than flexural members preferably shall be
investigated by analysis.
20.6-Safety
20.6.1 Load tests shall be conducted in such a manner
as to provide for safety of life and structure during the
test. Theload testing shallnot interfere with the operating
status of the nuclear plant, or violateany plant Technical
Specifications.
20.6.2 No safety measures shall interfere with load test
procedures or affect results.
Chapter 21-Special Provisions for
Seismic Design
21. M o t a t i o n
Ach = cross-sectionalarea of a structural member
measured out-to-out of transverse
reinforcement,in.’
A , = area of concrete section, resisting shear, of an indi-
vidual pier or horizontal wall segment, in?
A,, = net area of concrete section bounded by web thick-
ness andlength of section in the direction of shear
force considered, in?
A, = gross area of section, in?
Ai = effective cross-sectional area within a joint, see
2 1S.3.1, in a planeparallel to plane of reinforce-
ment generating shear in the joint. The jointdepth
shall bethe overall depth of the column. Where a
beam framesinto a support oflarger width, the
effective width ofthe joint shall not exceed the
smaller of:
beam widthplus the joint depth
twice the smaller perpendicular distance from the
longitudinal axis of the beam to the column side.
See 21.5.3.1.
Ash = total cross-sectionalarea of transversereinforcement
(includingcrossties) within spacing s and perpendic-
ular to dimensionh,
b = effective compressive flange width of a structural
member, in.
b , = web width, or diameter of circular section, in.
d = effectivedepthof section
! db =diameter
bar
I
f L = specified compressivestrength of concrete, psi
PC
= square root of specified compressivestrength of con-
crete, psi
fy = specified yield strength of reinforcement,psi
fyh = specified yield strength of transverse
reinforcement, psi
h, = cross-sectional dimension of column core measured
center-to-centerof confining reinforcement
h, = height of entire wall (diaphragm) or of the segment
of wall (diaphragm) considered
gd = developmentlength for a straight bar
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by InformationS T D O A C I Services
Handling 349-ENGL 1997
349-69
/dh = development lengthfor a bar with astandardhook as
defined in Eq. (21-5)
I , = minimum length, measured from joint face along
axis of structural member, over which transverse
reinforcement mustbe provided, in.
4 = length of entire wall (diaphragm) or of segment of
wall (diaphragm) consideredin direction of shear
force
Mpr = probable flexural moment strengthof members,
with or without axial load, determined usingthe
properties of the member at the joint faces assuming
a tensile strength in the longitudinalbars of at least
1.25fy and astrength reduction factor 4 of 1.O
M, = portion of slab moment balanced by support
moment
s = spacing oftransversereinforcementmeasuredalong
the longitudinal axis of the structural member, in.
so = maximum spacing of transverse reinforcement,in.
V, = nominal shear strength provided by concrete
V, = design shear force determined from 21.3.4.1 or
21.4.5.1
V, = nominal shear strength
V, = factored shear force at section
a, = coefficientdefining the relative contributionof
concrete strength to wall strength. See Ekl. (21-7).
p = ratio ofnonprestressedtensionreinforcement
= AJbd
pg = ratio of total reinforcement area to cross-sectional
area of column.
pn = ratio of distributed shear reinforcement on a plane
perpendicular to plane ofA,v
ps = ratio of volume of spiral reinforcement to the core
volume confined by thespiral reinforcement
(measured out-bout)
P, = A,, /Acv;where A,, is the projection on A,, of area
of distributed shear reinforcement crossing the plane
OfAc,
$ = strength reduction factor
21.1-Definitions
Buse of structure-Level at which earthquake motions are
assumed to be imparted to a building. This level does not
necessarily coincide with the ground level.
Boundary elements-Portionsalongwallanddiaphragm
edges strengthenedby longitudinaland transverse reinforce-
ment. Boundary elements do not necessarily require an in-
crease in the thickness of the wall or diaphragm. Edges of
openings within wallsanddiaphragms shall be provided
with boundary elements if requiredby 21.6.5.1 or 21.6.6.
Collector elements-Elements that serve to transmit the in-
to members of the lateral-
ertial forces within the diaphragms
force resisting systems.
0662949 0538124 710 m
 S T D e A C I 349-ENGL 1997
349-70 AC1 STANDARD
Crosstie-A continuousbarhaving a hooknotlessthan
135 deg with at least a six-diameter (but not less than 3 in.)
extension atone end and a hook not less than90 deg with at
least a six-diameter extension at the other end. The hooks
shall engage peripheral longitudinal bars.The 90-deg hooks
of two successive crossties engaging the same longitudinal
bars shall be alternated end for end.
Design load combinationsrombinations of factored loads
and forces specified in 9.2.
Development length for a bar with a standard hook-The
shortest distance betweenthecriticalsection(wherethe
strength of the bar is to be developed) and a tangent to the
outer edgeof the 90-deg hook.
Factored loads and forces-Specifiedloadsand forces
modified by the factors in9.2.
Hoop-A hoop is a closed tie or continuously wound tie. A
closed tie can be made up of several reinforcing elements
with 135-deg hooks havinga six-diameter (but notless than
3 in.) extension at each end.A continuously wound tie shall
have at each end a 135-deg hook witha six-diameter (but not
less than 3 in.) extension that engages the longitudinal rein-
forcement.
Lateral-force resisting system-That portion of the struc-
ture composed of members proportioned to resist forces re-
lated to earthquakeeffects.
Shell concrete4oncrete outside the transverse reinforce-
ment confining the concrete.
Specified lateral forces-Lateral forces corresponding to
the appropriate distribution of the design base shear force
prescribed by the governing code for earthquake-resistant
design.
Structural diaphragme”tructura1 members, such as floor
and roof slabs, which transmit inertial forces
to lateral-force
resisting members.
Structural trusses-Assemblagesofreinforcedconcrete
members subjected primarily to axial forces.
Structural walls-Walls proportioned to resistcombina-
tions of shears, moments, and axialforces induced by earth-
quake motions.A “shearwall” isa “structural wall.”
Strut-An element of a structural diaphragm used
to provide
continuity aroundan opening in the diaphragm.
Tie elements-Elementswhichservetotransmitinertial
forces and prevent separation of such building components
as footings and walls.
21.2-General requirements
21.2.1-scope
21.2.1.1 The reinforcing bar detailing requirements of
this chapter shall be the design practice for nuclear plants
I
within the Durview ofthis code.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
m 0bb2949 0538125 b57 m
21.2.1.2 The provisions of Chapters 1 through 18 shall
apply except as modified by the provisionsof this chapter.
21.2.1.3 A reinforced concrete structural system not sat-
isfying the requirements of this chapter is allowed if it is
demonstrated by experimental evidence and analysis that the
proposed system will have strength and toughness equal to
or exceeding those provided by a comparable monolithic re-
inforced concrete structure satisfying this chapter.
21.2.2-Analysisandproportioning of structural
members
21.2.2.1 The interaction of all structural and nonstruc-
mal members which materially affect the response of the
structure to earthquake motions shall be considered in the
analysis.
21.2.2.2 Rigid members assumed notto be a part of the
lateral force resisting system are allowed provided their ef-
fect on the response of the system is considered and accom-
modated in the structural design. Consequences offailure of
structural and nonstructural members which are not a part of
the lateral force resisting system shallalso be considered.
21.2.2.3 Structural members below base ofstructure re-
quired to transmit to the foundation forces resulting from
earthquake effects shall also comply with the requirements
of Chapter 21.
21.2.2.4 All structural members assumed notto be part
of the lateral force resisting system shall conformto 21.7.
21.2.3-Strength reduction factors
Strength reduction factors shallbe as given in 9.3.4.
21.2.Aoncrete inmembersresistingearthquake-
induced forces
>
Compressive strength,f of the concreteshall be not less
than 3000 psi.
21.2.5-Reinforcementin membersresisting earth-
quake-induced forces
21.2.5.1 Reinforcementresistingearthquake-induced
flexuralandaxial forces inframemembersand in wall
boundary elements
shall
complywith
ASTM A706.
ASTM A615 Grades 40 and 60 reinforcement are allowed in
these members if (a) the actual yield strength based on mill
tests does not exceed the specified yield strength by more
than 18,000 psi (retests shall not exceed this value by more
than an additional3000 psi) and(b) the ratio of the actual ul-
timate tensile stress to the actual tensile yield strength is not
less than 1.25.
21.2.LWelded splicesandmechanicallyconnected
reinforcement
21.2.6.1 Reinforcementresistingearthquake-induced
flexural or axial forces in frame membersor in wall bound-
ary elements are permitted tobe spliced using welded splices
or mechanicalconnectionsconforming to 12.14.3.3 or
12.14.3.4 provided not more than alternate barsin each layer
of longitudinal reinforcementare spliced at a section and the
center-to-center distance between splices of adjacent barsis
24 in. or more measured along the longitudinal axis of the
member.
21.2.6.2 Welding of stirmps, ties, inserts,or other simi-
lar elements to longitudinal reinforcement required by de-
sign shall notbe Dermitted.
 - ~
STD.ACI 349-ENGL 2997 m 0662949 0538L26 593
NUCLEAR SAFETY STRUCTURESCODE
21.3-Flexural members of frames
21.3.1-Scope
Requirements of 21.3 apply to frame members (a) resist-
ing earthquake-induced forces and (b) proportioned primari-
ly to resist flexure. These frame members shall also satisfy
the following conditions:
213.1.1 Factored axial compressiveforce on the mem-
ber shall not exceed (A& / 10).
213.1.2 Clear span for the membershall not be less than
four timesits effective depth.
213.13 The width-to-depth ratio shallnotbe less
than 0.3.
21.3.1.4 The width shall not be (a) lessthan 10 in. and
(b) more than the width of the supporting member (mea-
sured on a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of
the flexural member) plusdistances on each side of the sup-
porting member not exceeding three-fourths of the depth of
the flexural member.
213.2-Longitudinal reinforcement
21.3.2.1 At any section of a flexural member and for
the top as wellas for the bottom reinforcement the amount
of reinforcement shall not be less than (200 b, d /fy) and
the reinforcement ratio, P,shall not exceed 0.025. At least
two bars shall be provided continuously both top and
bottom.
21.3.2.2 Positive-moment strengthat joint face shallbe
not less than one-halfof the negative-moment strength pro-
vided at that face of the joint. Neither the negative- northe
positive-momentstrengthatany section alongmember
length shall be less than one-fourth the maximum moment
strength provided at face of either joint.
21.3.23 Lap splices of flexural reinforcement shall be
permitted only if hoop or spiral reinforcement is provided
over the lap length. Maximum spacing of the transverse re-
inforcement enclosing the lapped bars shall not d/4 or
exceed
4 in. Lap splices shall not be used (a) within the joints, (b)
within a distance of twice the member depth from the face of
the joint, and (c) at locations whereanalysis indicates flexur-
al yielding caused by inelastic lateral displacements of the
frame.
21.3.2.4 Weldedsplicesandmechanicalconnections
shall conform to 21.2.6.1.
21.3.3-Transverse reinforcement
21.3.3.1 Hoops shall be provided in the following re-
gions offrame members:
I ) Over a length equal to twice the member depth mea-
sured from the face of the supporting member toward
midspan, at both ends of the flexural member.
2) Over lengths equal to twice the member depth on both
I sides of a section
where
flexural
yielding is likely
to
occur in connection with inelasticlateral displacements
of the frame.
21.3.3.2 The first hoop shall be located not more than
2 in. fromthe face of a supporting member. Maximum spac-
ing of the hoops shall not exceed(a) [d/4], (b) eight timesthe
diameter of the smallest longitudinal bars, (c) 24 times the
diameter of the hoop bars, and(d) 12 in.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
~~
m
349-71
21.3.3.3 Where hoops are required, longitudinal bars on
theperimetershallhavelateralsupportconformingto
7.10.5.3.
2133.4 Where hoopsare not required, stirrups shall be
spaced at no more than [d/2] throughout the length of the
member.
2133.5 Stirrups or ties required to resist shear shallbe
hoops over lengthsof members as specified in 21.3.3,21.4.4,
and 21.5.2.
21.33.6 Hoops in flexural members are allowed to be
made up oftwo pieces of reinforcement:a U-stirmp having
hooks not less than 135 deg with six-diameter(but not less
than 3 in.) extension anchored in the confined core and a
crosstie to make a closed hoop. Consecutive crossties en-
gaging the same longitudinal bar shall have their 90-deg
hooks at opposite sides of the flexural member. If the lon-
gitudinal reinforcing bars securedby the crossties are con-
finedby a slab only onÒne side ofthe flexural frame
member, the 90-deg hooksof the crossties shall all be
placed on that side.
2 1 3 . A h e a r strength requirements
213.4.1-Design forces
The design shearforce V, shall be determined from con-
sideration of the statical forces on the portion of the member
between faces of the joints. It shall be assumed that moments
of opposite sign corresponding to probable strength MF act
at the joint faces and that the member is loaded with the fac-
tored tributary gravity load along its span.
213.4.2 For determining the required transverse rein-
forcement in frame members in which the earthquake-in-
duced shear force calculated in accordance with 21.3.4.1
represents one-halfor more oftotal design shear, the quanti-
ty V, shall be assumedto be zero if the factored axial com-
pressive force includingearthquakeeffects is less than
(A& / W .
21.4-Frame members subjectedto bending and
axial load
21.4.1"scope
The requirements ofthis section apply to frame members
(a) resisting earthquake-inducedforces and (b) havinga fac-
tored axial force exceeding (Ag f i / 10). Theseframe mem-
bers shall also satisfy the following conditions:
21.4.1.1 The shortest cross-sectional dimension, mea-
sured on a straight line passing through the geometric cen-
troid, shall notbe less than 12 in.
21.4.1.2 The ratio of the shortest cross-sectional dimen-
sion to theperpendiculardimensionshallnotbeless
than 0.4.
21.4.2"inimum flexural strength of columns
21.4.2.1 Flexural strength of any column proportioned
to resist a factoredaxialcompressive force exceeding
(AJk/lO) shall satisfy 21.4.2.2 or 21.4.2.3.
Lateral strength and stiffness of columns not satisfying
21.4.2.2shallbeignoredindeterminingthe calculated
strengthand stiffness of thestructurebutshallconform
to 21.7.

~~ ~
S T D - A C 1 349-ENGL 3997
WS72 AC1 STANDARD
21.4.2.2 The flexural strengths of the columnsshall sat-
isfy Eq. (21-1)
(21-1)
C M , = sum of moments, at the center of the joint, corre-
sponding tothe design flexural strength of the columns fram-
inginto that joint. Columnflexural strength shall be
calculated for the factored axial force, consistent with the di-
rection of the lateral forces considered, resulting in the low-
est flexural strength.
C Mg= sum of moments, at the center of the joint, corre-
sponding to the design flexural strengths of the girders fram-
ing into thatjoint.
Flexural strengths shall be summed such that the column
moments oppose the beam moments. Eq. (21-1) shall be sat-
isfied for beam momentsacting in bothdirections in the ver-
tical plane ofthe frame considered.
21.4.2.3 If 21.4.2.2 is not satisfied at a joint, columns
supporting reactions from that joint shall be provided with
transverse reinforcementas specified in 2 1.4.4over their full
height.
21.4.3-Longitudinal reinforcement
21.4.3.1 The reinforcement ratio, pg, shall not be less
than 0.01 andshall not exceed 0.06.
21.4.3.2 Welded splices andmechanicalconnections
shall conform to 21.2.6.1. Lap splices are permitted only
within the center half ofthe member length and shall be pro-
portioned as tension splices.
21.4.4”Transverse reinforcement
21.4.4.1 Transverse reinforcement as specified below
shall beprovided unless a larger amount is required
by 21.4.5.
The volumetric ratio of spiral or circular hoop rein-
forcement, ps, shall not be less than that indicated by
Eq. (21-2).
and shall not be less than that required byEq. (10-5).
The total cross-sectional area of rectangular hoop rein-
forcement shall not be less than that given byEq. (21-3)
and (21-4).
Transverse reinforcement shall be provided by either
single or overlapping hoops. Crossties of the same
bar size and spacing as thehoops maybe used.
Each end of the crosstie shall engage a peripheral
longitudinal reinforcing bar. Consecutive crossties
shall be alternated end for end along the longitudi-
nal reinforcement.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
~~ ~ ~~~ ~
Obb2949 0538327 42T
4)If the design strength ofmembercore satisfies the
requirementof the specifiedloadingcombinations
including earthquake effect, Eq. (21-3) and (10-5) need
not be satisfied.
21.4.4.2 Transverse reinforcement shall be spaced at
distances notexceeding (a) one-quarter of the minimum
member dimension and(b) 4 in.
21.4.4.3 Crossties or legs of overlapping hoopsshall not
be spaced more than14 in. on center in the direction perpen-
dicular to the longitudinal axis of the structural member.
21.4.4.4 Transverse reinforcement in amount specified
in 21.4.4.1 through 21.4.4.3 shall be provided over a length
1, from eachjoint face and on bothsides of anysection where
flexural yielding is likely to occur in connection with inelas-
tic lateral displacements ofthe frame. The length 4 shall not
be less than (a) the depth of the member at the joint face or
at the section where flexural yielding is likely to occur, (b)
one-sixth of the clear span of the member, and (c) 18 in.
21.4.4.5 Columns supporting reactions from discontin-
ued stiff members, such as walls, shallbe provided withtrans-
verse reinforcement as specified in 21.4.4.1 through 21.4.4.3
over their full height beneath the level at which the disconti-
nuity occurs if the factored axial compressive force in these
members, related to earthquake effect, exceeds (Agf:/lO).
Transversereinforcement as specifiedin21.4.4.1through
21.4.4.3 shall extendinto the discontinued memberfor at least
the development length of the largest longitudinal reinforce-
ment in the columnin accordance with 21 5 4 . If the lower end
of the column terminates on a wall, transverse reinforcement
as specified in 21.4.4.1 through 21.4.4.3 shall extend into the
wall for at least the development length of the largest longitu-
dinal reinforcement inthe column at the point of termination.
If the column terminates on a footing or mat, transverse rein-
forcement as specified in 21.4.4.1 through 21.4.4.3 shall ex-
tend at least 12 in. into the footing or mat.
21.4.4.6 Where transverse reinforcement,as specified in
21.4.4.1 through 21.4.4.3,is not provided throughoutthe full
length of the column, the remainder of the column length
shall contain spiral or hoop reinforcement with center-to-
center spacing not exceeding the smaller of six times the di-
ameter of thelongitudinal column bars or 6 in.
2 1 . 4 M h e a r strength requirements
21.4.5.1-Design forces
The designshear force V, shall be determined from con-
sideration of the maximum forces that can be generated at the
faces of the joints at each end of the member. These joint
forces shall be determined usingthe maximum probablemo-
ment strengthsMpr of the member associated withthe range
of factored axial loads on the member. The member shears
need not exceedthose determined fromjoint strengths based
on the probable momentstrengthMpr, of the transversemem-
bers framing into the joint. In no case shall V, be less than the
factored shear determined byanalysis of the structure.
21.4.5.2 For determining the required transverse rein-
forcement in frame members in which the earthquake-induced
shear force calculated in accordance with 21.3.4.1 represents
one-half or more of total design shear, the quantity V, shall be
assumed to be zero if the factored axial compressive force in-
cluding earthquakeeffects is less than( A g f ;/20).
 NUCLEAR SAFETY STRUCTURESCODE 349-73

21.5Joints of frames
21.5.1-General requirements
215.1.1 Forces in longitudinal beam reinforcement at
the joint face shall be determined by assuming that the stress
in the flexural tensile reinforcement is 1.25fy.
215.1.2 Strength of joint shall be governed by the ap-
propriate strength reduction factors specified in 9.3.
215.1.3 Beam longitudinal reinforcement terminated in
a column shall be extended to the far face of the confined
column core and anchored in tension according to 21 5 4 and
in compression accordingto Chapter 12.
215.1.4 Wherelongitudinalbeamreinforcementex-
tends through a beam-column joint, the column dimension
21.5.4.2 For bar sizes No. 3 through No. 11, the devel-
opment length,fd, for a straight bar shall not be less than
(a) two-and-a-half (2.5)times the length required by
21S.4.1 if the depth of the concrete cast in one lift
beneath
the bar does not exceed 12 in. and (b) three-and-a half(3.5)
times the length required by 21.5.4.1 if the depth of the
concrete cast in one liftbeneath the bar exceeds 12 in.
21.5.4.3 Straight barsterminated at a joint shall pass
through the confined coreof a column or of a boundary
element. Any portion of the straight embedment length
not within the confined core shall be increased by a factor
of 1.6.

the amount required by 21.4.4.1 shall be provided where 21.6.2-Reinforcement

members frame into all four sides of joint
theand where each 21.6.2.1 The reinforcement ratio, P,,, for structural walls
member width is at least three-fourths the column width. At shall notbe less than 0.0025 along the longitudinal andtrans-
these locations, the spacing specified in 21.4.4.2(b)may be verseaxes. If thedesignshearforcedoesnotexceed
increased to 6 in. A~,,K, the minimum reinforcement for structural walls
215.2.3 Transverse reinforcement as required by 2 1.4.4 shall be in conformance with 14.3.The minimum reinforce-
shall be provided through the joint to provide confinement ment ratio for structural diaphragms shallbe in conformance
for longitudinal beam reinforcement outside the columncore with 7.12. Reinforcement spacing each way in structural
if such confinement is not provided by a beam framing into walls and diaphragms shall not exceed 18 in. Reinforcement
the joint. provided for shear strength shallbe continuous and shallbe
215.3-Shear strength distributed across the shear plane.
The nominal shear strengthof the joint shall not be taken 21.6.2.2 At least two curtains of reinforcement shallbe
greater thanthe forces specified below for normal weight ag- used ina wall if the in-plane factored shear force assigned to
gregate concrete. the wall exceedsM,, K.
For joints confined on all four faces ...............20 J K A j
21.6.2.3 Structural-truss elements, struts, ties, and col-
lector elements with compressive stresses exceeding 0.2.f:
For joints confined on three faces shall have special transverse reinforcement, as specified in
or on two opposite faces............................... 15K A 2 1.4.4, over the total length of the element. The trans- special
verse reinforcement is allowed to be discontinuedat a sec-
For others ........................................................ 12JKAj
tion where the calculated compressive stress is less than O. 15
A member that frames intoa face is considered to provide f: . Stresses shall be calculatedfor the factoredforces using
confinement to thejoint if at least three-quartersof the face a linearly elastic model and gross-section properties of the
of thejoint is covered by the framing member. A joint is con- elements considered.
sidered to be confined if such confining members frame into 21.6.2.4 Allcontinuousreinforcementinstructural
all facesof the joint. walls, diaphragms,trusses, struts, ties, chords, andcollector
215.4"Development length of bars in tension elements shallbe anchored or spliced in accordance with the
21.5.4.1 The development length, tdh, for a bar with a provisions for
reinforcement in
tension as Specified
standard 90-deg hook in normal weight-aggregate concrete in 21.5.4.
shall not be less than 8db, 6 in., and the length required by 21.6.3-Design forces
Eq. (21-5). The design shear force V, shall be obtained from the lat-
eral load analysisin accordance with the factored loads and
(21-5) combinations specifiedin 9.2.
2 1 . 6 . A h e a r strength
for bar sizes No. 3 through No. 11. 21.6.4.1 Nominal shear strength of structural walls and
The 90-deg hook shall be located within
the confined core diaphragmsshall be determinedusingeither21.6.4.2
of a column or of a boundary element. or 21.6.4.3.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
STDOACI
3YS-ENGL
Licensed by Information Handling Services
3777 m Obb2949 0538328 3 6 6 m

STD.AC1 349-ENGL L997
34974 AC1 STANDARD
21.6.4.2 Nominal shear strength V,,,of structural walls
and diaphragms shall be assumed not to exceed the shear
force calculated from
v, = Acv(2Jz + P"f$ (21-6)
21.6.43 For walls (diaphragms) and wall (diaphragm
segments having a ratio of (hw/tw)less than 2.0, nominal
shear strength of wall (diaphragm)shall be determined from
W.(21-7).
v, = Acv(acR
+ P&) (21-7)
where the coefficient a, varies linearly from 3.0 for
(hw/tw)= 1.5 to 2.0 for (hw/!,,,) = 2.0.
21.6.4.4 In21.6.4.3,valueof ratio (h used for de- the yield strength of the reinforcement. Welded splices and
termining V,, for segments of a wall or diaphragm shall be
the larger of the ratios for theentire wall (diaphragm) and the
segment of wall (diaphragm) considered.
21.6.4.5 Walls(diaphragms) shall have distributed
shear reinforcement providing resistance in two orthogonal
directions in the plane of the wall(diaphragm). If the ratio
(hw/tw) does not exceed 2.0, reinforcement ratio pv shall not
be less than reinforcement ratio P,,.
21.6.4.6 Nominal shear strengthof all wallpiers sharing
acommon lateral force shallnot be assumed to exceed
8ACv E where A,, is thetotal cross- sectional area and the
nominal shear strength of anyone of theindividualwall piers
shall notbeassumed to exceed lOA, whereAcP repre-
sents the cross-sectional area ofthe pier considered.
21.6.4.7 Nominal shear strength of horizontal wall seg-
ments shall not be assumed to exceed l M C pwhere ~ A,
represents the cross-sectional area of a horizontal wall segment.
21.6.5-Boundary elements for structural walls
21.6.5.1 Boundary elementsshall be provided at bound-
aries and edges around openings of structural walls when the
maximum extreme-fiber stress, corresponding to factored
forces including earthquake effect, exceeds 0.2f i unless the
entire wall is reinforced to satisfy 21.4.4.1 through 21.4.4.3.
The boundary element may be discontinued where the calcu- shall satisfy 21.3.2.1.
lated compressive stress is less than 0.15fi. Stresses shall
be calculated for the factored forces using linearly elastic
model and gross-section properties.
21.6.5.2 Boundary elements, where required, shall have
transverse reinforcement as specifiedin21.4.4.1through
2 1.4.4.3
21.6.5.3 Boundary elementsshall be proportioned to re-
sist all factored gravity loads onthe wall, including tributary
loads and self-weight, as well as the vertical force required
to resist overturning momentcalculated from factored forces
related to earthquake effect.
21.6.5.4 Transverse reinforcement in walls with bound-
ary elements shall be anchored within the confined core of
the boundary element to develop the specified yield strength mension of the column, and (c) 18 in.
fy of the transverse reinforcement.
21.6.5.5 Except when V,, in the plane ofthe wall is less
than A,,E , transverse reinforcement terminating at the
edges of structural walls without boundary elements shall
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
~~
0662949 0538129 2 T 2
have astandard hook engaging the edge reinforcement or the
edge reinforcement shall be enclosed in the U-stirrups hav-
ing the same size and spacing as, and spliced to, the trans-
verse reinforcement.
21.65.6 Welded spliced and mechanical connectionsof
longitudinal reinforcement of boundary elementsshall con-
form to 21.2.6.1.
21.6.6-Boundary elements of stnrcfuraldiaphragms
21.6.6.1 Boundary elements of structural diaphragms
shall be proportioned to resist the sum of the factored axial
force acting in the plane of the diaphragm andthe force ob-
tained from dividing the factored moment at the section by
the distance between the boundaryelementsof the dia-
phragm at that section.
21.6.6.2 Splices of tensile reinforcement in the bound-
aries and collector elements of all diaphragms shall develop
mechanical connectionsshall conform to 21.2.6.1.
21.6.7-Constru~tionjoints
21.6.7.1 All constructionjoints in walls and diaphragms
shall conform to 6.4 andcontact surfaces shall be roughened
as specified in 11.7.9.
21.6.4Discontinuous walls
Columns supporting discontinuous walls shall be rein-
forced in accordance with21.4.4.5.
21.7-Frame members not proportioned to resist
forces inducedby earthquake motions
21.7.1 Frame members assumed not to contribute to lateral
resistance shall be detailed according to 2 1.7.1.1or 2 1.7.1.2
depending on the magnitude of moments induced in those
members when subjected to twice the lateral displacement
under the factored lateral forces.
21.7.1.1 When the induced moment exceedsthe design
moment strength of the frame member, members with fac-
tored gravity axial forces not exceeding( A d i /lo)] shall sat-
isfy 21.3.2.1 and 21.3.4.1 and members with factored gravity
axial forces exceeding (AgfL /lo) shall satisfy21.4.4,
21.4.5.1, and21.5.2.1.
21.7.1.2 When the induced moment does not exceed the
design moment strength of the frame members, the member
21.7.2 All frame members with factored axial compressive
forces exceeding (AJL /lo)] shall satisfy the following spe-
cial requirements unless they comply with 21.4.4.
21.7.2.1 Ties shall have hooks not less than 135 deg
with extensions not less than six tie-bar diameters of 2.5 in.
Crossties, as defined inthis chapter are allowed.
21.7.2.2 The maximum tie spacing shall be so over a
length /o measured from the joint face. The spacing so shall
be not more than(a) eight diameters of the smallest longitu-
dinal bar enclosed, (b) 24 tie-bar diameters, and (c) one-half
the least cross-sectional dimensionof the column. The
length /o shall not be less than (a) one-sixth of the clear
height of the column, (b) the maximum cross-sectional di-
21.7.2.3 The first tie shall be within adistance equal to
O.%, from the face of the joint.
21.7.2.4 The tie spacing shall not exceed 2so in anypart
of the column.
 NUCLEAR SAFETY STRUCTURES CODE
APPENDIX A-Thermal Considerations
A.1-Scope
A.l.l Nuclear safety related reinforced concrete structures stiffness of the member and
shall conformto the minimum provisionsof this Code andto
the special provisions of this appendix for structural mem-
berssubjected to time-dependentandposition-dependentconditions
temperature variations.
A12 The provisions of this appendix apply to concrete
structures
which are subjected to normal
operating
condi-
tions as well as thermal accident conditions and which have
restraint such that thermal strains would result in thermal
stresses. concurrent
loads,
A.13 The design provisionsof this appendix are based on d) The coefficient of thermal expansion may be taken as
the strengthdesignmethod. The assumptions,principles,
and requirements specified in 10.1 and 10.2 are applicable
for both normal operating and accident conditions.
A.1.4 This appendix does not address temperature require- A.3.4 When thermal stressis combined with the stress due
ments during curing, nor does it address temperature and
shrinkage reinforcement.
A.2-Definitions
Base temperature-The temperature at which a concrete
member is cured.
distribution-The Of the total tem-
perature acrossa section at a point in time.
Mean temperature distribution-Auniformdistribution of
temperatureacross a sectionevaluated to be anaverage of
the with
distribution.
temperature
Gradient tempemture distribution-The temperature distri-
bution minusthe mean temperature distribution across
a sec-
tion at a point in time.
Thermal strain4train produced by thermal expansion or
contraction due to a thermal gradient and the difference be-
tween the base and mean temperature.
Thermal stress-Stress produced by restraint of thermal
strain.
A.3-General design requirements
A3.1 The effects of the gradient temperature distribution
and the difference between mean temperature distribution
and base temperature during normal operation or accident
conditions shallbe considered.
A.3.2 Time-dependent variationsof temperature distribu-
tions shall be considered in evaluating thermal strains for
both normal operatingconditions and accident conditions.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
1 347-ENGL
S T D - A CServices
Licensed by Information Handling L777
349-75
A 3 3 Thermal stress shall be evaluated considering the
the rigidity of the section and the
degree of restraint of the structure. The evaluationmay be
based on cracked section properties, provided the following
are met:
a) The tensilestressforanysectionexceeds the tensile
stress at which the sectionis considered cracked.
b) of internal forces and strains due to
cracking are included.
c) All asinspecified 9.2, are considered.
5.5 X 10" per deg F unless other values are substanti-
ated by "tests."
to other loads to determine a design stress, the magnitudeof
the design stress must not be less than the magnitudeof the
stress due to other loadings alone unless the following are
considered:
a) The effect Of Crachg in the tensile zone Of flexural
members on reduction of the flexural rigidity andon the
redistribution of stress,
b)Thereductionoflongtermstresses due to creep,and
c) Stress combinations that reduce the magnitude of the
stress due to other loadsutilizingactualtemperatures
andtemperaturedistributionswhichactconcurrently
loads.
the other
A.4-Concrete temperatures
A.4.1 The following temperature limitations are for nor-
mal operation or any other long term period. The tempera-
tures shall not exceed 150 F except for local areas, such as
around penetrations, which are allowed to have increased
temperatures notto exceed 200 F.
A.4.2 The following temperature limitations arefor acci-
dent or any other short term period.The temperatures shall
not exceed350F for the surface. However, local areas are al-
lowed to reach 650 F from steam or water jets in the eventof
a pipe failure.
A.43 Higher temperatures than those givenin A.4.1 and
A.4.2 above may be allowedfor concrete if tests are provid-
ed to evaluate the reduction in strength and
this reduction is
applied to design allowables.Also, evidence shall be provid-
edwhichverifiesthattheincreasedtemperatures do not
cause deterioration of the concrete either with or without
load.
0662747 0538L30 T l 4
 ~ _ _ _ _ ~
~
S T D - A C 1 349-ENGL 1777
349-76 AC1 STANDARD
APPENDIX B-Steel
B.0-Notation
( I = length of an anchor group, measured out to out of
bearing edges ofthe outermost anchor heads
(see Fig. B.4-2), in.
A b = bearing area of shear lug, sq. in.
A, = the tensile stress area for threaded anchors, the gross
area for anchors without threads, thelesser of the
gross area or the tensile stress area for anchors with
upset threads, in.2. Thetensile stress area of a
threaded anchor shall be taken as:
0.7845 D - -
09r
3 32
A , = reduction in effective stress area to account for lim-
ited depth ofconcrete beyond the bearing surface of
the embedment (see Fig. B.4-2), sq. in.
b = width of an anchorgroup, measured outto out of
bearing edges of the outermost anchor heads
(see Fig. B.4-2), in.
c = the compressive resultantforce between the embed-
ment and the concrete from factored moment and
factored axial load applied to the embedment
(see B.6.5.2.1), lb.
D = basic major diameterof threaded part,in.
f b = bearing strength for shear lug, psi
$c = specified compressivestrength of concrete, psi
fut = specified ultimate tensile strength of steel, psi
f y = specified yield strength ofsteel, psi
h = overall thickness of concrete member containing
embedment or height of shear lug, in.
Kc = confinement coefficient(see B.5.1.2.2)
Ld = embedment depth of anchor head measured from
attachment of anchor headto tensile stress
component, to the concrete surface, in.
m = minimum edgedistance from the center ofthe ten-
sile stress component or anchor head tothe edge of
the concrete (see Fig. B.4-l), in.
n = number of threads per in.
P, = factored external axial load on the anchorage
(see B.5.1.2.2), lb
Pd = design pullout strength of concrete in tension, lb
Py = tension strength of the tension anchors
(see B.5.1.2.2), lb
s = clear distance face-to-facebetween shear lugs, in.
U = required strength, to resist factored loads or related
internal moments andforces
$ = strength reduction factor, dimensionless
B. 1“Scope
B.l.l This appendix provides minimum requirementsfor
design and anchorage of steel embedments used to transmit
loads from attachments into reinforced concrete structures
by means of tension, bearing, shear, friction, or any combi-
nation permitted by this appendix.
Typical embedment details and concepts as referenced in
this appendix are shown inFig. B. 1- 1 and B.1-2.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
m Obb2949 0538131 950 m
Embedments
In addition to meeting these requirements consideration
shall be given to the effect of the forces applied to the em-
bedment onthe behavior ofthe overall structure.
B.1.2 The requirements for the attachment to the embed-
ment shall be in accordance with applicable codes and are
beyond the scope of this appendix.
B.1.3 Design limits less conservative than those Specified
in this appendix maybe used bythe Engineer if substantiated
by experimentalor detailed analytical investigation.
B.2-Definitions
A n c h o r a t e e l component used to transmit loads from the
attachment into the concrete. Anchors include, but are not
limited to, bolts, welded studs, threaded rods, bars, undercut
anchors, and expansionanchors.
Anchorage-The process of attaching a memberor object to
the concrete structure by means of an embedment, taking
into consideration those factors (e.g., depth of embedment,
edge distance, and spacing of anchors) which determinethe
load capacity of the anchorage system.
Anchor head“A nut, flat washer, plate, stud, or bolt head
used to transmit loads fromthe tensile strength component to
the concrete by bearing.
A#achment”Theattachment is thatstructureexternal to the sur-
faces of the embedment which transmits loads to the embedment
Embedment-The embedment is that steel component em-
bedded in the concrete used to transmit applied loads to the
concrete structure. Theembedmentmaybefabricatedof
plates, shapes, bolts, reinforcing bars, shear connectors, ex-
pansion anchors, inserts, or any combination thereof.
Expansion anchor-component thatisinstalledinahole
drilled in hardened concrete and then is expanded in order to
transfer loads into the concrete by direct bearing fiction.
and/or
Expansion mechanism-Amechanismused to transmit
load from the tensile stress component to the concrete when
used as part of an expansionanchor.
Grouted Embedments-An embedment located in a formed
or drilled hole in hardened concrete utilizing a grout to pro-
vide load transfer from the embedment to the concrete.
Inserts-commercially available, predesigned, and prefabri-
cated embedments installedprior to concrete placement which
are specifically designedfor attachment of bolted connections.
Strength, design-Nominal strength multiplied
by
a
strength reduction factor $.
Strength, nominu-Strength of a connection calculated in
accordancewiththe provisions andassumptionsof the
strength design method ofthis code beforeapplicationof any
strength reduction factors.
Tensile stress component-That part of the embedment at-
tached to the anchor head or expansion mechanism used to
transmit tensile loads to the concrete.
 NUCLEAR SAFETY STRUCTURES CODE 349-77

COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute

Licensed by Information Handling Services
 - ~~~
S T D n A C I 349-ENGL 1997
34978
6.3-General requirements and loading
combinations
B.3.1 The embedment and surroundingconcrete or grout
shall be designed fortransmittingto the concrete structure all
loads used inthe design of theattachment.Assumptions used
in distributing loads within the embedment shall be consis-
tent with those usedin the design of the attachment.
B.3.2 Reactions onthe embedment due to individual loads
such as dead, live (including vibratory loads), thermal, seis-
mic, and accident loads shall be considered. The loading
combinations for embedment design shall be in accordance
with 9.2 ofthis code.
B.33 Material and testing requirements for embedment
steel shall be specified by theEngineer to ensure that the em-
bedment design is compatible with the intended function of
the attachment.
B.3.4 The design strength of embedment materials may be
increased in accordance with Appendix C for embedments
subject to impactive and impulsiveloads.
B.3.5 The strength of embedmentsas affected by the size
and grade of steel, spacing, and depth of embedment and any
concrete dimensions which limit or restrict the transfer of
loads from steel toconcrete shall be considered as defined in
B.4, B.5, and B.6.
B.3.6 Plastic deformation ofthe embedment is permitted
for impactive and impulsive loading providedthe strength
of the embedment is controlled by the strength of the em-
bedment steel as specified in B.5. For these conditions a
maximum ductility ratio of 3 may be considered. The def-
inition of ductility ratio shall be asdefined in Appendix C .
B.3.7 A combination of bearingand shear friction mech-
anisms shall notbeused to develop the design shear
strength defined in accordance with 9.3 of this code. The
available confining force afforded by the tension anchors
in combination with external loads can, however, be uti-
lized in determining the shear capacity of anchorages with
shear lugs.
6.4-Design requirements for concrete
B.4.1 The design provisions of this appendix
the strength designmethod. The assumptions, principles,
and requirementsof the code are applicable for all load com-
binations except as modified herein.
B.4.2-Tension
The design pullout strength of concrete Pd for any embed-
ment shall be based on a uniform tensile stress of 4 @ z
acting on aneffective stress area which is defined by the pro- transfer is accomplished from steel to concrete within the
jected area of stress cones radiating toward the attachment
from the bearing edge of theanchor heads. Theeffective area
shall be limited by overlappingstress cones, by the intersec-
tion of the cones withconcrete surfaces, by the bearing area
of anchor heads, andby the overall thickness of the concrete
(see Fig. B.4-1 and B.4-2). The inclination angle for calcu-
lating the projected area shall be 45deg.
The strength reduction factor$I shall be as follows:
a) Embedments anchored beyond the member far face
reinforcement ..........................................................
b) Embedments anchored in a compression zone of a
member ................................................................... 0.85
c) Embedmentsanchored in a tensionzoneof a member
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
~
0662949 0538333 723
AC1 STANDARD
where the concrete tension stress (based on an
uncracked section) at the concrete surface is less than
5 E for the loadcombinationsandload factors
defined in 9.2........................................................... 0.85
d) All other embedments ............................................. 0.65
B.4.3"Shear
The design shear strength of embedments subject to shear
shall satisfy the requirements of B.5.1.2 and B.6.2.2.
B.4.4-Reinforcement
If the requirements of B.5 are not satisfied, reinforcement
shall be provided to develop the required strength. Rein-
forcement requirementsshall be in accordance withapplica-
ble sections of this code and placedto prevent failure of the
concrete in tension.
BASBearing
B.4.5.1The bearing requirements of 10. I5 or 18.13 of this
Code shall apply to the average bearing stress at an anchor
head exceptas permitted inB.4.5.2.
The design bearing strength used for concrete or grout
placed against shear lugs shall not exceed@(1.3f;Ab) using
a strength reduction factor @ of 0.70. For grouted installa-
tions, the value off: shall be the compressive strength of the
grout or the concrete whichever is less.
B.4.5.2 For bolts meeting the requirements of ASTM
Specifications A 307, A 325,or A 490or if the anchor head
at the base of the tensile stress component satisfies the fol-
lowing conditions: (a) The bearing area of the anchor head
including the area of the tensile stress componentis at least
2.5 times the area of the tensile stress component. (b) The
thickness of the anchor headis atleast 1.O times the greatest
dimension from the outer most bearing edge of the anchor
head to the face of the tensile stress component. (c) The bear-
ing area of the anchor headis approximately evenly distrib-
uted aroundthe perimeter of the tensile stress component.
6.5-Anchorage requirements
85.1 Anchorage design shall be contmlled by the strength of
are based on embedment steel unless otherwise specified in this appendix.
B.5.1.1-Tension
Steel strength controls when the designpullout strength
of the concretePd as determined in B.4.2 exceeds the mini-
mum specified tensile strength of the tensile stress compo-
nent (based on fut) of the embedment steel, and full load
depth of the anchorage by oneof the following methods:
a) An anchor head at the base of the tensile stress com-
ponents
which satisfies the requirements of
Section B.4.5.2. To prevent failure due tolateral burst-
ing forces at anchor heads, the minimum side cover
distance m shall be determined such that the lateral
concrete design strength (based on a uniform tensile
stress of 4 0 acting on an effective area, includ-
ing overlapping stress cones, defined by projecting a
0.85 45 deg cone from the anchor head to the free surface)
exceeds the lateral bursting force unless the require-
ments of B.4.4 are met. The $ factor shall be taken as
0.85.
 ~~ ~ ~ ~~ ~~ ~

S T D - A C 1 349-ENGL L997 Obb2949 0538334 bbT m

NUCLEAR SAFETY STRUCTURESCODE 349-79

I t

i
I \
f I / ! \ h

3
I
I-n

n ,

I-
v)

ff

v)
W
z 1
W

Ou
VI
W

t;
u
l
W
!L
t; ?

@
4
L
*r
4

COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute

Licensed by Information Handling Services
 ~~~
STD.AC1 399-ENGL L997
349-80
b)Reinforcing bars withdevelopment lengths in accor-
dance with the requirements of Chapter 12, for anchor
steel composed ofreinforcement.
B5.1.2-Shear
BJ.l.2.l-BoIts, studs, or bars
Bolts, studs, or bars shall meet the requirements of
B.5.1.1. The minimum edge distance m for shear loading to-
warda free edge shall be suchthat the concretedesign
strength (based on auniform tensile stress of 4$ acting
on an effective area defined by projecting 45 a deg half-cone
to the free surface from the centerline of the tensile stress
component at the shearing place) exceeds the ultimate shear
strength of the bolts, studs, or bars (based onfut).
B5.1.2.2-Shear lugs
The shear strength of groutedor cast-in-place anchor-
ages with shearlugs shall include consideration of the bear-
ing strength ofthe concrete or grout placed against the shear
lugs, the shear strength of the concrete or grout placed be-
tween shear lugs and the confinement afforded by the ten-
sion anchors in combination with externalloads. Shear loads
toward free edges and displacement compatibility between
shear lugs shall be considered.
When multiple shear lugs are used to establish the
design shear strength in a given direction, the magni-
tude of the allotted shear to each lug shall be in direct
proportion to the total shear, the number of lugs, and
the shear stiffness of each lug.
For shearlugs bearing in thedirection of a free edge, the
design shear strength for each lug shall be determined
based on a uniform tensile stress 441 of E
acting on an
effective stress area defined by projecting a45 deg plane
from the bearing edges of the shear lug to the free sur-
face unless the requirements of B.4.4 are met. Bearing
area of theshear lug shallbe excluded from the projected
+
area. The factor shallbe taken as 0.85.
B.5.13 For combined tension and shear, the depth of
embedment shall be in accordance with B.5.1.1 andthe min-
imum edgedistance in accordance with B.5.1.2.1.
B.5.1.4 Where reinforcement is providedin accordance
with B.4.4, the minimum edge distance shall notbe less than
one-third that required by B.5.1.2. The reinforcement shall
also satisfy the concrete cover requirements in 7.7 of this
code.
B.6-Design requirements for embedment steel
B.6.1 Design strength provided by the embedment steel in
terms of flexure, axial load, shear, and torsion, shall be taken
as the nominalstrength calculated in accordance withthe re-
quirements and assumptions of this section, multipliedby a
strength reduction factor $.
+
B.6.2 Strength reduction factor shall be as follows:
B.6.2.1 Flexure andor axial load ............................
B.6.2.2 Shear and torsion........................................ 0.85
B.6.3 Embedment materials other than reinforcing bars
shall have a minimum elongation of 14 percent in 2 inches
when tested in accordance withASTM A 370.
Embedment materials without a distinct yield point shall
be permitted. For suchmaterials the yield strength&shall be
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
~
m 0662949 0538335 5Tb m
AC1 STANDARD
defined as the 0.2 percent strain offset method in
ASTM A370.
B.6.4 Anchors that incorporate a reduced section in the
load path shall satisfy one of the following conditions:
a) The ultimate tensile strength of the reduced section
shall be greater than the yield strength of the unre-
duced section.
b) For bolts, the length of thread in the load path shall be
at least two anchor diameters.
B.6.5-Anchors
Anchors shall be designed for tension and shear loads in
accordance with B.6.5.1, B.6.5.2 and B.6.5.3.
B.6.5.1-Tension
The nominal tensile strength of an anchor shall befyA,.
B.6.5.243hear
The nominal shear strength attributed to anchors shall
be determined by B.6.5.2.1 or B.6.5.2.2, whichever is appli-
cable.
B.6.5.2.1 For connections withthe contact surface of
the baseplate flush with the surface of the concrete, the nom-
inal shear strength of an anchorshall be .................070fyA,
For built-up grout pads, the nominal shear strength shall
be multiplied by.............................................................. 0.80
Friction between the baseplate and concrete may be con-
sidered to contribute to the nominal shear strength of the
connection. The nominal shear strength resulting from fric-
tion between the baseplate and concrete (i.e., without any
contribution from anchors) maybe taken as 0.40C.
B.6.5.2.2 For connections withthe contact surface of
the baseplate below the surface of the concrete, the shear-
friction provisions of 11.7 of this code (as modified by this
section) shall be used. The shear-frictioncoefficient shall be
as follows:
Baseplates without shearlugs .......................................... 0.9
Baseplates with shear lugs which are designed
to remain elastic ............................................................... 1.4
B.6.5.3-Combined tension and shear
B.6.53.1 The interaction of tension andshear for an-
chors designed.in accordancewithB.6.5.1andB.6.5.2.1
(shear transfer by anchorbearing) shall be assumed to be lin-
ear (additive) or elliptical.
B.6.53.2 For anchors designed in accordance with
B.6.5.1 and B.6.5.2.2 (shear transfer by shear-friction), the
area required for tension due to applied load and thearea re-
quired for tension due toshear-friction shall be additive.
B.Q.6-Structuralshapes, fabricated shapes, and
shear lugs
The design strength of embedded structural shapes, fabri-
cated shapes, and shear lugs shall be determined using a steel
+
stress of @ fy, where shall be taken as 0.9 for tension, com-
pression and bending,and 0.55 for shear.
0.90
B.7-Expansion anchors
This section provides minimum requirements for the de-
sign oftypical expansion anchors used in concrete structures
and does not restrictthe use of other expansion anchors pro-
vided the expansion anchors are designed and tested in ac-
cordance with the requirements of this section.
 CODESTRUCTURES
SAFETY NUCLEAR
yB.7.1.2-Design
requirements
B.7.1-Design
Expansion anchorsshall be designed to assure that the de-
sign strength of concrete for a given expansion anchor or
group of expansion anchorsis greater than the strength of the
anchor steel except as permitted in B.7.2. The requirement
shall be met by satisfying the requirements of B.7.1.1 or
B.7.1.2.
B.7.1.1-Designbyanalysis
Tension: The design pullout strengthof concrete Pd
shall be as defined in B.4.2 except that the effective
stress area shall be defined by the projected area of the
stress cone radiating toward the concrete surface from
the innermost expansion contact surface between the
expansionanchorand the drilled hole.Refer to Fig.
B.7-1 for typical details. The design pullout strength of
concrete shall be equal to or greater than the minimum
specified tensile strength or average tensile strength if a
minimum is not defined for the expansion anchor. The
minimum edge distance shall be in accordance withthe
requirement of B S . 1.1(a).
Shear: Expansion anchors subject to shear shall meet
the requirementsof B.5.1.2.1.
For combined tension and shear, the depth of embed-
ment shall be in accordance with B.7.1.l(a) and the
minimum edgedistance in accordance with B .7.1.1 (b).
The design requirements for embedment steel shall be
in accordance with B.6.0.
-
SF1 F-DRII I ING
WEDGEANCHOR
Fig. B. 7-1-Typical details of expansion anchors
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
34981
Tests shall be conducted to verify that the concrete will
develop the Steel strength of the expansion anchor. Design
bY test results shall be restricted to tests that are representa-
tive ofthe anchor spacing and load aPPlication.
B.7.1.3Strength reduction factors
The requirements of B.6 shall apply except that the $I fac-
tors
.- -for. expansion
- - - anchors shall be 0.9 times the values spec-
ified in B.6.2.
B.7.2-Alternative design requirements
For expansion anchors that do not meet the requirement of
B.7.1, the design strengthshall be 0.33 times the average ten-
sion and shear test failure loads. The averagetest failure load
shall be equal to the average of the test loads carried by test
anchors at failure (maximum load) or at a magnitudeof dis-
placement of test anchorsas specified by the Engineer.
B.73 A single expansion anchor used to anchor an attach-
ment shall be designed for one-half ofthe design strengthde-
fined herein.
B.7.LTesting
B.7.4.1 Expansion anchors designed in accordance with
B.7.1.1 or B.7.1.2 shall be tested to verify the ability of the
expansion mechanism to develop the tensile strength of the
tensile stress component. Expansion anchors designed in ac-
cordance withB.7.2 shall be tested to determine the average
test failure load. Tests shall be conducted by a testing agency
other than the expansion anchor manufacturer and shall be
certified by aprofessionalEngineer withfull descriptionand
details of the testing program, procedures,results, and con-
clusions.
B.7.4.2 The expansion mechanism ofthe expansion an-
chor shall be tested for the installed condition by one ofthe
following methods:
a) The mechanism shall beactuatedandtestedduring
installation bypreloadingtheexpansionanchor to a
minimum valueas specified bythe Engineer.
b) A random selection of the installed expansion anchors
shall be load testedto a minimumof 100 percent ofthe
designstrength.The testing programshall be estab-
lished by the Engineer.
B.7.5-Expansion anchor selection
The Engineer shall review the expansion anchor design
features, failure modes, test results, and installation proce-
dures prior to selecting a specific expansion anchor for an
application.Expansion anchorsshall not be usedto resist vi-
bratoryloadsunless tests are conducted to verifytheadequa-
cy of the specific expansion anchor and application. In the
selection of expansion anchors, consideration shall be given
to expansion anchor performance in cracked concrete.
B.8-lnserts
Concrete inserts shall be specifiedinaccordancewith
B.6.1 and tested in accordance with B.7.4.1.
B.8.l-Design requirements
When inserts cannot be designed to meet the requirements
of B.4, B.5, and B.6, the design strengthshall be basedon ac-
tual test data of tests performed on inserts embedded in con-
crete. The tests shall cover thefull range of possible loading
conditions.
 ~ ~~~
S T D - A C 1 349-ENGL 1997
34482 AC1 STANDARD
B.8.2Strength reduction factor
When inserts cannot be designed to meet the requirements
of B.4, B.5, andB.6, a Cp factor of 0.5 shall be applied to the
average test failure loads in determining designstrength.
B.9-Grouted embedments
B.9.1 Grouted embedments shall meet the applicable re-
quirements of B.4, B.5 and B.6.
B.9.2 For general grouting purposes the material require-
ments for cement grout shall be in accordance with Chapter
3 of this code. Special grouts used to achievecertain proper-
ties such as high strength, low shrinkage, or expansion shall
be the responsibility of the Engineer and specified in con-
tract documents.
B.9.3 Grouted embedments shall be tested to verify an-
chorage strength. Grouted embedments installed in tension
zones ofconcrete members shall be capable of sustaining de-
sign strength in cracked concrete. Tests shall be conducted
by an independent testing agency and shall be certified by a
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
~ ~~~ ~
0662949 0538337 379
professional Engineer withfull description and details of the
testing programs, procedures, results, and conclusions.
B.9.4 Grouted embedmentsshall be tested for the installed
condition by testing randomly selected grouted embedments
to a minimum of 100 percent of the required strength. The
testing program shall be established by the Engineer.
B.95 The tests required byB.9.3 and B.9.4 may be waived
by the Engineer if tests and installation data are available to
insure that the grouted embedmentwill function as designed
or if the load transfer through the grout is by direct bearing
or compression.
B.l &Fabrication and installation
Welding of attachments to large embedments shall be in
accordance with good practice to avoid excessive expan-
sion of the embedment which could result in detrimental
spalling or cracking of the concrete or excessive stress in
the embedment.

- ~~ ~
S T D - A C 1 349-ENGL 1 9 9 7
NUCLEAR SAFETY STRUCTURES
349-83
APPENDIX C-Special Provisions
for impulsive and Impactive Effects
C.0-Notation
Ac = area of core of spirally reinforced column mea-
sured to the outside diameter of the spiral, sq in.
Ach = area of rectangular core of column measured out-
to-out of hoop, sq in.
A, = gross area of section, sq in.
A, = area of tension reinforcement within the width b,
sq in.
A i = area of compression reinforcement within the
width b, sq in.
b = width of compressionface, in.
c = distance from extreme compressive fiber to neutral
axis at ultimate strength, in.
d = effective depth ofsection (distance from extreme
compressive fiberto centroid of tensile reinforce-
ment), in.
f: = specified compressive strength of concrete, psi.
fy = specified yieldstrength of nonprestressed rein-
forcement, psi
h = overall thickness of member,in.
Gr = moment ofinertia of crackedsection transformed
to concrete
z, = moment ofinertia of gross concrete section about
centroidal axis, neglecting reinforcement
l / h = maximum unsupportedlength of rectangular hoop
measured between perpendicularlegs of the hoop
or supplementary crossties, in.
re = rotational capacity, radians
R = resistance (Le., load capacity)
R , = maximum resistance
Sh = center-to-center spacing of hoops,in.
Fd = ductility ratio, dimensionless
x, = maximum acceptable displacement
xy = displacement at effective yield point
p = reinforcementratio = A, I bd
p ' = reinforcement ratio = A 5 / bd
C.l-Scope
C.l.l Nuclear safety related concrete structures shall be
designed for impulsive and impactiveloads using this code
and the specialprovisions of this appendix. These loads must
be combined withother loads in accordance with 9.1 of this
code andin accordance with requirements ofC.8 of this ap-
pendix. Impactive and impulsive effects are treated separate-
ly herein because of the nature of the effects as well as the
response characteristics of the structural elements subjected
to these loads.
C.1.2 The provisions of this appendix applyto those struc-
tural elements directly affected by the impactive and impul-
sive loads and wherefailure of the structural elements must
be precluded.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
= Ob62949
0538138 205 W
CODE
C.13 Applicable theoretical evidence
or exDerimental
may be used to justify requirements i s s conservative than
those of this appendix.
C.1.4 Impactive loads are time-dependent loads due to
collisionof masses which are associated withfinte amounts
of kinetic energy. Impactiveloading may be defrned in terms
of time-dependent force or pressure. Impactive loads to be
considered shall include, but notbe l i i t e d to, the following
types of loading:
a) Tornado-generated missiles
b)Whippingpipes
c) Aircraft missiles
d) Fuel cask drop
e) Other internal and external missiles
C.15 Impulsive loads are time-dependent loads which are
notassociatedwith collision ofsolidmasses.Impulsive
loads to be considered shall include, but notbe limited to, the
following types of loading:
a)Jetimpingement
b) Blast pressure
c) Compartment pressurization
d) Pipe-whip restraint reactions
C.2-Dynamic strength increase
C.2.1 Dynamic increase factors (DIR appropriate for the
strain rates involvedmay be applied to static material
strengths of steel and concrete for purposes of determining
section strength butshall not exceed the following:
Material DIF
Reinforcing steel
fy = 40 ksi .................................................................. 1.20
f,,= 50 ksi .................................................................. 1.15
f,,= 60 ksi .................................................................. 1.10
Prestressing steel ............................................................ 1.00
Concrete
Axial and flexural compression................................. 1.25
Shear .......................................................................... 1.10
C.3-Deformation
CA1 Permissible ductility ratio &jis defined as the ratio
ofthemaximum acceptable displacement X, to the dis-
placement at the effective yield pointXyof the structural el-
ement (see Fig. C.3.1). In order to establish the effective
yield displacement, the cross sectional moment of inertia
shall be taken as0.5 (Zg +Zer). In addition to the deformation
limits imposed under C.3.3 andC.3.4, the maximum defor-
mation shall not result inthe loss of intended function of the
structural element nor impair the safety related function of
other systems and components.
 34984
STDmACI 349-ENGL L997 =
AC1 STAN1
Rm
Q:
L
0)
o one-third of that which would produce balanced condi-
C
O tions,whichever is smaller, the permissible ductility
c
.-u)
B c) The permissible ductility ratio shall vary linearly from
XY Xm
Displacement, X
Fig. C.3.l-Idealized displacement-resistance-ductility
relationship
C.3.2 For impulsive loads, resistance available for im-
pulsive loads shall be at least 20 percent greater than the
magnitude of any portion ofthe impulsive loading which
is approximately constant for a time equal to or greater
than the first fundamentalperiodof the structural ele-
ment.Consideration shall also be given to the require-
ments of C.8.
C.3.3 For beams, walls, and slabs where flexure controls
design, the permissible ductility ratio shall either be taken as
O.O5/(p - P’) not to exceed 10, or shall be determined from
the rotational capacity as defined in C.3.4.
C.3.4 When flexure controls design, the rotational capaci-
ty re in radians ofanyyieldhinge shall be limited to
0.0065 ( d c ) but shall not exceed 0.07 radians.
C.3.5 The permissible ductility ratio in flexure shall not
exceed 3.0 for loads suchas blast and compartmentpressur-
ization which could affect the integrity of the structure as a
whole.
C.3.6 For flexure to control the design, thus allowing the
ductility ratios or rotational capacities given in C.3.3 and
C.3.4 and C.3.5 to be used, the load capacity of a structural
element in shear shall be at least 20 percent greater than the
load capacity inflexure, otherwise, the ductility ratios given
in C.3.7 or C.3.9 shall be used.
C.3.7 For beams, walls, andslabs where shear controls de-
sign, the permissible ductility ratio shall be taken as:
a) For shear carried by concrete alone, the permissible duc-
tility ratio shall be 1.3.
b) For shear carried by concrete and stirrups or bent bars,
the permissible ductility ratio shall be 1.6, or
c) For shear carried completely by stirrups, the permissible
ductility ratio shall be 3.0.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
C3.8 For beam-columns, walls, and slabs carrying axial
compression loads and subject to impulsive or impactive
loads producing flexure, the permissible ductility ratio in
flexure shall be as follows:
a) When compressioncontrols the design, as defined by an
interaction diagram, the permissible ductility ratio shall
be 1.3.
b) When the compression load doesnot exceed O. If’& or
ratio shall be as given in C.3.3 or C.3.4.
1.3tothatgiven in C.3.3 or C.3.4 for conditions
between those specified in (a) and (b).
C3.9 For axial compressive impulsiveor impactive loads,
the permissible axial ductility ratio shall be 1.3.
C.4-Requirements to assure ductility
C.4.1 The minimum specified concrete strengthf’, shall
be 3000 psi. The maximum specified yield strength of re-
inforcementfy shall be 60,000 psi. Grade and area of flex-
ural reinforcementused shall be only that specified;
substitution of higher grades or larger areas shall not be
permitted.
C.4.2 The maximum value of(p - P’) shall not exceed0.5
times the ratio producing balancedconditions as defined by
10.3.2 and 10.3.3. Both top and bottom reinforcement for
beams shall consist of not less than two bars and shall have
a minimum p of 200/fy throughout the entire length of the
beam.
C.4.3 At least one-third of the larger amount of the ten-
sion reinforcement required at either end ofa member shall
be continuous throughout the length of the member.At
least one-third of the maximum tension reinforcement re-
quired in the mid-region of a member shall be continuous
throughout the length of the member andfully developed in
tension beyond the face of the supports to its specified yield
strength. Theserequirementsapply to each direction of
two-way structural elements.
C.4.4 The vertical reinforcement ratio in columnsshall be
limited to a minimum of 1.0 percent and a maximum of
6.0 percent. 10.8.4 does not apply.
C.4.5 Confinement reinforcement in columns consisting
of spiral or hoop reinforcement shall be suppled above and
below connections over a minimum length fromthe face of
the connection at least equal to the overall depth h (h being
the longer dimension in the case of rectangular columns or
the diameter of a round column), 18 in., and onesixth of the
clear height ofthe column.
C.45.1 Where a spiral is used, the volumetric ratio px
shall be not less than indicated by Eq. (10-5), but not less
than o.lzfyfy.
 C.4.5.2 Where rectangular hoop reinforcementis used,
the required areaof the bar shallbe computed by:
(C.4-1)
where pr is the volumetric ratio required by C.4.5.1 with
Ach substituted for A , and withfy the yield strength of the
hoop reinforcement. The center-to-center spacing between
hoops or the pitch of continuous hoops shall not exceed 4
in. Minimum bar size shall be that required for ties by
7.10.5.1. Supplementary crossties of the same bar size as
the hoop may be usedto reduce the unsupported length, 4,.
Each end of the supplementary crossties shall engage the
periphery hoop with a standard semicircular hook, and
shall be secured to a longitudinal bar to prevent displace-
ment of the crosstie during construction. Minimum cover
of supplementary crossties reinforcement shall be in.
C.5-Shear strength
The shear strength of slabs and walls under local loads
shall consider both punching shear adjacent to the load and crete structural elements must be precluded, the concrete
reaction shear at supports. Local loads may be impulsive or
impactive, except that for certain impactive loads satisfac-
tion of criteria for perforation replaces punching shear re-
quirements (seeC.7.2.3).
Theshearstrength of concretebeams and columns
shall be determined in accordance with 11.1 to 11.5 of
this code increased by the DIF of C.2. These provisions
shall also apply in cases of reaction shear at supported
edges of slabs and walls. Punching shear strengthof slabs
and walls shall be determined in accordance with 1 1.11
of this code, increased by the DIF of C.2.
C.6-Impulsive effects
C.6.1 Impulsive loads shallbe considered in combination
with other loadsas required by 9.1 of this code andin accor-
dance with C.8 of this appendix.
C.6.2 Whenreinforcedconcretestructuralelements or
systems of elements are subjected to impulsive loads, the
structural responsemay be determined by oneof the follow-
ing methods:
a) The dynamic effects oftheimpulsiveloads may be con-systems
sidered by calculating a dynamic load factor (DLF). The
resistanceavailable for theimpulsiveloadmust be at
least equal to the peak of the impulsive load transient
multiplied by the DLF.
The calculation of the DLF shall be based on the duc-
tility criteria in C.3 and the dynamic characteristics of
the structureand impulsive load transient.
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
b) The dynamic effects of impulsive loads may be consid-
ered by using impulse, momentum, and energy balance
techniques. Strain energy capacity is limited by the duc-
tility criteria in C.3.
c) The dynamic effects of impulsive loads may be consid-
ered by performing a time-historydynamicanalysis.
Mass and inertial properties shallbe included as well as
the nonlinearstiffnessesofstructuralelementsunder
consideration. Simplified bilinear definitionsof stiffness
are acceptable.
Maximum predicted responseis governed bythe ductility
criteria in (2.3.
C.7"lmpactive effects
C.7.1 Design for impactive loads shall satisfy the criteria
for both local effects and for overall structural response.
C.7.2 Local impact effects may include penetration, perfo-
ration, scabbing, and punching shear.
C.7.21 The penetration depth and required concrete
thickness to prevent perforation shall be based upon applica-
ble formulas or pertinent test data.
When perforation of con-
thickness shall be at least 20 percent greater than that re-
quired to prevent perforation.
C.7.2.2 Concrete structural elements protectingre-
quired system or equipment which could be damaged by
secondary missiles (fragments of scabbed concrete) shall
be designed to prevent scabbing, or a properly designed
scab shield shall be based on applicable formulas or perti-
nent test data. In the absence of scab shields, the concrete
thickness shall be at least 20 percent greater than that re-
quired to prevent scabbing.
C.7.23 When it canbe demonstrated by applicable for-
mulas or pertinent test data that the concrete thickness is at
least 20 percent greaterthan that requiredto prevent perfora-
tion and hence punching shear failure, design for punching
shear in accordance withCS is not required.
C.7.2.4 For concrete slabs or walls subjected to missile
impact effects where the concrete thickness is less than
twice that required to prevent perforation, the minimum
percentage of reinforcement shall be 0.2 percent each way,
each face.
C.7.3 When reinforcedconcretestructuralelementsor
of elementsaresubjectedtoimpactiveloads,the
structural response may be determined by the methods de-
s c r i in~C.6.2.
C.8-Impactive
impulsive
and loads
Impactive and impulsive loads must be considered con-
current with other loads (e.g., dead and live load) in deter-
mining the required resistance of structural elements.
 AC1 STANDARD

APPENDIX D-SI Metric Equivalents

of US. Customary Units
The following is not part of this standard, but SI metric
equivalents of all the dimensional values in this code and
conversions of nonhomogeneous equations are given below
for convenience of users.
In this tabulation, SI metric units are based on the stan-
dards given inASTh4 E380-76 and the preferred unitsthat in
standard. These metric units are those conformingto the re-
quirements of the U.S. Metric StandardsAct of 1975.

METRIC EQUIVALENTS OF DIMENSIONAL UNITS

Moment Area of inertia

Metric U.S. customary U.S.customary
5OOof? 465 m2 1 in.4 416,000 mm4

Temperature Weight (density)

U.S. customay,
deg F
40
Metric,
deg c
4.4
U.S. customary;
wft3

1
I
I
Metric,
kg/m3
16
50 I 10 70 1120
60 16 90 I 1440
80 27 115 I 1840
90 I 32 120 1920
95 35 2320 145
150 66 155 I 2420

Length
U.S. customary II U S . customary Metric Metric
1 in. 25.4 mm* 6 in. 152 mm
0.15 in. 3.8 mm II 8 in. 203 mm
in. mm I 6.4 II 10 in. I 254 mm
I II
~~

3Ie in. 9.5 mm 12 in. T 305 mm

in. I 13 mm II 16 in. I
mm 406

3 ~ 4in. 19 mm 20 in. 508 mm

in.
1-Il4 32 mm 24 in. 610 mm
1-Il2
in. 38 mm 30 in. 762 mm
2 in. 51 mm lft 0.3048 m’
2-’12 in. 64 mm 3ft 0.9m
3 in. 76 mm 10 ft 3.0m
3-112in. 89 mm 12 ft 3.7 m
4 in. 102 mm 15 R 4.6 m
5 in. I 127 mm II 25 ft I 7.6 m

S T D - AInstitute
COPYRIGHT American Concrete C 1 349-ENGL L997 0662949 0538141 8 T T W
Licensed by Information Handling Services
 ~~~ ~

STD.AC1 347-ENGL 17qï’

0662747 0538342 736
NUCLEAR SAFETY STRUCTURES CODE 349-87

METRIC EQUIVALENTSOF DIMENSIONAL UNITS(continued)

Stress (pressure)
U.S. customaty I SI-Metric II U.S. customary I SI-Metric
psi kPa psi MPa
1 6.9 1,o00 6.89

~
50 I 340 II 1,200 I 8.27
60
80 I 550 II 3,000 I 20.68
120 I 830 II 3.500 I 24.13
psi I MPa II 4,000 I 27.58
145 1 .o 4,500 31 .O3
150 1 .O3 5,000 34.47
200 I 1.38 Il 9,000 I 62.10
250 1.72 20,000 137.9
300 2.07 24,000 165.5
350 I 2.41 II 30,000 I 206.8
400 2.76 40,000 275.8
500 3.45 50,000 344.7
550 I 3.79 II 60,000 I 413.7
600 4.14 80,000 551.6
700 I 100.000 4.83 690.0
800 I 5.52 II 29,000,000 I 200,000
900 6.21

Load Volume
U.S. customary SI-Metric U.S.customary Metric
1 Ib 4.5N 1 in? 41 mm4
6,000
9000 Ib 40,000N
1 lblft I 14.6 Nlm
1 lb& I 47.9Pa

SI METRIC EQUIVALENTSOF LIMITING VALUES

Units
US.customary Metric
sq in. mm2
Area
sq ft m2
Density Ib per CU R kg/m3
Load Ib N
In. mm
Size
ft m
Stress DSi MPa

COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute

Licensed by Information Handling Services
 34948

SI METRIC EQUIVALENTS OF LIMITING VALUES(continued)

Stress

US. customary
expression
Metric
equivalent U.S. customary
expression
Metric
equivalent

Section 8.5.1 Section 11.6.6.2

33 JJC w5%.043 I+" 1 Nu

500A ,
1 + 0.29-Nu
A,

57, O
oo
h 4730,/f i Section 11.7.5

800A, 5.5 A ,
Table 9.5(b)-Footnote
Section 12.2.2
0.4 + - fY f,
0.4 + -
100, o00 690 b fy 0.019Abfy

Table 9.5(ckFootnote Jx .JTc

800 - 0.005f y 1 1 0 4 - f, 0 . W 4 d bf y
1100 1518
0.085f y
Section 10.51

200 1.4
Ak
-
f, fY
0.11f, 34f y
-
Section 10.6.4 .JTc Jx
175 kips per in. 30.6 MN/m 0.36dbf y
145 kips per in. 25.4 MN/m A k

COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute

Licensed by Information Handling Services
 SI METRIC EQUIVALENTSOF LIMITING VALUES(continued)

U.S. customary
expression
Metric
equivalent U.S. customary
expression
Metric
equivalent

Section 12.2.3 Section 12.8.2

414
"2 6 0 , o00 "2
fY fY

6.7 Jf I 0.56& Aw f y
2.4- -
c
J ct f Cl sw

Section 12.9
Section 12.3.2

0.02f ydb 0.24f ydb

h h Section 12.10.1

2
(f ps - j f s e P b
Table 12.5.1-6 values Section 12.11.5.2

60bws 0.41bws
U.S. customary
fY f Y

Section 12.17.1
220 I 18
0.0005f ,,db 0.073f ydb
330 I 27
360 I 30 Sections 17.5.2.1 and 17.5.2.2
420 35 80bvd 0.55 b,d
450 37
480 40 Section 17.5.2.3
540 I 45 500b,d

SI METRIC CONVERSIONSOF NONHOMOGENEOUS EQUATIONS

Eq. (8-1)

0.17Kbwd
v, =

Eq. (1 1-3)

V, = 0 . 1 7 K b w d
+17.2~~ p)bwd
m14
Eq. (1 1-4)
Eq. (1 1 4 )

V, = 0.29flbwd

COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute

Licensed by Information Handling Services
 SI METRIC CONVERSIONSOF NONHOMOGENEOUS EQUATIONS(continued)
Eq. (1 1-9) Eq. (1 1-28)

V,, = O M ( 10 + : ) E b , d

Eq. (11-10) Eq. (1 1-30)

0 . 1 6 E+ 17pw
V Ld) b , d
MU

Eq. (1 1-1 1)
Eq. (1 1-32)
VPcr
Vci = 0 . 0 5 E b w d+ V +-
Mmax V, = 0 . 2 7 E h d +-
NUd
4/,
Eq. (11-12)
Eq. (1 1-33)
M c , = ( I / Y , ) ( 0 . 5 J r + f ,e - f d )

Eq. (1 1-13)
v, = hd
V , , = ( 0 . 2 9 z + 0.3f,,)b,d +V,
L

Eq. (1 1-14)
Eq. (1 1-36)
Av = 0.34-b W S
fY

€S. (11-16)

Eq. (1 1-37)
W
b s
( A , + 2A,) = 0.34-
f YV

Eq. (1 1-22) "= (9

bo
+2 n b , d / 12

0.07fl~xzy Eq. (1 1-38)

T, =

V, = f i b , d / 3

Eq. (1 1-25) Eq. (1 7-39)

v, = (P,& + 0.3fp,)b0d+ v,

Eq.: Section 11.6.9.3 Eq. (18-4)

b Ws
0.34- for 2At
f,, = f,,+69+ -
fc'
f v lop,
COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute
Licensed by Information Handling Services
 THIS DOCUMENT IS PROTECTEDBY THE LAWS
OF COPYRIGHT

If additional copies are needed, in whole or in part, contact the

Member Services Department of the American Concrete Institute:

P.O. Box 9094

Farmington Hills, Michigan
48333-9094
TEL: 248-848-3800
FAX: 248-848-3801

international

COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute

Licensed by Information Handling Services
 ~~ ~~

0662949 0538380 5 4 T

Nuclear Safety Related Concrete Structures

The AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE

was founded in 1905 as a nonprofit membership organization dedicated to
public service and to representing user interestsin the field of concrete. It
gathers and distributesinformationon the improvement of design,
construction, and maintenance of concrete products and structures. The
work of the Instituteisdonebyindividualmembersand by volunteer
committees.
Thecommittees, as wellastheInstitute as a whole,operateunder a
consensus format, which assuresall members the right to have their views
considered. Committee activities include the development building
of codes
and specification standards; analysisof research and development results;
presentation of construction and repair techniques; and education.
Anyone interested in the activities of the Institute is encouraged to seek
membership.Therearenoeducational oremploymentrequirements.
Engineers, architects, scientists, constructors, and representatives from a
variety of companies and organizations form the Institute membership.
All membersareeligibleandencouraged to participate in committee
activities that relateto their specificareasofinterest.Membership
information, a publications catalog, and listingsof educational activities are
available.

american concrete institute

P.O. BOX 9094
international FARMINGTON
HILLS,
MICHIGAN 48333

COPYRIGHT American Concrete Institute

Licensed by Information Handling Services